Sap Certification

Published on July 2016 | Categories: Documents | Downloads: 110 | Comments: 0 | Views: 1759
of 292
Download PDF   Embed   Report

SAP Certification questions

Comments

Content

Hi All,

All the certification aspirant friends, here are some of the questions that may be
helpful to understand the pattern and preparation.
Please provide your feedback in comments section.

CERTIFIED
1. What does SLD contain?
2. 19) In 3 system landscape from where the request can be imported
in QAS system (Single Choice)
a. Only from DEV
b. Only from QAS
c. Only from PRD
d. From all three systems
3. A question on CBS and DTR
4. sequence of SAP WEB AS Installation
5. 10) From SAP System which process is used to start External
Command / Program (Single Choice)
a. sapxpg
b. sapevt
c. disp+work.exe
d. gwrd
6. A question on TP profile name?
7. Are there multiple time based schedulers for multiple instances?
Are there multiple event based schedulers for multiple instances?
9. A question about Central Log viewer like...
We had a issue in SAPWEB as java, so we raised a call to SAP
SUPPORT. so mark out the corect once below
a.SAP SUPPORT should logon to the customer system tos ee the logs
b.They can view the logs by logviewer and without Remote server
running
c. service connections needs to be opened for SAPSUPPORT ......

New Questions
1) In terms of ABAP what do you mean by the term “VARIANT”

2) Different types of RFC:
a) Synchronous RFC
b) Transaction and Asynchronous RFC
c) Queued RFC
d) Fast RFC
e) Real Fast RFC
3) BASIS and Application support packs have their own release cycle?
(T/F)

4) What security types and methods can you use along with WEB AS
6.20
a) Store and Secure Forward (SSF)
b) Secure Network connection (SNC)
c) Secure ABAP protocol (SAP)
d) Secure JAVA protocol (SJP)

5) User is logged on to a logon group using logon load balancing,
how does message server allocate work processes for user‘s
request
a) Message server will allocate the available work processes from the
assigned SAP instance server (True / False)
6) Identify which statements related to “user master records” are
true
a) It gets generated by PFCG
b) A profile generated from a role can be attached using PFCG
c) Role can be assigned directly using SU01
d) Role can be assigned using PFCG
e) A generated profile from a role using PFCG can be assigned directly
using SU01
7) Parameters for minimum password length and maximum password
length
a) Login/min_password_lng (T/F)
b) Login/max_password_lng (T/F)

8) PFCG
9) Input library
10) CCMS
11)You cannot create your own monitor sets (T/F)

12)Changing parameter value for thresholds in one operating mode,
does not affect the other operation mode (T/F)
13)Total number of clients supported per SAP system
a) 1000
b) 994
c) 998
d) 003
14)Define the Acronym ACID, used by SAP system functioning

15)Online documentation
a) You can call PLAINTMLHTTP from web browser(T/F)
b) You can view HtmlHelpFile from Web browser (T/F)
c) PlainHtmlHelp takes less space compared to HTMLHelp (T/F)
d) Can install library on web server or file system cache (T/F)
16)Number of updates
a) At least one V1 should be present per system (T/F)
b) At least one V2 should be present per system (T/F)
c) If V2 update modules are present, then V1 update modules are
reserved for critical updates (V1 updates) (T/F)
17)How does SAP system pick up system time
a) BASIS administrator needs to set up system time
b) It picks up the time from Database Instance
c) It picks up the time from Central Instance
18)In case of MCOD, State whether the following statements are
True / False
a) Work process connect to Database using the one and same DB user
b) Migration from Non-Unicode to Unicode is possible
c) Unicode and Non-Unicode systems exists in the same database
19)Which statements regarding SAP system recommended hardware
sizing are true
a) Sizing starts with at least 256MB RAM and 1Ghz processor
b) Open a call to SAP and they will answer you back with sizing
c) Discuss with your hardware vendor
d) Go to site http://service.sap.com/sizing
20)Parameter rdisp/vbname & rdisp/mshost found in which profile
a) Default
b) Start profile
c) Central instance – Instance profile
d) Application Instance – Instance profile
21)Regarding SAPinst:
a) You need to install SAPinst fresh for every instance installation

b) You can restart the installation from the point of failure without
repeating the previous steps
c) It gets installed by default to the folder C:Tempinstall_log
22)Telephony:
a) SAP Mail – MTA
23)As part of SAP Installation preparation, what is the best thing you
can do:
a) Download the latest JDK from the site http://java.sun.com
b) Check for all the installation related problems
at http://service.sap.com/installationproblems
c) Mount the CD-ROM and dump all CD‘s to hard disk, and create
necessary space
d) Make sure there is enough RAM on server, so that you do not need to
reboot the server in between the installation
24)Post Installation steps
a) You can use PFCG without performing any post-installation steps (T/F)
25)What are the types of GUI available
a) GUI for windows
b) GUI for Java
c) GUI for HTML
d) GUI for LINUX
26)Which of these is a communication user in client 000
a) TMSADM
b) SAPDPIC
c) DDIC
d) SYS
27)What tools are provided by CTS
a) Client organizer
b) CTS Organizer
c) Transport Organizer
d) TMS

28)Which statements regarding Upgrade are true
a) Installing the new kernel is part of upgrade
b) Including the patches is part of the upgrade
c) Any modifications done, needs to be taken care of
d)
29)Which statements regarding SPDD are true
a) SPDD needs to be done after upgrade
b) SPDD needs to be done before upgrade
c) Modifications to data elements and tables would cause to SPDD
d) Modifications to Data elements and reports would cause to SPDD
30)Client copy – parallel processing / dialog

31)What causes changes to TMS configuration
a) Addition of a Virtual system in the landscape
b) Addition of a delivery route
c) Kernel Upgrade
d) R/3 Upgrade
32)Kernel patch application on one of the system in the landscape
33)When a SAP object is modified
a) It has to be included in a Customer package
b) It is to be included in pre-defined SAP standard package
34)ICM scalability:
a) ITS can be used along with WAS for certain business applications
b) ICM can process HTTP request for J2EE
35)Test script {refer to the question of TADM12, it is taken from
there}
a) same test container
b) different test container
36)CUA
a) Directory services – schema
37)DB request time
38)Processing time
39)Memory allocation sequence for dialog work process
a) rollfirst, heap memory until exhausted, remaining of roll area, then
Extended
memory
b)rollfirst, Extended memory until quota reached, remaining of Roll
area, then
Heap memory
40)Customizing request
a) Consists of one more tasks

41)Table Buffering
a) native SQL statements used, bypass buffering
b) Statement “BYPASS BUFFERING” uses Database access
c) Statement “USE BUFFERING” uses buffering
42)Expensive SQL statement (Screen Dump might be given)
a) buffer gets 5% Total Reads so Statement is expensive
b) buffer gets 5% Physical Reads so Statement is expensive
c) Statement is not expensive
d) Very high buffer gets so statement is expensive

e) High no of execution so statement is expensive
43)GUI time, RFC+CPIC, roll wait
44)User has set a language in his default, which is not installed in the
SAP system, he can use it by specifying the language during the
logon (T /F)
45)Screen dump of System  Status. Find the Database host name?
46)Sequence of Updates V1 & V2
a) both occur independently
b) first V1 and then V2
c) both simultaneously
47)Screen dump on TIME_LIMIT_EXCEED explanations and some
questions
48)Can W-GATE and Web server be on different boxes?
49)Which of the following files of TP contain configuration
a) transport.ini
b) DOMAIN_DEV.cfg
c) TP_DOMAIN>.PFL
d) tpimport.pfg
50)Uses of Solution Manager:
51)Enqueue / Dequeue is related to:
a) lock & unlocking at Database level
b) Lock & unlock of SAP transactions
52)A communication is to be done between 2 systems, such that none
should use anonymous logon for misuse to do remote logon to
target system (multiple choice)
a) To create a communication user in SU01 and Test Authorization
b) To keep logon details blank so that each user has to specify the details
every time a connection is made
53)What is the startup sequence of the SAP system? (multiple choice)
a) Database, gateway, dispatcher
b) Dispatcher, gateway, database
c) Database, dispatcher, gateway
54)User in Client 000 used to logon to a newly installed system (single
choice)
a) SAP* , pass
b) SAP*, 06071992
c) DDIC, 07061992
d) DDIC, 19920607
e) system/pass

55)Allocation sequence of DIA work process
a) rollfirst, heap memory until exhausted, remaining of roll area, then
Extended memory
b) rollfirst, Extended memory until quota reached, remaining of Roll area,
then Heap memory
56)From external programs which process is used to trigger an event
within an SAP system (Single Choice)
a) sapxpg
b) gwrd
c) dpmon
d) sapevt
e) disp+work.exe
57)When you do a modification then (single choice)
a) The package /dev class of the object has to be changed to Customer
dev. Class
b) The package /dev class of the object is within that of SAP and cannot
be changed
58)A customer wants to restrict modification. What should he do?
a) Change to ‘Not modifiable’ in SE06  System Change Option
(T/F)
b) avoid modification by using enhancements & Business Add-ins (T/F)
59)Further on Modifications
a) Every Modification has to be registered as SAP Service Marketplace
(T/F)
b) Every manual modification requires Developer Access key for the
developer (T/F)
c) Modification request has to be sent to SAP thru FAX (T/F)
d) All modifications should be done in DEV system for techincal reasons
(T/F)
e) If modifications done then further work is required during upgrades
(T/F)
60)Use of native SQL
a) Will always improve the performance (T/F)
b) Will remove the programs from being database independent (T/F)
c) Data accessed will not be buffered (T/F)
61)Operation mode switch from BTC to DIA
a) if jobs are running in BTC process then Operation Modes will
be switched after
the jobs are completed (T/F)
b) if jobs are running in BTC process then Operation Modes switch will be
cancelled (T/F)
c) The running jobs would be temporarily put in suspended status (T/F)
62)RZ20/RZ21

a) in order to add create new monitor set you have to switch to ‘Activate
Maintenance function ON’ (T/F)
b) It is recommended to copy Entire Monitor Set and then make changes
to it (T/F)
c) It is recommended to keep monitor set with minimum monitoring
objects so that
loading time of the set is minimum (T/F)
d) You should maintain the threshold values of the monitor set (T/F)
63) SAPCONNECT
a) SAPConnect only works with RFC destinations (T/F)
b) If you configure SAPConnect in client 000 then it is available to all
other
clients(T/F)
c) For Auto reaction method SAPConnect needs to be configured in client
000 (T/F)
d) For External mail configuration, a connection has to be maintained in
SCOT
(T/F)
e) No extra setting required for Mail Config (T/F)
f) An program has to be scheduled so that SAPConnect send external
mails (T/F)

64)How many spool work process can be configured? (Single Choice)
a) One per SAP Instance
b) One per SAP system
c) More than one per SAP instance
d) One on the Central instance
65)When the PREPARE phase in Upgrade is running, which log file is
created?
a) R3UP.LOG
b) R3UPCHK.LOG
c) R3CHK.LOG
d) CHECKS.LOG
e) PREPARE.LOG

66)For buffer synchronization:
a) In central system the only way is to make
bufrefmode=sendon/exeauto
b) In central instance and all dialog instance it should be
bufrefmode=sendoff/exeauto
c) In central system it should be bufrefmode=sendoff/exeauto
d) In central system and all dialog instances in exceptional conditions
may be set
as bufrefmode=sendoff/exeauto
e)
67)One screen dump on Load average of ST06 screen given (Single
Choice)

a) Load average is the Average CPU Utilization of the server
b) No. of CPU processes waiting in front of the CPU
Count
3
Load average 1 min
0.00
5 min
0.00
15 min
0.00
Context switches/s
2,790
68) Program ZZSLOW is there and it accesses ZZTABLE. You want to
improve the
performance (Multiple choice)
a) Create an Index on ZZTABLE and this is preferred over option of tuning
SQL
statement
b) Creating an index would definitely improve the performance
c) Tuning the SQL statement would solve the performance and is
preferred over
Index Creation
d) Optimizer may choose wrong index after creation of the index
69)If V1 process is only there and there are no V2 processes, then will
V1 process
handle V2 updates as well? (T/F)
70)Which of the following Trace Options can be started without
restarting SAP system
a) Buffer Trace
b) SYSLOG Trace
c) Database (SQL Access) Trace
d) Dispatcher Trace
e) Authorization (System Trace)
71)Analyze Problem of System startup. Before anyone could login the
system stops. Check using (Multiple choice)
a) Check SM21
b) Check <Drive>:usrsaplog directory
c) Analyze Database error log in detail
d) Check files in <Drive>:usrsap<instance><no>work folder
e) Check files in sapbackup folder

72)What of the following are Components in mySAP Technology
a) SAPGUI
b) mySAP database
c) ITS
d) SAPDB (MaxDB)
73)From where can the ITS be administered (Multiple choice)
a) From within SAP system
b) From Web server
c) From ITS Admin instance

74)Enqueue table is stored in (Single choice)
a) Table TLOCK in database
b) In Central instance at file level
c) In shared memory of the Central instance
d) In shared memory of each SAP instance
75)Client copy
a) Remote copy creates huge file in operating system level in target
systems
(T/F)
b) Client copies can be done within same system (T/F)
c) Remote Client copy can be done using parallel processes (T/F)
76)Buffering for a frequently updated table should be (Single choice)
a) Single record buffering
b) Generic buffering
c) No buffering
d) Full buffering
77)How to create additional SAP Service Marketplace users (Single
choice)
a) One user SAPADM always there for every customer
b) At customer place the user with Administrator rights can create
additional
users
c) Create an OSS message for creating additional users
d) Has to check license & contract between SAP & customer
78)SCU0 along with SM30 can be used to (Multiple choice)
a) Compare clients within same system
b) Compare different clients within different systems
c) Can be used to adjust customizing along with SM30
d) Can be used to compare transaction tables
79)Which process first connects to the database?
a) Dispatcher
b) Message server
c) Work process
d) SAPGUI
e) Gateway
80)A communication is to be done between 2 systems, such that none
should use
anonymous logon for misuse to do remote logon to target system
(Multiple choice)
a) If you do not give RFC target system, system no etc. then a default
Logon is
performed on to 000 / own system with user SAPCPIC
b) Create a communication user in SU01 and specify it in target
destination

c) Keep logon details blank so that each user has to specify the details
every
time a connection is made
81) Where the R/3 Spool system stores data:
a) In the TemSe database
b) at the Operating system

SAP Web AS Questions

All changes to SAP owned objects...
Choose the answer which correctly completes the sentence.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

Must be registered with SAP Software Change Registration (SSCR).
Can only be performed in a Development (Integration) System
Are saved to tasks of type repair.
Will require adjustment during future system upgrades.
Will never require adjustment during future system upgrades.

Identify which statements related to “user master records” are true
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

It gets generated by PFCG
A profile generated from a role can be attached using PFCG
Role can be assigned directly using SU01
Role can be assigned using PFCG
A generated profile from a role using PFCG can be assigned directly using
SU01

Online documentation
A. You can call PLAINTMLHTTP from web browser(True/False)
B. You can view HtmlHelpFile from Web browser (True/False)
C. PlainHtmlHelp takes less space compared to HTMLHelp (True/False)
D. Can install library on web server or file system cache (True/False)
Regarding SAPinst:
A. You need to install SAPinst fresh for every instance installation
B. You can restart the installation from the point of failure without repeating the
previous steps
C. It gets installed by default to the folder C:Tempinstall_log
What tools are provided by CTS?
A. Client organizer

B. CTS Organizer
C. Transport Organizer
D. TMS
Memory allocation sequence for dialog work process
A. rollfirst, heap memory until exhausted, remaining of roll area, then Extended
memory
B. rollfirst, Extended memory until quota reached, remaining of Roll area, then
Heap memory
C. Roll memory upto ztta/roll_first, Extended memory upto
ztta/roll_extension or EM exhausted, Roll memory remainder of
ztta/roll_area, Heap memory upto abap/heap_area_dia or HM
exhausted
Which of the following files of TP contain configuration?
A. transport.ini
B. DOMAIN_DEV.cfg
C. TP_DOMAIN.PFL
D. tpimport.pfg
What is the startup sequence of the SAP system? (Multiple choice)
A.
B.
C.
D.

Database Process(es), message server, dispatcher, ICM
Dispatcher, gateway, database
Database Process(es), ICM, message server
Gateway, database, dispatcher

For buffer synchronization:
A. In central system the only way is to make bufrefmode=sendon/exeauto
B. In central instance and all dialog instance it should be
bufrefmode=sendoff/exeauto
C. In central system it should be bufrefmode=sendoff/exeauto
D. In central system and all dialog instances in exceptional conditions may be
set
as bufrefmode=sendoff/exeauto
Enqueue table is stored in (Single choice)
A. Table TLOCK in database
B. In Central instance at file level
C. In shared memory of the Central instance
D. In shared memory of each SAP instance
SCU0 along with SM30 can be used to (Multiple choice)
A. Compare clients within same system

B. Compare different clients within different systems
C. Can be used to adjust customizing along with SM30
D. Can be used to compare transaction tables
Which of the following statements is true regarding the Support
packages?
A. Support package replaces an object affected by an error, unlike manual
corrections support packages are not recognized as modifications during
upgrade and are overwritten.
B. Support packages are to be applied in the correct order by creating a patch
queue and required confirmation at each step. SAP support package manager
(SPAM) is the sap tool which has to be used for applying support packages.
C. Support packages will alter the user developed programs wherever
necessary, which are belonging to any user created namespaces.
D. During the support package application, modification adjustment may be
required using SPDD and SPAU. Modifications request appears for every sap
standard object which is changed from its original (ex for applying an OSS
note. ) Modification adjustment performed once can be transported to other
systems in the landscape.

The Internet communication manager as an integral part of the SAP
WAS, and it serves which of the following functions? (Choose all that
apply.)
A. ICM processes the incoming request using “threads” the threads
communicate with the work processes to complete a task.
B. ICM ensures communication between the SAP WAS and the outside world
using HTTP, HTTPS and SMTP protocols.
C. ICM generates the Internet server cache to optimize performance when
redundant requests.
D. ICM acts like a firewall and ensures that the communication is encrypted and
signed with a digital certificate.
From external programs which process is used to trigger an event within an SAP
system(Single Choice) : Sapevt
From SAP which process is used to trigger an event within an External
system(Single Choice) : SapXPG
In Archiving there is a picture , which talks about Name of archive file
<Param_3>Global<date>.<Time> almost everybody got that question
DIR_GLOBAL(usrsap<SID>SYSglobal)<PARAM_3><DATE>.<TIME>

Read thoroughly about Integrated ITS parameters

Know the differences between Open SQL over Native SQL
Read thoroughly about the Paths (of Exe files, Profiles, Profile Names) Etc

Different types of RFC:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

Synchronous RFC
Transaction and Asynchronous RFC
Queued RFC
Fast RFC
Real Fast RFC

Which statements regarding Upgrade are true?
A. Installing the new kernel is part of upgrade – False: as it is Kernel update and
not upgrade
B. Including the patches is part of the upgrade - True
C. Any modifications done, needs to be taken care of - True
D. You can ignore errors from previous upgrade attempts.- False
E. Modifications done, will increase upgrade work during next upgrade –True
From Transaction SM50, you can find details about: (Know each and
every field in the SM50 Screen, Know purpose of Query, Sem , Table ,
Tcode fields thoroughly, Some screen dump will be given)
A. Transactions that are causing maximum load
B. User who is generating maximum load
C. Table name, a particular transaction is using
D. SQL statement , that is creating the load
Which of the following statements are correct in regard to the SAP
Patch Manager?
A. The SAP Patch Manager ensures that Support Packages are applied in the
correct sequence - True
B. The SAP Patch Manager does not check whether the type of Support Package
you wish to apply is appropriate for your R/3 installation. It is up to you to
decide whether, for example, you require a Conflict Resolution Transport. False
C. The SAP Patch Manager does not offer you the chance to protect SAP objects
that you have modified. These objects are automatically overwritten. - False
D. The SAP Patch Manager automatically prompts you to call the modification
adjustment Transactions SPDD or SPAU if necessary - True
Which process at the application server level receives the user request?
A. Work process
B. Dispatcher
C. Buffer

D. SAP GUI
What tasks does the task handler carry out?
A. Communicates with SAP GUI
B. Coordinates activities within the work process
C. Accesses the database
D. Processes the ABAP coding on which a transaction is based
Is the assignment of users to dialog work processes fixed?
A. Yes, it is fixed for the entire time that the user is logged on to the SAP system
B. Yes, it exists for the entire duration of a transaction consisting of several
screens
C. No. Each dialog step of a transaction, consisting of several screens, can
theoretically be processed by a different work process
D. None of the above
Know the difference between Modification, Extension & Customer
development SAP Business Workflow ensures that:
A. Appropriately configured business processes can be partially automated
B. Appropriately configured business processes are executed in consistent
sequences
C. The right employee receives the right work at the right time
D. Your workflow-supported business processes are handled more efficiently
E. All your company processes that have been implemented in ABAP run
without errors
In what sequence does the system read the system parameters the
specified locations?
A.
B.
C.
D.

1. Instance profile 2. Default profile 3. Kernel
1. Start.ini 2. Kernel 2. Default profile 4. Instance profile
1. Kernel 2. Default profile 3. Instance profile
1. Kernel 2. start.ini 3. Default profile 4. Instance profile

In what sequence should you perform the listed steps when setting up
operation modes?
A. 1. Create operation modes 2. Assign instances 3. Distribute work processes
4. Maintain time table
B. 1. Create operation modes 2. Maintain time table 3. Distribute work
processes 4. Assign instances
C. 1. Create operation modes 2. Distribute work processes 3. Maintain time
table 4. Assign instances
Set up a dynamic switch of work process types using operation modes

You can use transaction SM50 (Work Process Overview) to display the amount of
CPU time used by individual work processes since the last time they were
started. True / False
Which statements are correct?
A. The transport of objects is divided into Export, Storage, and Import phases.
True/False
B. The import into the target system is performed automatically at midnight
Greenwich Mean Time. True/False
C. The transport directory is specified by parameter DIR_TRANS. True/False
D. When transporting, the following rule applies: The target client is the same
as the source client, unless otherwise specified. True/False
Which statements are correct?
A. Support Packages can be imported in any order. True/False
B. All SPAM/SAINT updates must always be imported. True/False
C. The queue for importing the SPAM update must be manually confirmed.
True/False
D. A prerequisite for importing a SPAM/SAINT update is that there are no
aborted Support Packages in the system. True/False
What status can a job have?
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.

Running
Released
Waiting
Finished
Error
Active

If one of the system’s ten background work processes is reserved for
class A jobs, and jobs are being processed in the other nine work
processes, the reserved work process remains free even if a class A job
is waiting for execution. True/False

If a user has authorization to schedule an external program as a step of
a background job, he or she can run any operating system command.
True/False
What types of monitors are there in the SAP system?
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

Ruled monitors
Statistical monitors
Rule-based monitors
Static monitors
Self-Repairing monitors

JAVA Questions:
The parameters that are maintained with the Visual Administrator only
become active after the SAP Web AS Java has been restarted. True/False

You can use the Config Tool to add additional server processes to an
SAP Web AS Java instance. True/ False

If the Java administration user is locked, there are no other users that
can log on to the system and release the lock. True/False

The SAP Web AS Java can only be monitored locally and not in a central
monitoring system. True/False

During the availability check with the GRMG, an XML document is sent
by HTTP as the response to a request. True/False

Which of the following traces is part of SAP Web AS Java?
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.

Developer trace
Single Activity Trace
Application trace
System trace
Performance trace
SQL trace

Which of the following services is part of the SAP NetWeaver Java
Development Infrastructure (JDI)?
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

Design Time Repository (DTR)
Object Development Tool (ODT)
Component Build Service (CBS)
Name server
Central Make Tool (CMT)

Which statements about tracks, systems, and development
configurations are correct?
A. A track always contains exactly one development configuration.
B. A track contains multiple systems.
C. A system consists of a development configuration and a runtime
environment.

D. A track is used for developing different software components in different
releases.
E. A track is always used to develop only one release of a specific software
component.
Which statements about transporting Java objects are correct?
A. When importing requests into the consolidation system, the activation of the
objects is automatically started.
B. As in the ABAP environment, only individual development objects and, in
general, not entire software components are imported into the production
system.
C. During the assembly step, only links to required software components are
created.
D. All required software components are included in the archive to be created
during the assembly step.
To restore the SAP Web AS Java if a system error occurs, is it sufficient
to backup the directory /usr/sap. True/False
Which tools can you use to administer an SAP ITS (standalone)?
A. WGate configuration tool
B. Transaction SITS in the SAP system
C. ITS administration tool
D. Microsoft Management Console with the SAP ITS Snap-In
Which statement(s) is/are correct?
A. The ICM is implemented as a thread and is available for a large number of
operating systems.
B. You can use an instance profile parameter to configure how many ICMs are
started for each ABAP dispatcher.
C. SAP recommends that you operate a separate ICM for each client in an SAP
system
Data exchange between SAP Web AS Java and SAP Web AS ABAP is
available via:
A. MPI
B. SDM
C. ICM
D. Jco and fast RFC

VM parameters can be configured by which tool ?
A. Config tool. – This is the only tool to configure JVM parameters.
B. Visual administrator

C. Telnet
D. Xxxxxxx
You need to restart JAVA instance after changing parameters using
Visual administrator (True/False) – As most of the parameters, changed by
visual Admin, will be applied during runtime.

Understand Global and Local settings in config tool and VA. Go through
all Screen shots.

Communication between UME and ABAP user management is performed with
which user?
A.
B.
C.
D.

SAPJSF
Zzzzzzz
Xxxxxxx
Aaaaaaa

In case of errors, SAPinst stops the installation automatically and
restarts the installation process. True/False

Remember the port of Dispatcher (32<nn>), Message Server (36<nn>),
Gateway (33<nn>), Spool (515)

Which of the following is not a classical GUI variant to access the SAP
system?
A.
B.
C.
D.

Business Explorer
SAP GUI for Windows
SAP GUI for HTML
SAP GUI for Java

The __SAPJSF__________ user is used for RFC communication between
ABAP and Java stack.

When installing a Dialog Instance, J2EE Add-in DDIC user is used to
setup the operation system account for <sid>adm. True/False
During the SAP J2EE Add-in installation, the Central Instance profile is changed.
How do you activate these changes?

After the installation of the central instance, a temporary license is active for six
weeks. True/False

What are the steps needed to install additional languages?

Only the BASIS and ABA Support Packages are applied to the SAP ERP Central
Component system. True/False

Software Logistics

5. you require SAProuter for:
a. AAAAA
b. SAPNet- R/3 front end
c. Early watch
d. Remote consulting
When you initialize TMS, following actions are automatically performed:
A. Transport group GROUP_SID is created
B. Communication user TMSADM is created in client 000
C. Transport profile TP_DOMAIN.PFL is created an stored in transport
subdirectory bin
D. TMS configuration file DOMAIN.CFG is stored in transport
subdirectory bin
E. RFC destinations required for TMS are generated
One screen shot and to find out if the SQL statement is expensive.
(It was easy to find out that the statement was expensive as number of buffer
gets was too high)

One question on difference between Compute statistic and estimate statistics

Table with frequently changed data should be placed in buffer.
True/False

Which of the following are available as SAP library?
A. Compressed HTML
B. PlainHtmlHttp

C.
D.
E.
F.
G.

PlainHtmlFile
DynamicHelp
StatisHelp
Sap Helpkit
CompiledHtml

Which of the following is not a SAP Netweaver Component?
A.
B.
C.
D.

SAP Business One
mySAP ERP
mySAP All-in-one
SAP for Aerospace & Defense

Business Content is
A. Add on for BIW
B. Add on for EP
C. Integral component of BIW
D. Integral component of EP
Is Use favorites menu specific to client he logs in? (True/False)

Know the difference between SAP Transaction & Database Transaction.

What button(s) can you use to create new entries in the SAP Logon
system list?
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.

Change Item...
New Item...
Log on
Groups...
Server...
Create

Problem Analysis – Know the paths of database error log files, SAP Trace files,
SAP System log etc. Similarly, Database alert log, Oracle Trace files, sqldba Error
log files

The following personalization options are available in the SAP GUI:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

You can change the font size (within limits) in the SAP GUI
You can have system messages displayed in a dialog box
You can change the size of input fields
You can suppress the display of pictures in the SAP GUI
Every user can display a picture of his or her choice on the SAP Easy Access
screen

F.

You can use a personal input history on your front end

Which software components allow load balancing in the context of SAP
Web AS Java?
A. SAP Web Dispatcher
B. ABAP dispatcher
C. Java dispatcher
D. Server processes
The most important trace and log files are stored in the work directory
of each instance, that is, for example, under
/usr/sap/<SID>/DVEBMGS00/work. True/False

What is the process flow during the installation of SAP Web AS
ABAP+Java?
A. 1. SAP Web AS Java central instance, 2. Database instance, 3. SAP Web AS
ABAP central instance
B. 1. Database instance, 2. SAP Web AS ABAP central instance, 3. SAP Web AS
Java central instance
C. 1. SAP Web AS ABAP central instance, 2. Database instance, 3. Completion of
the central instance with SAP Web AS Java
Remember the examples of client-specific data.

If the system change options are set to not modifiable and in the client
change options allow the changing of repository objects, you can not
change repository objects from within this client. True /False

Which statements concerning transport routes are correct?
A. SAP distinguishes between consolidation routes and delivery routes
B. SAP distinguishes between export routes and import routes
C. If you want to export change requests from an SAP system, there needs to
be at least one consolidation route starting from this system.
D. If you want to export change requests from an SAP system, there needs to
be at least one export route starting from this system
E. If you want to export change requests from an SAP system, there needs to be
at least one delivery route starting from this system
Which statements are correct?
A. A transport domain consists of SAP systems sharing the same transport
directory.

B. A transport group consists of SAP systems sharing the same transport
directory.
C. A system landscape consists of SAP systems sharing the same transport
directory.
D. You can add additional system to a transport domain by logging on to any
system of the domain.
E. Additional systems can be included into the domain only from the transport
domain controller system.
How can you achieve that a change request containing only one ABAP
program from the DEV system will be imported into several clients of
the QAS system?
A. By using client dependent transport routes
B. By using transport target groups
C. By defining different consolidation routes pointing from the DEV system to
the QAS system
D. It is impossible to achieve this with TMS.
Know the difference between customizing and workbench request.

SAP recommends that:
A. Project manager or person responsible for the transport (a limited number of
users) are creating the change requests
B. Project member should always create there change request by there own
C. The project members are assigned to the change request by creation of
tasks for each project member inside the change request
D. Project members are recording changes in their own task (assigned by the
project manager or person responsible for the transport)
What should be done before releasing a change request in the
development system?
A. Unit testing
B. Release of all tasks inside the change request
C. Deletion of tasks inside the change request
D. Information of system administration about the released tasks
What is the function of Modification Assistant?

Remember the following screenshot to know the transport directory naming
conventions. (folder names like actlog (For Ex.EVZ900827), sapnames, data
(R900827.DEV), cofiles (K900827.DEV), buffer, log (ULOG, SLOG, ALOG) etc.

Using TMS, you can import all change requests listed in the production
system import queue in the given sequence. True/False

How do you import a change request into QAS?

SAP recommends that you reject requests containing errors. True/False

The naming convention for files saved in the subdirectory cofiles is as
follows:
A.
B.
C.
D.

<source SID>Z<6 digits>
<source SID>K9<5 digits>
R9<5 digits>.<source SID>
K9<5 digits>.<source SID>

Which additional tools are called by tp to perform all import steps?
A.
B.
C.
D.

tp_abap.exe
RDDIMPDP
R3trans
R3import

The command _______________ searches for transport requests that are not
marked for import into any SAP system by comparing with buffer entries (tp
check all)
(tpcheckall & tpclearold commands are used to delete old files.)(pg-301)
Client transport consists of two processes: export and import (with post
import activities). True

List the steps to delete a client from within an SAP system.(delete entry
from scc4 (T000) will just lock the client data is stil in DB , use SCC5 to
delete the client . login to the client t be deleted )

Know about the Upgrade tools Jup,R3up, UA, SGEN, PREPARE, ICNV pg –
410 dig (pg- 412 til 417)

SAP Support Packages of one component can be imported in any order.
False

Remember the conditions for which modification adjustments are
necessary.

SAP Web AS Implementation and Operation II (Workload Analysis)

Components of dialog response time in details (wait time, roll-in,
load+generate, processing, lock time, db request time

Got some screenshot of ST02 and asked to identify the problem.

Settings needed for using the integrated SAP ITS - SAP profile
parameter itsp/enable is set to 1

How to detect expense SQL using the Work process Overview?

Advantages of using index and statistics while running a query.

What are the different options of table buffering?

SQL Statements That Bypass Buffered Table Content
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

SELECT ... BYPASSING BUFFER
SELECT FOR UPDATE
SELECT DISTINCT
ORDER BY(other than the primary key)
Any aggregate function (COUNT, MIN, MAX, SUM, AVG), for example SELECT
MIN(F1) FROM T1 WHERE...
F. WHERE clause contains IS NULL
G. All native SQL statements
Transaction step with roundtrip in RFC Calls

What is the user id and initial password when you create a new
client (SAP*/pass)
Evaluate the following statements.
A. SAP* and DDIC are SAP users with no critical authorizations. (True/False)
B. By default, user DDIC exists only in client 000. (True/False)

C. HTTP, encrypted using SSL, is called HTTPS. (True/False)
D. The ICM can accept encrypted connections. (True/False)
After data has been archived from the SAP system and deleted from the
SAP system’s database, it is no longer possible to access this data with
read accesses. True/False

Which of the following access methods exist in the SAP system?
A.
B.
C.
D.

Remote printing
Front-end printing
Instance printing
Local printing

Remember the paths of SAP System Trace (ST01) and Performance
Trace (ST05) - /usr/sap/<SID>/D*/log/TRACE

Remember the path of Developer Traces - /usr/sap/<SID>/D*/work/dev_*

What is the default port for SAPLPD use under Microsoft Windows?
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.

007
515
516
517
815
The port defined by profile parameter rspo/port

With which methods is it possible to create users in child systems in the context
of active CUA?
A. In the child system with transaction SU01, Systems tab page
B. In the central system with transaction SU01, Systems tab page.
C. In the central system with transaction PFCG
D. In the child system with transaction PFCG
E. In the central system with transaction SU01, Roles tab page
(systems / Roles & Profiles tab page)
During a synchronization process, data can be simultaneously imported and
exported for a user. True

Oracle Database

One shadow process will be initiated for each work process in an
instance or in an SAP SYSTEM? True/False

What authorization/privilege is required to start up/shutdown database
(SYSDBA/SYSOPER)?

The Oracle alert log file is located in directory
(oracle<dbsid>saptracebackgroundalert_<DBSID>.log)?

For minimal security of an Oracle database:
A. The database must be installed on a cluster.
B. The online redo log files must be mirrored.
C. Online redo log files and data files must reside on different disks.
D. Archiving must be turned on.
E. Offline redo log files and data files must reside on different disks.
The correct procedure to change the password of database user
SAP<SCHEMA-ID> is to use the Oracle command ALTER USER. True/False
Your daily backups are performed with automatic tape selection; no
volume for backup is specified. Which tapes will be accepted for backup
(assuming the tape lock period is expired in all cases)?
A. Any labeled tape
B. The tape labeled with the volume name you got from DB13, Goto → Tapes
C. A tape labeled with volume name scratch
D. Any unlabeled tape
You have a serious problem during an upgrade and decide to restore and recover
the database to the state before the upgrade: after SAP was shut down and no
productive activity was done. As your latest backup was performed the evening
before, you choose the database point-in-time recovery scenario.
There was screenshot given from ST03N and want to give the comments on Total
Response time, Expense SQL etc.

Which of the following statements with regard to Central User
Administration are correct?
A. CUA can be implemented as of SAP R/3 4.0B.
B. Only SAP R/3 systems can be linked to CUA.
C. CUA uses an ALE setup.
D. The clients linked by CUA are called logical systems.

E. The clients linked with the CUA are known as the “central system” and “child
systems.”
Oracle Directory Structure on SAP Systems : Know the whole directory
structure – oracle/<DBSID>/<Release>/bin, dbs, network etc.
oracle/<DBSID>/sapdata1/
oracle/<DBSID>/origlogA, origlogB, mirrlogA, mirrlogB
oracle/<DBSID>/oraarch, saporch, saptrace, sapbackup, sapcheck,
sapreorg

How a Work Process will connect to Oracle? – connect as OPS$ user
Which of the following statements is true?
A. Data files can be mirrored by Oracle.
B. Online redo log files can be mirrored by Oracle.
C. Control files can be mirrored by Oracle.
D. Parameter files can be mirrored by Oracle.

When stopping the database using shutdown mode _______________, instance
processes are stopped immediately and no rollback of open transactions is
performed during the shutdown.

Which of the following shutdown modes leaves the database in a
consistent state?
A.
B.
C.
D.

NORMAL
TRANSACTIONAL
IMMEDIATE
ABORT

The Oracle alert log file is located in directory
$SAPDATA_HOME/saptrace/background

You lost data files and offline redo log files on a disk crash, because
they were on the same disk. Complete recovery is possible anyway,
because you perform a backup of the offline redologs with BRARCHIVE
twice per day. True /False

Assuming a full database backup and all offline redo log files would fit
on one tape, you would need at least _______________ tape to backup the
database plus offline redo log files

To perform a complete database reset, you need which of the following backups?
A. Complete offline backup
B. Complete online backup
C. Consistent online backup
D. Backup of offline redo log files

JAVA Questions:
1. Which s/w components allow load balancing in context of SAP web
AS JAVA?
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)

ABAP Dispatcher
JAVA Dispatcher
Message Server
ICM
Central services
SAP Web dispatcher

2. In ABAP + JAVA installation, ICM connects to the JAVA dispatcher
using which protocol?
a) DIAG
b) CPIC
c) Memory Pipes
d) HTTP
e) HTTPS
f) SMTP
Memory Pipes to abap
3. It is advisable to put message server and enqueue process on one
machine.
( True )

4. Trace files and log files for each instance is stored in:

/usr/sap/<SID>/DEEBMGS00/work
5. In context of SAP web AS JAVA, which program is used to install
Dialog instance?
a)
b)
c)
d)

SAPInst.exe
Aaaaaaaaaa
Bbbbbbbbbbbb
Ccccccccc

7. One question on how you can verify the location of installation
Cds ?
- By clicking check Location check box during installation
a) You need to restart JAVA instance after changing parameters
using Visual administrator (TRUE/ FALSE) – As most of the
parameters, changed by visual Admin, will be applied during
runtime.
9. understand Global and Local settings in config tool and VA. Go through all
Screen shots. Page 148/149/150 and from 161 to 170.
Everybody got one question based on these screen shots. So, don’t
ignore…..!!!!
10. Almost everyone got one question on how to create Server process. Go
through Page number 190/191 well. You will have one question from this
screen for sure….
11. Everybody got one question from Attribute mapping with directory
Services. Though every trainer categorically ruled out a possibility of
questions coming from appendix, almost everyone got this
question….!!!!!!
Read page 217/218 well.
12.The administration user for SAP web AS with ABAP and JAVA is:
a. SAPJSF
b. J2EE_ADM_<SID>
c. J2ee_Admin
d. Aaaaaaaaa
Sapjsf – communication user Java to abap // J2EE_ADM_<SID>  remote abap
system.
14. Trace file containing information about entire Server, UME at os
level.
a. <J2EERoot>/cluster/server X/log/defaulttrace.#.trc

15. Which UME properties can you influence with parameters?
a. Number of failed logon attempts before a user is locked
b. Average length of user name
c. Password are automatically generated
d. Email notification if a user is locked by admin
e. Directory service data source : specification of instance number
f. SAP web AS ABAP data source: Specification of SID
16. following steps are required to configure SAPCCMSR agent
a. Start agent registration in Visual Administrator
b. Create CSMADMIN user
c. Create CSMCONF file
d. Setup RFC connection to Central monitoring system
e. Create CSMREG user
17. Know GRMG well. Everyone got one question on that. Page
348/349/350/351/353/352

During availability check with GRMG, an XML document is sent by
which protocol ?
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)

DIAG
CPIC
XML
SSL
HTTP
SMTP

Note: read about all traces and logging types. Central logging, Log
viewer and Single activity trace, SQL trace etc well.

Note: Read chapter 6 and 7 well. You will get around 5 to 6 questions
from that.

18. Which statements about tracks, systems and development
configurations are correct?
a. Track always contains exactly one development configuration
b. A track generally contains multiple systems
c. A system consists of a development configuration and a
runtime environment
d. A track is used for developing one software component in different
release

19. Which statements about DTR and CBS are correct?
a. DTR consists of an active and an inactive workspace
b. Checking development components into DTR means they can be
used by other developers
c. Activating development components in CBS means they can
be used by other developers
d. If the central build fails, the elements of active workspace are
placed in inactive workspace
20. Which statements about transporting JAVA objects are correct ?
a. When importing requests into consolidation system, the
activation of objects is automatically started
b. As in ABAP, only individual development objects and. In general, not
the entire software components are imported into the production
system
c. During assembly, only links to required software
components are created
d. All required software components are included in the archive to be
created during assemble step
Software logistics – week 3 questions:
1. Features of SAPinst – Read page 19- I had one straight question
2. Know non-unicode, Unicode and MCOD well. One question is sure- page 12
to 15
3. When high security setting are used on iSeries computers, password
entries become case sensitive – TRUE / FALSE
4. while installing dialog instance, port number that you specify for message
server port can be different from one specified on the central instance
host.
( TRUE/ FALSE)
6. Which of the following activity is performed by installation check ?
a. Completeness of installation
b. Version compatibility
c. Accessibility of message server
d. Network security
7. One question on conversion from non-unicode to Unicode
a. Read page 312 well. Everybody got one question on that
8. One question for sure on Changes and transports for clientspecific objects and client-independent changes
a. Read page 351 -352 well. They can ask what should be the setting
for a specific type of change. E.g. automatic recording of

changes or changes to repository and cross-client
customizing allowed etc. so go through these options well.
9. When you initialize TMS, following actions are automatically
performed:
a. Transport group GROUP_SID is created
b. Communication user TMSADM is created in client 000
c. Transport profile TP_DOMAIN.PFL is created an stored in
transport subdirectory bin
d. TMS configuration file DOMAIN.CFG is stored in transport
subdirectory bin
e. RFC destinations required for TMS are generated
Note: read page 370 well. This is a sure question
10.One question for everybody was there on Client-specific Transport Control
a. Read page 392-393
11.One question for everybody was there on transport between transport
groups and between transport domains
a. Read page 395 to 398
12.Straight questions from page 401, question number 2 and 3. I got both
13.Project leader and team member responsibility . One question for sure.
Read Page 410.
14.One question on customizing procedure. Know steps well. You can refer
figure 280, page 430.
15.One question on SSCR registration concepts. Read page 455.
16.One question on requirements for releasing a task and releasing a change
request. Refer figure 302, page 474.
17.One straight question on IMG. Page 499; test your knowledge, question
number 1.
18.Page 499; test your knowledge, question number 4.
19.One question on preliminary imports. page 518
20.SAP recommends rejecting requests containing errors, during subsequent
transports. ( TRUE / FALSE)
21.Read about Import queue and import buffer. One question for sure.
22.One question for sure on TP import process. Figure 341-342; page 572,
573, 574. Know TRBAT, TRJOB, RDDIMPDP , R3TRANS ( Like TP calls
R3TRANS etc..) well.
23.I had one question from trouble shooting transport page number 584, last
paragraph. Log file format
a. Source SID><action><6digits>.TargetSID. some target system
name was given and we have to find out log file name.
24.I had one question on command tp check all . page 596
25.Two questions exactly same from test your knowledge page number 602.
Question number 7 and 8.
26.One question from client copy. Local and Remote client copy. Page 609,
610, 611.
27.can Client copy use parallel processing in Client transport- NO.

You can use parallel processing only in local and remote client
copy.
28.One question on client maintenance settings. Page 631. specifically
protection levels.
29.SAP notes can change ABAP dictionary objects ( TRUE/FALSE)
a. SAP notes does not require SSCR key ( TRUE/ FALSE)
b. SAP note can contain prerequisites, interactions, and references to
post processing activities ( TRUE/FALSE)
c. SAP note contain solution for an error in source code of SAP ABAP
program ( TRUE/ FALSE)
Note: read page 643 last paragraph
30.Read page 669 . SPAM and SAINT. One question is for sure specifically
SPAM and SAINT update.

Here are workload analysis questions:
1. Maximum number of sessions allowed are defined by
Max_alt_mode
And maximum sessions allowed are 9

, default is 6

2. What details can you get from SM50 ?
 A long list was given and you have to choose the correct ones.
 Refer page 30 to 34. You can get details like:
Report, User, Cl, Table, action like Direct read, Load program,
sequential read etc. Remember these well as many of us got this
question

3. screen shot was given and some questions:
 Page number 37
 Know difference between CPU utilization and Average CPU load, 1 ,
5 and 15 minutes. I had this straight question
4. Read Page 71 well. You may get two questions from that. One on
integrated ITS properties and one sure will be on either
 Itsp/enable =1 or
 /sap/bc/gui/sap/its/webgui
5. What does SAP buffers contain? – page 80
a.
b.
c.
d.

Aaaaaa
Global contents for users
Global contents for work process
Programs

e. Buffered table contents
6. What does Extended memory contain? Page 81
7. Reasons for using extended memory
a. Fast context switches are needed in SAP, as many users
share few work processes
b. Extended memory id accessed through pointers, therefore
fast context switches are possible
c. Sap transactions consists usually of more than one
step/screen
d. Extended memory area is generally very huge. So data can be
placed there permanently
8. Memory allocation sequence for dialog work processes
a. Roll memory up to roll first-extended memory – remaining
roll area, heap memory – everybody got this question- read page
97
9. One question based on Hardware sizing
a. Read Hardware Analysis Roadmaps given on page no 119,120 and
121 well, you can get one question
b. And also last paragraph of page 126
10. One screen shot and to find out if the SQL statement is
expensive.
a. Screen shot similar to page 146 and it was easy to find out that the
statement was expensive as number of buffer gets was too high
11. One question on difference between Compute statistic and
estimate statistics
a. Page number 174 top paragraph.
12. Table with frequently changed data should be placed in buffer.
a. TRUE / FALSE
13. Following statements bypass table buffering:
a. All native SQL statements
b. All OPEN SQL statements
c. SELECE…..BYPASSING BUFFER
d. SELECT for UPDATE
14. Read restrictions and Recommendations for table buffering. You
will get one question from it
a. Page 195

15. RFC + CPIC time consists of
a. CPIC COMMUNICATION TIME
b. Wait , roll in and load time
c. Roll out time
d. Roll wait time
e. Roll in time
f. Processing time
16. Which of the following are available as SAP library:
a. Compressed HTML
b. PlainHtmlHttp
c. PlainHtmlFile
d. DynamicHelp
e. StatisHelp
f. Sap Helpkit
g. CompiledHtml

17. Name and location of archived file. Name time is given and you have to
tell the exact file name- page 273 figure 181 , last box time
18.11.2004, 12.00 for example
18. Question 2 of page number 293
19. I got Three questions from chapter 13. and they were exactly same as
given on page 473. So read it carefully.
Question 1
Based upon the information in this R/3 System Status screen, what is the
network node name where the R/3 database is installed?

1) One of the expensive statements chooses an unsuitable access path
leading to many buffer gets but only a few records per execution.
Such type of statements can be tuned with:
a) Update of optimizer statistics
b) Change of ABAP code
c) Optimizing user input
d) Creating an index
2) Which of the following table is used to update the accuracy of table
statistics using DB21?
a) DBMSGORA
b) DBCHECKORA
c) DBSTATC
d) BDSTATC
1 - Is data written to the Oracle transaction logs (redo logs) before or after
the information is written in the database files?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A. Before
B. After
C. Simultaneously
D. The priority and sequence of database writes and transaction log writes is
controlled by the parameter "dblg_after" in the ORACLE initialization file.
E. Randomly, sometimes before, sometimes after
What action needs to be taken when Oracle returns an ORA-1653 error,
failure to allocate an extent for a table in a specific tablespace?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A. The tablespace should be moved to a faster disk so that Oracle can find the
extents quicker.
B. The tablespace size should be increased by adding 1 or more datafiles.
C. This is an Oracle internal error message which should be registered with
Oracle immediately.
D. The database must be shutdown immediately to avoid damage.
E. The affected table should be dropped to avoid similar problems in the future.
F. One of the datafiles of the affected tablespace is to be extended
G. One of the datafiles of the affected tablespace is to be put in Auto Extend on
Mode

Which of the following oracle parameters should never be modified in the
init<SID>.ora file?
Note: There is more than one right answer! Click on the buttons next to the right
answers.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

db_block_buffers
db_block_size
db_name
controlfiles
shared_pool_size

Which of the following statements are correct in regard to using a single
run of
BRBACKUP to save both the database files and the offline
redo log files?
Note! More than one answer is correct. Please click on the buttons next to the
correct answers.
A. BRARCHIVE is started immediately after the database backup is complete: no
further intervention by the database administrator is necessary.
B. This technique can only be used for offline database backups, not online
backups.
C. The database backup and the backup of the offline redo log files must fit on
one tape because changing tapes is not supported.
D. You can backup the database using multiple tape devices in parallel.
E. The tapes used must have been initialized by BRBACKUP.

What happens during the shutdown of an Oracle database?
Note! More than one answer is correct. Please click on the buttons next to the
correct answers.
A. When you shutdown the database with the NORMAL option, the database
system disconnects all users before shutting down the database.
B. When you shutdown the database with the NORMAL or IMMEDIATE option,
the database system writes a checkpoint before shutting down the database.
C. When you shutdown the database with the ABORT or IMMEDIATE option,
open transactions are rolled back before the database is shut down.
D. When you shut down the database with the ABORT option, the R/3 system is
shut down, too.
E. Shutting down the database with the ABORT option always requires an
instance recovery at the next database startup.

1. Start up sequence of Work process, Dispatcher , Message Server

2. SSL, SNC(Secure Network Communications)
3. Memory Allocation Sequence of Dialogue work process
1.
Roll memory, 2. Extended memory, 3. Private Memory, 4. Heap
memory
4. Purpose of UME (User management Engine)
5. One Screen Dump on SM50, ( Work process over view)
a. Know each and every field in the SM50 Screen
b. Know purpose of Query, Sem , Table , Tcode fields thoroughly
6. SAPCONNECT
a)sapconnect only works with RFC destinations (T/F)
b)if you configure sapconnect in client 000 then it is available to all other
clients(T/F)
c)for Auto reaction method sapconnect needs to be configured in client
000 (T/F)
d) for External mail configuration an connection has to be maintained in
SCOT (T/F)
e)No extra setting required for Mail config(T/F)
f)An program has to be scheduled so that sapconnect send external mails .
(T/F)

7. Visual administrator , Config tool (You might have seen Local
variables , Gblobal variables etc) -- Screen Shot :
a. Remember the formula Local variables override global variables
8. Where do you set JVM parameters , What are the parameters.
9. In Archiving there is a picture , which talks about Name of archive file
<Param_3>Global<date>.<Time> almost everybody got that question

10.Read thoroughly about Integrated ITS parameters
a. Be careful in Java Area questions are very basic but very confusing.
11.Advantages of Open SQL over Native SQL
12.RFC+ CPIC Time Consists of , Role in , Roll Wait, Role out Time

13.Read thoroughly about the Paths (of Exefiles, Profiles, Profile Names ) Etc
14.One Question About GRMG
20.Which statements about tracks, systems and development
configurations are correct?
a. Track always contains exactly one development configuration
b. A track generally contains multiple systems
c. A system consists of a development configuration and a
runtime environment
d. A track is used for developing one software component in different
release
21. Which statements about DTR and CBS are correct?
a. DTR consists of an active and an inactive workspace
b. Checking development components into DTR means they can be
used by other developers
c. Activating development components in CBS means they can
be used by other developers
d. If the central build fails, the elements of active workspace are
placed in inactive workspace
21. Which statements about transporting JAVA objects are correct ?
a. When importing requests into consolidation system, the
activation of objects is automatically started
b. As in ABAP, only individual development objects and. In general, not
the entire software components are imported into the production
system
c. During assembly, only links to required software
components are created
d. All required software components are included in the archive to be
created during assemble step
1. The system global area consists of the Database buffer _, the_ redo
log buffer , and the _ shared pool_.

2. Which of the following statements is true?





A Data files can be mirrored by Oracle.
B Online redo log files can be mirrored by Oracle.
C Control files can be mirrored by Oracle.
D Parameter files can be mirrored by Oracle.

3. For minimal security of an Oracle database:







A The database must be installed on a cluster.
B The online redo log files must be mirrored.
C Online redo log files and data files must reside on different disks.
D Archiving must be turned on.
E Offline redo log files and data files must reside on different disks.

4. Which files are stored in directory %ORACLE_HOME%database (on
Windows), and $ORACLE_HOME/dbs (on UNIX)?






A Control files
B Oracle profiles
C BR*Tools profiles
D Oracle traces and log files
E BR*Tools log files

5. Which users are standard Oracle users created by the Oracle
installer?
□ A SYSTEM
□ B SYS
□ C SAP<SCHEMA-ID>
□ D OPS$<HOSTNAME>/<SAPSID>ADM (Windows),
OPS$<SAPSID>ADM (UNIX)
□ E SYSDBA
6. Which users are standard Oracle users created by the SAP
installation tool?
□ A SYSTEM
□ B SYS
□ C SAP<SCHEMA-ID>
□ D OPS$<HOSTNAME>/<SAPSID>ADM (Windows),
OPS$<SAPSID>ADM (UNIX)
□ E SYSDBA
7. The correct procedure to change the password of database user
SAP<SCHEMA-ID> is to use the Oracle command ALTER USER.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□ True
□ False
8. The Oracle tool to test the connection to the listener is called TNSPING
. To test the connection to the database with SID
C11 on host twdf0505, you enter tnsping at the operating
system command prompt. If you detect that the listener is not running on
the database server, you can use the command lsnrctl start on

Windows and UNIX to start the listener.
Fill in the blanks to complete the sentence.
Answer: TNSPING, tnsping C11, lsnrctl start
9. Which of the following tools does not have its own menus?






A BRTOOLS
B BRBACKUP
C BRCONNECT
D BRSPACE
E BRRECOVER

10. Because the interactive programs of BR*Tools provide their own
menus,
they cannot be called from BRTOOLS or BRGUI.
□ True
□ False
11. If you know the correct SQL command, it is recommended to call the
command (for example, as seen in BR*Tools) from SQLPLUS to perform
actions on the database.
□ True
□ False
12. All recommended regular activities for checks, housekeeping and
backups
can be scheduled in the DBA Planing Calendar (transaction DB13)
□ True
□ False
13. After creating the server profile from init<DBSID>.ora, you can
change
Oracle profile parameters in both the server profile and
init<DBSID>.ora.
□ True
□ False
14. When using the server profile:
□ A After changing parameters with scope BOTH, the database must
be restarted.
□ B After changing parameters with scope MEMORYT, the database
must be restarted.
□ C After changing parameters with scope SPFILE, the database must

be restarted.
□ D With scope MEMORY, the previous parameter value is used after
restart of the database instance.
15. When stopping the database using shutdown mode ,___ instance
processes are stopped immediately and no rollback of open
transactions
is performed during the shutdown.
Fill in the blanks to complete the sentence.
Answer: abort
1. You lost data files and offline redo log files on a disk crash, because
they
were on the same disk. Complete recovery is possible anyway, because
you
perform a backup of the offline redologs with BRARCHIVE twice per day.
□ True
□ False
The chance that you lost offline redo log files not yet backed up is high. In
this case, complete recovery is not possible.
2. Assuming a full database backup and all offline redo log files would
fit on
one tape, you would need at least __ONE_ tape to backup the database
plus
offline redo log files
Fill in the blanks to complete the sentence.
Answer: One
Using the one-run strategy, a single tape is enough.
3. Which of the following is true?
□ A Using RMAN, you can perform online and offline backups.
□ B Using RMAN, you can perform complete, incremental, and
partial backups.
□ C Using RMAN, you can perform whole and full backups.
□ D You can perform incremental backups without using RMAN.
□ E You can perform partial backups without using RMAN.
□ F Before performing an incremental backup, a whole backup must
be performed.
4. Your daily backups are performed with automatic tape selection; no
volume
for backup is specified. Which tapes will be accepted for backup
(assuming
the tape lock period is expired in all cases)?

□ A Any labeled tape
□ B The tape labeled with the volume name you got from DB13,
Goto → Tapes
□ C A tape labeled with volume name scratch
□ D Any unlabeled tape
5. Before performing an incremental backup, a level had to be
previously
performed. A backup of this type is called a _full__backup.
Answer:

0, Full

6. For complete recovery using the latest full and incremental backup,
offline
redo log files are not necessary.
□ True
□ False
7. Concerning backups, which of the following is true?
□ A When a daily offline backup is performed, backup of offline redo
log files is not necessary.
□ B When performing an incremental backup, an extra database block
verification does not need to be performed.
□ C Performing a daily consistent online backup is a sufficient backup
strategy; no additional backups need to be performed.
□ D An online backup also backs up the offline redo log files.
8. On a full backup, the database itself, including the Oracle software
directories, are backed up.
□ True
□ False
9. When starting a backup directly from the command line using
BRBACKUP,
the result and logs are also shown in trAnswer:wer:action DB14.
□ True
□ False
10. The BR*Tools profile init<DBSID>.sap is saved by:





A BRBACKUP
B BRARCHIVE
C BRTOOLS
D Notatall

11. An offline redo log file was backed up once by BRARCHIVE. The log
filenow has the status__SAVED_.
Fill in the blanks to complete the sentence.
Answer: SAVED

12. To perform a complete database reset, you need which of the
following
backups?





A Complete offline backup
B Complete online backup
C Consistent online backup
D Backup of offline redo log files

13. When you loose a disk, you can recover the database using the
Complete database recovery scenario.
Answer: Complete database recovery
14. You have a serious problem during an upgrade and decide to
restore
and recover the database to the state before the upgrade: after
SAP was shut down and no productive activity was done. As your
latest backup was performed the evening before, you choose
the database point-in-time recovery scenario.
Answer: database point-in-time recovery
15. An operating system administrator accidently deleted a
data file. To recover the database, you chose the Complete database
recovery
scenario.
Fill in the blanks to complete the sentence.
Answer: Complete database recovery
1. What are the advantages of a three-tier client/server configuration as
compared to a single-tier or two-tier configuration?
Choose the correct answer(s).
□ A Simpler scalability
□ B Simpler administration
□ C Load balancing possible
□ D None of the above

2. Which process at the application server level receives the user
request?





A Work process
B Dispatcher
C Buffer
D SAPGUI

3. Which work process types can you find on an SAP Web Application
Server?








A Dialog work process
B Message server work process
C Update work process
D ICMworkprocess
E Background work process
F Enqueue work process
G Spool work process

4. The term central instance describes the instance
□ A That you are logged on to while working in the system
□ B On which all application processes required for operating an SAP
system are configured
□ C On which the gateway process is configured
□ D On which the majority of work processes are configured
□ E On which the majority of dialog work processes are configured
5. What tasks does the task handler carry out?





A Communicates with SAP GUI
B Coordinates activities within the work process
C Accesses the database
D Processes the ABAP coding on which a transaction is based

6. Is the assignment of users to dialog work processes fixed?
□ A Yes, it is fixed for the entire time that the user is logged on to
the SAP system
□ B Yes, it exists for the entire duration of a transaction consisting
of several screens
□ C No. Each dialog step of a transaction, consisting of several
screens, can theoretically be processed by a different work process
□ D None of the above
6. The SAP Web Application Server database interface enables you
to:
□ A Enhance performance using the local buffers

□ B Access online databases on the Internet
□ C Use database-independent Open SQL in ABAP programs
□ D Access file content on the SAP Web Application Server
8. Database transactions are based on the ACID principle. So are SAP
transactions. Why does the database transaction concept nevertheless not
cover all the needs of the SAP system?
□ A An SAP transaction can bundle several database transactions. It
is only as a result of all of these bundled database transactions
that the data is consistent in business terms.
□ B Due to work process multiplexing, each work process starts a
separate database transaction within each dialog step.
□ C This is because SAP developers have not done their job properly.
□ D Using the SAP transaction as a structural level above the database
transaction significantly improves the performance of your SAP system.
9. Where is the lock table?
Choose the correct answer(s).
□ A In the database
□ B In the main memory of the application server on which the
enqueue work process is configured
□ C At operating system level of the database host
□ D The system administrator can define the location of the lock table
using the profile parameter renq/store_location
10. It makes sense, in an SAP system, to configure several enqueue
work
processes on different SAP Web Application Servers.
□ True
□ False
11. Why are asynchronous updates used for dialog transactions?
□ A Only asynchronous updates can access the SAP system buffers
□ B Because an SAP transaction can consist of several database
transactions and this approach means that the requirements for the
rollback are met
□ C Because only update work processes can access the database data
□ D None of the above
12. During asynchronous updates, which process records the data to be
changed
in VB* tables?
Choose the correct answer(s).
□ A Update work process
□ B dispatcher
□ C Recording work process
□ D Dialog work process

1. The instance that, together with the database, creates a runnable
SAP system,
is called the central instance.
2. What types of work processes are there in the SAP system?







A Update work process
B Spool work process
C Dialog work process
D ICMworkprocess
E Enqueue work process
F Instance work process

3. SAP systems use work process multiplexing technology to process user
requests.
Fill in the blanks to complete the sentence.

4. What button(s) can you use to create new entries in the SAP Logon system
list?
Choose the correct answer(s).
□ A Change Item...
□ B New Item...
□ C Log on
□ D Groups...
□ E Server...
□ F Create
5. What possible advantages does the correct use of logon groups
offer?





A The users are automatically logged on to the correct system
B The program buffers can be set up smaller
C The instances of a logon group offer comparable response times
D The program buffers may now be larger than 1 GB in size

6. In what transaction can you obtain an overview of the instances of
your
SAP system?
Choose the correct answer(s).
□ A SM50
□ B SM51
□ C SM52
□ D SM04
7. You can use transaction SM12 to manage the lock entries of the SAP
system. Transaction SM13 is used to manage the update requests.

1. Which SAP processes are started when the SAP system or an
instance is
started?






A SAPOSCOL
B START_SAP_NOW
C Message Server
D Gateway Server
E LAUNCH_DB

Log information for the dispatcher is stored in the file dev_disp. You can
control the granularity of the logged information using the profile parameter
rdisp/TRACE. There are four trace levels; error messages and warnings
are displayed, by default, at level 1.
Answer: dev_disp, rdisp/TRACE, four, 1
3. You can display the users logged on to the SAP system with
transactions SM04
(for each instance) and AL08 (system-wide). You can
obtain an overview of the scheduled background jobs with transaction SM37
. You can use transaction SM02 to send a system
message to the users that are logged on.
Answer: SM04, AL08, SM37, SM02
1. In what sequence does the system read the system parameters the
specified
locations?





A 1. Instance profile 2. Default profile 3. Kernel
B 1. start.ini 2. Kernel 2. Default profile 4. Instance profile
C 1. Kernel 2. Default profile 3. Instance profile
D 1. Kernel 2. start.ini 3. Default profile 4. Instance profile

2. In what profile can you change the number of background work
processes?
□ A Start profile
□ B Default profile
□ C Background profile
□ D Instance profile
+
3. You can use transaction RZ10 to check the consistency of individual
profiles.
4. In what sequence should you perform the listed steps when setting
up
operation modes?
□ A 1. Create operation modes 2. Assign instances 3. Distribute work

processes 4. Maintain time table
□ B 1. Create operation modes 2. Maintain time table 3. Distribute
work processes 4. Assign instances
□ C 1. Create operation modes 2. Distribute work processes 3.
Maintain time table 4. Assign instances
1. Changes to the data are logged by the database in the log files. .
These files also contain the changes in status of the database.
2. To minimize the risk of data loss, SAP strongly recommends a daily
complete data backup. If you use a partial data backup as your daily backup,
you must perform a complete data backup at least once a week.

1. How are authorizations assigned to a user?





A Users are assigned authorizations using profiles.
B Users are assigned authorizations using roles.
C Users are assigned authorizations using user names.
D Users are assigned authorizations using a Certification Authority.

2. The SAP authorization concept is a positive concept because ...





A Every user automatically receives all authorizations.
B Authorizations must be explicitly assigned.
C The range of features of the authorization check is so large.
D The developers programmed it efficiently.

3. System parameters for the user logon are in the area login. To display user.s
incorrect logon attempts, call the Information System with transaction SUIM.
The system trace function is called using transaction ST01.

1. What Remote Function Call procedures does an SAP system provide?







A synchronous RFC
B reflexiveRFC
C looped RFC
D transactional RFC
E directRFC
F queued RFC

2. What RFC variant can you use to process work steps in parallel?
Answer: You can use asynchronous RFC to process program steps in
parallel, as long as there are work processes available in the system.
3. To connect two SAP systems by RFC, you require an RFC interface in each
system (this automatically exists) and a defined RFC connection from one
system to the other.

1. What elements are part of the data structure of an SAP system?
□ A Registry repository
□ B Object repository
□ C Client
□ D Database server
□ E Cross-Client Customizing
□ F SAP Kernel
2. Decide which of the following statements are correct.





A Entering customer data requires a Customizing request.
B A change request contains one or more tasks.
C A task can always be assigned to only one developer.
D Any Customizing requires a Customizing request.

3. Which statements are correct?
□ A The transport of objects is divided into Export, Storage, and
Import phases.
□ B The import into the target system is performed automatically at
midnight Greenwich Mean Time.
□ C The transport directory is specified by parameter DIR_TRANS.
□ D When transporting, the following rule applies: The target client is
the same as the source client, unless otherwise specified.

1. What are Support Packages and Add-Ons used for?
□ A To enter user data.
□ B To import SAP object to maintain the system with a current
correction status.
□ C To implement additional functions in the system.
□ D To transport customer-developed programs.
□ E To import preliminary corrections from SAP.
2. Support Packages can be imported in any order.
□ True
□ False
3. All SPAM/SAINT updates must always be imported.
□ True
□ False
4. The queue for importing the SPAM update must be manually
confirmed.
□ True
□ False
5. A prerequisite for importing a SPAM/SAINT update is that there are
no

aborted Support Packages in the system.
□ True
□ False
6. You use transaction SNOTE to import individual SAP Notes. Using the
Note Assistant means that you are not queried for an object key in the SAP
Service Marketplace.
usrsap<SID><instance>clusterserver0logdefaultTrace.trc.

1. The SAP Web AS Java can only be monitored locally and not in a
central
monitoring system.
□ True
□ False
2. Which actions are possible using the Visual Administrator in the
Monitoring
service?





A Changes to threshold values
B Delete history values
C Cross-system monitoring
D Display monitoring data for Java instances

3. Which of the following steps do you need to perform when installing
an
agent?
□ A Start agent registration in the Visual Administrator.
□ B Create the CSMADMIN user.
□ C Create the CSMCONF file.
□ D Set up an RFC connection to the central monitoring system
before the installation.
4. Trace information is only important for the administrator.
□ True
□ False
5. Which service can you use to change the severity of log files?





A Log Configurator service
B Integrated Log Viewer
C Standalone Log Viewer
D Monitoring service

6. During the availability check with the GRMG, an XML document is
sent by
HTTP as the response to a request.
□ True
□ False
7. Which of the following traces are part of SAP Web AS Java?







A Developer trace
B Single Activity Trace
C Application trace
D Systemtrace
E Performance trace
F SQLtrace

8. Additional third-party tools belong to the SAP SolutionManager
Diagnostics.
□ True
□ False
1. Which of the programming languages listed below are implemented
platform-independently?
□ A Fortran
□ B ABAP
□ C Java
□ D C/C++

2. Briefly describe the function of the Java Virtual Machine (JVM).
Answer: The JVM executes the platform-independent bytecode generated
by the Java compiler on the relevant hardware.

3. Which of the software components listed below are components of
SAP
Web AS?
□ A Java dispatcher
□ B ABAP work processes
□ C Message server
□ D Internet Communication Manager

4. SAP Web AS can be installed with the option "SAP Web AS without
ABAP
and Java System".
□ True
□ False

5. Which software components allow load balancing in the context of
SAP
Web AS Java?
□ A SAP Web Dispatcher
□ B ABAP dispatcher
□ C Java dispatcher
□ D Server processes
1. When starting an SAP system in which only Java instances are
installed, the
database is started only after the Java instances have been started.
□ True
□ False
The Startup and Control Framework consists of the processes JControl
and JLaunch.

3. It is not possible under UNIX operating systems to stop individual
instances
in the case of an SAP system with Java instances (without ABAP
instances).
□ True
□ False
4. The most important trace and log files are stored in the work
directory of each
instance, that is, for example, under /usr/sap/<SID>/DVEBMGS00/work.
□ True
□ False
1. Which installation scenarios exist for SAP Web Application Server
(SAP

Web AS)?
□ A SAPWebASABAP
□ B SAP Web AS Cobol
□ C SAPWebASC++
□ D SAP Web AS Java
□ E SAPWebASABAP+Java
□ F SAP Web AS Java+C

2. What is the process flow during the installation of SAPWeb AS
ABAP+Java?
Choose the correct answer(s).
□ A 1. SAP Web AS Java central instance, 2. Database instance, 3. SAP Web AS
ABAP central instance
□ B 1. Database instance, 2. SAP Web AS ABAP central instance, 3. SAP Web AS
Java central instance
□ C 1. SAP Web AS ABAP central instance, 2. Database instance, 3.
Completion of the central instance with SAP Web AS Java
3. What makes up SAP NetWeaver Developer Workplace?
□ A SAP Web AS ABAP+Java and SAP NetWeaver Developer Studio
□ B SAP Web AS ABAP and SAP NetWeaver Java Development
Infrastructure
□ C SAP Web AS Java and SAP NetWeaver Developer Studio
□ D SAP NetWeaver Java Development Infrastructure and SAP
NetWeaver Developer Studio
1. You can maintain parameter settings of a SAP Web AS Java with the
Visual
Administrator when no SAP Web AS Java instance has been started.
□ True
□ False

2. You can use the Config Tool to maintain Java VM parameters for a SAP
Web AS Java instance.
□ True

□ False
3. The parameters that are maintained with the Visual Administrator
only
become active after the SAP Web AS Java has been restarted.
□ True
□ False

4. If you want to use the System Information tool, you need to install it
on
your front end.
□ True
□ False

5. You can use the Config Tool to add additional server processes to an
SAP
Web AS Java instance.
□ True
□ False
1. With which of the following data sources can the User Management
Engine
work?
□ A Database
□ B File system
□ C ABAP user management
□ D Directory service

2. What is the purpose of the data partitioning of the UME?
Answer: The data partitioning allows a distribution of the users or user
attributes to different data sources.

3. Which tools are available for user administration under Java?
□ A UME console

□ B User administration in the computer management (Microsoft
Windows)
□ C Visual Administrator
□ D Transaction USER01

4. You can lock users with the UME console.
□ True
□ False
5. You can assign permissions directly to users in the UME console.
□ True
□ False
6. The term J2EE security role is another name for a UME role.
□ True
□ False

7. Which tool is used to adjust the UME properties?
Answer: Config Tool

8. Which UME properties can you influence with parameters?
□ A Number of failed logon attempts before a user is locked
□ B E-mail notification if a user is locked by the administrator
□ C Average length of the user name
□ D Directory service data source: specification of the instance
number of the directory service
□ E SAP Web AS ABAP data source: Specification of the SID
□ F Passwords are automatically generated

9. If the Java administration user is locked, there are no other users
that can log
on to the system and release the lock.

□ True
□ False

1. The ________ process is one option to connect Web Browsers to the ABAP
Engine and/or the SAP Web AS Java of an SAP system. Another option
is the SAP ITS.
Answer: ICM.
2. Data exchange between SAP Web AS Java and SAP Web AS ABAP is
available via:
Choose the correct answer(s).
□ A MPI
□ B SDM
□ C ICM
□ D Jco and fast RFC
SAP Java Connector is a toolkit that allows a Java application to
communicate with an SAP system. Fast RFC provides an additional fast,
local communication channel between SAP Web AS Java and SAP Web AS
ABAP of an SAP system.

3. How many characters does a standard code page (1 byte)
distinguish?
Answer: 256
4. In case of errors, SAPinst stops the installation automatically and
restarts the
installation process.
□ True
□ False
In case of errors, SAPinst stops the installation automatically and resumes
it from the point of failure.
1. An SAP ERP Central Component system does not require more
hardware
resources than SAP R/3 4.6C.
□ True
□ False
Apart from the additional resources required for Unicode, an SAP ERP
Central Component system in general does require more hardware resources
than SAP R/3 4.6C.

2. SAP ERP Central Component is build on SAP Basis Technology.

□ True
□ False
SAP ERP Central Component is build on the NetWeaver .04 technology.
3. When high security settings are used on iSeries computers, password entries
become . ____________________
Answer: case sensitive
1. Before installing SAP ERP Central Component, you
should ensure that the front-end software is installed
on___________________________________________________ in your system
environment.
Answer: at least one host computer
2. Which command do you use to find out the IP address of your
system?
______________________________________________________
Answer: ping <hostname>

3. Name at least one file system that you need to set up manually.
______________________________________________________
Answer: These file systems need to be set up manually: /sap, /sap/trans,
/sap/<SID>, /sapmnt/<SID>
1.

To set up installation packages, start the _______________________________ program.

Fill in the blanks to complete the sentence.
Answer: SAPAdmin.exe
2. Which of the following is not a classical GUI variant to access the SAP
system?
Choose the correct answer(s).
□ A Business Explorer
□ B SAP GUI for Windows
□ C SAP GUI for HTML
□ D SAP GUI for Java
You use Business Explore (BEx) to access SAP BW systems.
3. To obtain information about the version of the SAP GUI for Java in
use, ______________ select
the icon in the upper-right corner of the GUI.
Answer: question mark

1.

You can use the Oracle Universal Installer to install Oracle patch sets.

2. The OPatch tool is used for:
Choose the correct answer(s).
□ A Installing interim patches
□ B Deleting patch sets
□ C Uninstall interim patches
□ D Installing Perl programs

3. How can you recognize that SAPinst is checking the availability of a
software package or CD labels?
Answer: The Check Location flag is marked in the CD browser window.
4. You cannot use a database instance ID that is different from the SAP
system ID.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□ True
□ False

5. The Kernel CD is required for the database instance installation.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□ True
□ False

6. While installing the dialog instance, the port number that you specify
for the
message server port can be different from the one specified on the
central
instance host.
□ True
□ False
7. During the SAP J2EE Add-in installation, the Central Instance profile
is

changed. How do you activate these changes?
Answer: By restarting your SAP system.
8. What is the minimal RAM required for SAP Web AS Java?
Answer: 512 MB
9. The ___________ user is used for RFC communication between ABAP and Java
stack.
Answer: SAPJSF
10. When installing a Dialog Instance, J2EE Add-in DDIC user is used to
setup
the operation system account for <sid>adm.
□ True
□ False
The DDIC user is used to setup the RFC communication setting for the
SAPJSF user.

1. You can install a new SAP license on your SAP system. The license
key
number must be characters.
Answer: 18
2.

Name the three steps to install SAP online documentation.

Answer: Install the help files. Customize setup variants for online help. Install a
web browser or viewer.
3. What is the need for SAProuter?
Answer: SAProuter increases network security, simplifies network
configuration, and allows you to make indirect network connections.
SAProuter is required for SAPNet-R/3 front end and remote consulting
connections.

4. There are two standard users in client 000 in SAP ERP Central
Component
after the installation.
□ True
□ False
5. After the installation of the central instance, a temporary license is
active
for six weeks.
□ True
□ False
6. SAProuter can be started as a demon under UNIX and as a service
under Windows.
□ True
□ False
7. If you have installed your SAP system from the delivered SAP DVDs
(without System Copy or migration), you don’t have to configure CTS
after installation.
□ True
□ False
Basic, initial settings for the CTS are generated during the
configuration of
the transport management system.
8. Identify the activity that is not performed by Installation Check.
□ A Completeness of installation
□ B Version compatibility
□ C Accessibility of the message server
□ D Network security
9. What are the steps needed to install additional languages?
Answer:
1. Classifying the language.
2. Scheduling of language transport.
3. Scheduling of language supplementation.
10. What are the steps needed to perform a client copy?
Answer:
1. Maintain the client in table T000.
2. Copy the client.
3. Check log files
11. What is the procedure to perform a full backup for Windows?
Answer:
1. Save the Registry.
2. Save system state data.
3. Back up all SAP-specific and database-related directories.

12. You administer the SAP Web AS Java from within the SAP ECC using
transaction SU01.
□ True
□ False
You administer the SAP Web AS Java from within the SAP ECC using
transaction SMICM.
13. The installation check checks, among others, whether the release
number in
the SAP kernel matches the one stored in the database system.
□ True
□ False
The installation check determines inconsistencies in the system.
14. You cannot activate the functions contained in SAP ECC Extension Set.
□ True
□ False
You activate the functions by selecting the relevant activation switch in
the IMG activity, "Activation Switch for SAP ERP Central Component
Extension Set".

15. If you perform a client copy, you need not change SAP ECC client of
the
SAPJSF user.
□ True
□ False
If you perform a client copy, you should also change SAP ECC client of the
SAPJSF user after the client copy.
16. You cannot use the SGEN transaction to generate the ABAP loads of
a
number of programs, function groups, and classes.
□ True
□ False

1. What are the steps to apply a kernel patch?
Answer:
Decompress kernel patch files to a temporary folder.
Follow SAP note 19466.
Save the old kernel and replace parts of the old kernel with the new files.

2. When applying a patch to an existing Dialog Instance SAP Web AS
Java,
you should select Complete a Dialog Instance.
□ True
□ False
Answer: False
When applying a patch to an existing Dialog Instance SAP Web AS Java,
you should always select Apply Support Package 7 for Dialog Instance.
3. Only the BASIS and ABA Support Packages are applied to the SAP
ERP
Central Component system.
□ True
□ False

ADM200 Review Questions with Answers

Which of the following statements about Java applications are correct?
a. Java applications are computer programs with the full functional
range also provided by other programming languages
b. Java applets are intended for execution within the Java Runtime
Environment of a browser
c. Java applications are interpreted in a platform dependent way
d. Java applications do not require compilation as they run in a virtual
environment
e. Java applications are not able to operate within an SAP environment
Which of the following statements about Java software are correct?
a. The Just-In-Time Compiler for Java compiles the bytecode in a completely
platform independent way.
b. In order to develop your own Java applications only the JRE is required.
c. In order to develop your own Java applications you need a JDK
d. J2ME refers to Java 2 Management Edition, and is a suite of Java tools for
managing and monitoring large scale Java developments.
e. J2EE refers to Java 2 Enterprise Edition, and is an add-on to J2SE
and integrates additional packages such as Enterprise Java Beans,
Servlets, JSP, Java-Mail-API, JTS.
The use of J2EE in SAP technology has the which of following
advantages for SAP Web Application Server.
a. The open integration architecture SAP NetWeaver integrates
perfectly into the openness of J2EE
b. The growth in Java applications has made ABAP obsolete

c. J2EE is additional evidence of the strategy of platformindependence pursued by SAP
d. The J2EE Connector architecture allows standardized integration
of external applications
e. J2EE is now the only standard available for the development of web
applications
Which of the following are valid components of SAP Web AS Java?
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

ICM
Central Services
SDM
Dispatcher
Work Process

Which of the following statements are correct about an ‘instance’?
a. The Central Services form part of the Central Instance
b. The Central Instance in ABAP is defined separately (separate instance
number) from the Central Instance in Java
c. The Central Instance in Java is defined as the instance in which
the SDM is installed
d. A single java instance is termed a ‘cluster’
e. The Central Services exists as a separate instance

Which of the following elements are required for a minimal cluster installation?
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

ICM
SCS
SDM
Database
IGS

The message server performs which of the following tasks in the Java
cluster?
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Preparing logon information for the SAP Web Dispatcher
Handling of lock requests
Logging configuration
Communication between different services
Execution of Java applications

Which of the following Managers can you expect to see in the Visual
Administrator?
a. IP Verification Manager
b. Cluster Manager

c. HTTP Manager
d. Configuration Manager
e. Application Thread Manager
Which of the following correctly define settings of the Cluster Manager?
a. Join Port: The port with which the dispatchers and servers listen
for incoming connections
b. Open Port: The port used to create connections between cluster
elements
c. Cluster Port: The port used to create connections between cluster
elements
d. Cluster Hosts: Hosts to which the dispatcher tries to create
connections
e. Cluster Hosts: Hosts from which the dispatcher can accept connection
requests
Which of the following Services can you expect to see in the Visual
Administrator?
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Security Provider
Deploy Service
Cluster Service
Join Service
JCo RFC Provider Service

Which of the following statements are correct (assuming a Windows
server)?
a. With SAP Web AS ABAP+Java, the Java instance can only be started and
stopped together with the ABAP instance
b. With SAP Web AS ABAP+Java, the Java instance can be shutdown using
transaction SMICM, but will always be automatically restarted by the ABAP
dispatcher
c. With SAP Web AS ABAP+Java, the Java instance can be started separately
in the MMC
d. With SAP Web AS ABAP+Java, it is possible to have the ABAP
instance running while the Java instance is shut down
e. With SAP Web AS Java, the Java instance processes are visible in
the MMC
Which of the following are tasks of JControl?
a. JControl starts, stops and monitors the processes of the Java
instance
b. JControl reads the description of a Java instance from profile files
c. JControl starts JLaunch processes, which in turn start Java nodes
such as dispatchers and servers
d. JControl restarts terminated processes, ends hanging processes,
and sends a shutdown signal to Java instances

e. JControl starts a shared memory segment for the internal
administration data of all JLaunch processes
Java Virtual Machine parameters are maintained with which
administration tool?
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Visual Administrator
Config Tool
Telnet
System Info page
JCMon

Which of the following statements are correct about the Visual
Adminstrator?
a. Connections to the Visual Administrator do not require the SAP Web AS
Java to be operational
b. Changes to most parameters are real time
c. Connections to the Visual Administrator use the HTTP port
d. Connections to the Visual Administrator use the P4 port
e. The functions of the Visual Administrator are the same as the functions of
the Config Tool
With the Sun JVM, which of the following statements are correct
regarding memory configuration?
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

The address area is made up of three generations
–XX:NewSize sets the initial size of the young generation
–Xms sets the initial size of the tenured generation
–Xmx sets the maximum heap size
The permanent generation size is derived from –Xmx and the young
generation

Which of the following statements about administration of SAP Web AS
Java are correct?
a. Parameters set in the Config Tool are always global, and take effect
immediately
b. Parameters in the Visual Administrator have global and local
settings
c. Changes to settings in the Config Tool will effect the settings in
the Visual Administrator after a cluster restart
d. Changes in the Visual Administrator do not effect the Config Tool
e. Changes made to global settings in the Visual Administrator only effect
local settings in the Config Tool

In Telnet, what is the effect of the command “LISTSP
<dispatcher_nodeID> http”?
a.
b.
c.
d.

List the services running on the dispatcher node
List the managers running on the dispatcher node
Change the parameters for the http service on the dispatcher node
List the parameter values for the http service on the dispatcher
node
e. Starts the http service on the dispatcher node
Which of the following statements are correct regarding the UME?
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

The UME has its own management console for maintaining users
The UME provides self-service scenarios
The UME allows the setting of password rules
The UME can utilise UDDI as a Data Source
The UME is only available when using SAP Web AS ABAP+Java

The UME supports which types of partitioning?
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

User-based partitioning
Role-based partitioning
Attribute-based partitioning
Type-based Partitioning
Group-based partitioning

When using the UME with SAP Web AS ABAP+Java, which of the
following correctly describe user administration functions?
a. User administration can be performed with SU01
b. User administration, including creation of new users in SAP Web
AS ABAP can be performed from UME
c. User administration can be performed in UME, but normally only
in terms of maintaining Java authorisations and roles
d. ABAP authorisations are still maintained using PFCG
e. It is necessary to use CUA to maintain users in this environment
Which of the following are valid options for the configuration of user
management which are available as part of the SAPINST installation
process?
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

For SAP Web AS Java, the use of UDDI
For SAP Web AS ABAP+Java, the use of ABAP user management
For SAP Web AS Java, the use of the local database
For SAP Web AS Java, the use of ABAP user management
For SAP Web AS Java, the use of a LDAP server

Which of the following statements about authorisations are correct?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

J2EE Security Roles are an example of declarative security
UME Roles are an extension of J2EE Security Roles
J2EE Security Roles are roughly equivalent SAP (ABAP) Roles
Within a UME Role, an action is a collection of permissions
J2EE Security Roles are maintained as part of the UME

Which of the following UME parameter definitions are correct?
a. Ume.notification.create_approval – email is sent to user as soon
as administrator approves the creation of a user account
b. Ume.notification.password_request – an email is sent from the
administrator to the user to ask them to change their password
c. Ume.user_logon_problem_request – an email is sent from the user
to the administrator if the user has logon problems
d. Ume.logon.branding_image – defines the storage location of the
company logo
e. Ume.logon.security_policy.cert_logon_required – defines whether
certificate logon is required
Which of the following are valid functions of the monitoring
architecture of SAP Web AS Java?
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Application Trace
System Trace
Single Activity Trace
User Monitor
Session Trace

Which of the following are valid steps in the installation process of the
SAPCCMSR agent for monitoring SAP Web AS Java?
a. Creation of an RFC connection to client 000 of the central monitoring
system
b. Creation of the CSMREG user in the central monitoring system
c. Registration of the agent with the SAP NetWeaver CCMS Agent
Setup Tool
d. Create the CSMCONF file in the central monitoring system
e. Installation of a standalone gateway on the central monitoring system
Which of the following statements about the logging infrastructure in
SAP Web AS Java are correct?
a.
b.
c.
d.

The log destination allows all logs to be created in one single file
Logs are structured into categories, which are logical areas/topics
A log category can only have one single log destination
The Log Manager is the first of the managers to be started during
system startup
e. The log configurator service provides simple and advanced
configuration modes

Which are valid tools for monitoring log files in SAP Web AS Java?
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Via CCMS in a central monitoring system
Using the Visual Administrator’s Log Viewer Service
Using the Config Tool
Using the MMC
Reading the files using operating system tools

Which of the following questions about availability monitoring are
correct?
a. Availability monitoring can only be provided through the use of the
SAPCCMSR agent
b. Availability monitoring can be provided using GRMG
c. The GRMG application is only active while the monitored application is
active
d. The GRMG technology can provide heartbeat information for SAP Web AS
Java systems only
e. The heartbeat monitor is displayed through RZ20 in the central
monitoring system
Which actions are possible using the monitoring service in the Visual
Administrator?
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Changes to threshold values
Setup of auto reaction methods
Cross system monitoring
Display monitoring data for Java instances
Create CSMREG user for the central monitoring system

Which main components make up the Java Runtime Environment (JRE)?
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

The JVM
Byte code verifier
Dispatcher
Class Loader
Cluster Manager

Which of the following statements about the generic Java development
process are correct?
a. All classes are included as .class files
b. The structure and runtime behaviour of an application are
described by the deployment descriptor
c. When the development is complete, the developer uses a
standard Java program to combine Enterprise Java Beans, utilized
Java classes, and the deployment descriptor into a Java Archive
(.jar file). This creation of a JAR file is also known as the build

d. An Enterprise Archive can consist of multiple Java Archives and Web
Archives, but cannot contain other Enterprise Archives
e. Java Server Pages or servlets and HTML pages are created during
the implementation of the presentation logic
Which of the following statements correctly define the use of elements
of the JDI?
a. The Design Time Repository enables a versioning source code
administration, and therefore, the distributed development of
software in teams and the transport and replication of sources.
b. The Component Build Service is used for the local build of source code in
the development scenario described as “Scenario 1: Team Oriented
development”
c. The Change Management Service (CMS) is used to centrally
administer the Java development landscape and the transports
across the entire software lifecycle.
d. The functions of the CMS are closely integrated with the DTR, the
CBS, and the System Landscape Directory (SLD)
e. To avoid naming conflicts, the SAP System Landscape Directory
(SLD) provides a name reservation service (name server), which
makes it possible to reserve globally unique names
Which are correct statements about the SLD?
a. The SLD can be configured to automatically collect data from Java based
component systems only
b. The SLD can be configured to automatically collect data from ABAP based
systems only
c. The SLD Bridge is used to enable the automatic update of the
component data in the SLD
d. The SLD can be called using the URL http://<server>:<P4port>/sld
e. SAP Component data is available in the Service Marketplace and
can be uploaded into the SLD
Which of the following statements are correct regarding the elements
of the component model in the JDI?
a. A many to many relationship exists between products and
software components
b. A software component can contain many development
components
c. A development component can be considered to be roughly equivalent to
a repository object in SAP Web AS ABAP
d. A development object can have many development components
e. Products and software components are not related
Which of the following statements are true regarding the JDI?

a. All developers use the same development configuration, and therefore
have access to the same source files
b. The Design Time Repository can have either an active or an inactive
workspace, but not both
c. A system can contain only a development configuration, only a
runtime system, or both, depending on whether source code or
deployable archives are to be transported
d. The CBS buildspace is responsible for the combining of changes
and providing library archives for utilized components.
e. A track contains all development configurations and all runtime
environments that are required to develop, test, and produce one
or more software components
Which statements about tracks, systems, and development
configurations are correct?
a. A track always contains exactly one development configuration.
b. A track contains multiple systems.
c. A system consists of a development configuration and a runtime
environment.
d. A track is used for developing different software components in different
releases.
e. A track is always used to develop only one release of a specific
software component.
Which statements about transporting Java objects are correct?
a. When importing requests into the consolidation system, the
activation of the objects is automatically started.
b. As in the ABAP environment, only individual development objects and, in
general, not entire software components are imported into the production
system.
c. During the assembly step, only links to required software
components are created.
d. All required software components are included in the archive to be created
during the assembly step.
e. The activity is required for the transport of developments
between development and consolidation, but is not used in later
systems

SAP Web AS Java
___________________________________________________________________
___
How can you determine the current patch level of your SAP Web AS JAVA?
Please choose the correct answer
o The patch level of SAP Web AS is always identical to the current Kernel patch level. You can
find this value in transaction SMICM in the SAP System, for example
o Within the file java_vers in the work directory of the Central Service Instance

o Using the service /sap/monitoring/Systeminfo of SAP Web As Java
o On operating system level using "java - version"
o Using System --> Status in SAP Gui

___________________________________________________________________
___
If your instance number is 02 Which is the default Telnet port number
Please choose the correct answer
o 50802
o 52008
o 80002
o 20008
o 50208

___________________________________________________________________
___
What are the components of the consolidation system (CONS) in respect to Java software
logistics?
Please choose the correct answer
o Runtime environment and the part of the System Landscape Directory (SLD) in which the software
components of the corresponding track are defined
o Runtime environment and Development Configuration ( consisting of DTR workspace and CBS
buildspace)
o Like in ABAP, the consolidation system ( in respect to Java software logistics) consist of
runtime

environment, the Java schema of the database and the import queue on operating system level.
o Two DTR workspace and on Component Build Service (CBS) buildspace
o Runtime environment and Design Time Repository (DTR) workspace

___________________________________________________________________
___
Which statements concerning the successful import of an activity into the
consolidation system of a track are correct?
There is more than one correct answer to this question. Select which of the following answer are
correct and which are false
o Within the Component Build Service (CBS) the created archives will be transferred into the
buildspace of the Development Configuration of the CONS-system.
o Whit in the Design Time Repository (DTR) the corresponding version of the source file are
transferred into the active workspace of the Development Configuration of CONS-system
o The Activity ( imported into the Consolidation system) is immediately available for import
into the follow- up system.
o The archives will be deployed into the runtime environment of the consolidation system

___________________________________________________________________
___
The SAP Web Application Server 6.40 now contains a Java Stack. Which of the
following correct statements about installation on the SAP Web As JAVA?

Please choose the correct answer
o It is installed in the same schema and same database as the SAP Web Application Server ABAP
system
o It is installed in the file system
o Is uses a separate schema in the same database as the SAP Web Application Server ABAP
system.
o It is always installed in a separate database from the SAP Web Application server ABAP
system

Which of these tools are SAP Web AS Java administration tools?
There is more than one correct answer to this question. Select which of the following answer are
correct and which are false
o SAPinst
o Config Tool
o Visual Administrator

o NetWeaver Developer Studio

___________________________________________________________________
___
Which of the following statements regarding name reservation are correct?
There is more than one correct answer to this question. Select which of the following answer are
correct and which are false
o A name server is mandatory for using the SAP Netweaver Development Infrastructure.
o The global unique of a reserved namespace prefix at the SAP Service Marketplace is guaranteed.
o A reserved namespace prefix at the SAP Service Marketplace in mandatory for using the SAP
Netweaver Development Infrastructure.
o Both a reserved namespace prefix at the SAP Service Marketplace and a name server are optional
for using the SAP Netweaver Development Infrastructure.

___________________________________________________________________
___
Which tools is used to add a new server node to an existing SAP Web AS Java
Instance?
Please choose the correct answer
o Visual Administrator
o Config Tool
o SAPinst
o A new node can not be added to an existing SAP Web AS Java Instance Node arecreated only
during installation.

___________________________________________________________________
___
Which statements concerning a domain on the change Management Service
(CMS) are correct?

There is more than one correct answer to this question. Select which of the following answer are
correct and which are false
o All tracks within one CMS-Domain are using the same Component Build Service (CBS)
o All track within one CMS-Domain are using the System Landscape Directory (SLD)
o For each software component (SC) to be created or changed you need to create a Separate CMSDomain.

o All tracks within one CMS-Domain are using the same Design Time Repository (DTR)
o Within the CMS-Domain you define the transport directory which is used for transporting
changes in Java-based software.

___________________________________________________________________
___
For administrator it is crucial to periodically check the availability landscape
components.
SAP offers an automatism called Generic Request and Message Generator
(GRMG) to check especially the availability of Java components. Which of the
statements below in correct?
GRMG
Please choose the correct answer
o .. uses HTTP/HTTPS to exchange XML-based monitoring data. X
o uses RFC protocol to call the Java component
o .. is a periodic ping on operating system level to check the availability of the java component
o .. is a SNMP- based protocol to check the java component availability

___________________________________________________________________
___
Which of the following statements regarding development configuration are
correct?
There is more than one correct answer to this question. Select which of the following answer are
correct and which are false
o There is one development configuration registered for each track in the SLD.
o Development configuration consist of two DTR workspace and one CBS buildspace
o Development configuration must exist for every system of a track ( i e for the central
development system, the consolidation system, the test system and the production system).
o Development configuration are required for track creation.
o Development configuration are generated on track creation.

___________________________________________________________________
___
Which of the following statements regarding (Java) Message Server are
correct? The Message Server
There is more than one correct answer to this question. Select which of the following answer are
correct

and which are false
o ... ia a brand new coding especially invented for the SAP Web AS 6.40
o ... synchronizes data across the cluster
o ... in sot a critical component of SAP Web AS system and it can be stopped when is not use
o ... supplies information to the SAP Web AS Dispatcher about load balancing between many
java instance.

___________________________________________________________________
___
The SAP Web Dispatcher is a software web switch that is the entry point
HTTP(s) request into system, which consist of one or more Web application
servers. Which service must be active in the HTTP Service Tree (transaction
SICF) for the Web Dispatcher to operate properly.
Please choose the correct answer
o /sap/bc/icf
o /sap/public/icman
o /sap/public/bc/its
o /sap/public/icf_check

___________________________________________________________________
___
Which of these tools can be used to deploy an application on the SAP Web AS
Java
There is more than one correct answer to this question. Select which of the following answer are
correct and which are false
o Config Tool
o SDM
o SAP Netweaver Developer Studio
o SAP Management Console

___________________________________________________________________
___
Which of the following are the correct statements releated to the connectivity
between the SAP Web Dispatcher and the Message Server.
There is more than one correct answer to this question. Select which of the following answer are
correct and which are false

o The SAP Web Dispatcher substitute the Message Server for the Sap Gui Access
o The SAP Web Dispatcher connect to the Message server to get information about the load
and application in each node.
o The communication protocol between the Web Dispatcher and the Message Server is HTTP
o The communication protocol between the Web Dispatcher and the Message Server is the DIAG
protocol used also in the SAPGUI

___________________________________________________________________
___

The startup and control framework of the SAP Web AS 6.40 has differt
programs to control an to monitor the process. Which of the following refer to
the Jcom process? Jcmom
There is more than one correct answer to this question. Select which of the following answer are
correct and which are false
o ... represent the monitoring API between the SAP Web AS Java Engine and the CCMS monitoring
interface
o ... is the process which starts all SAP Web AS Java Processes
o ... implements a local and cluster administration menu for local and for remote instance
operation
o ... is a java instance monitoring program with command line interface which supports all
operating system

___________________________________________________________________
___
Which of the following statements should be consider when using the Offline
Configuration Editor?
There is more than one correct answer to this question. Select which of the following answer are
correct and which are false
o The SAP Web AS Java has to be Offline
o Offline Configuration editor need a java Virtual Machine (JVM) 1.5x to run
o The corresponding DB must be offline
o High risk of corrupting the system if configuration Editor used without deep administrator
knowledge.

___________________________________________________________________
___
The SAP Web AS Java is using the Java startup and control framework to start
and stop. Which statements are correct in respect to the java startup and
control framework?
There is more than one correct answer to this question. Select which of the following answer are
correct and which are false

o The java startup and control framework doesn’t support stopping java processes under Unix
and Unix flovers. To stop the Java Engine running under Unix and other Unix flovers the
administrator ha simply to kill the corresponding processes.
o The java startup framework can be used to monitor the Java processes.
o On Windows operating system the Sap Management console can be used to start/stop and monitor
a SAP Web As Java (only)
o In an SAP Web AS Java add-inn installation, the ICM Monitoring can be used to start and stop the
SAP Web AS Java.

___________________________________________________________________
___
How many concurrent connection are accepted by SDM server? ( DA
VERIFICARE)
Please choose the correct answer

o Only one connection is allowed at certain time
o There in no limit but the hardware limits
o Only one Gui connection is allowed, but in no limit for the command line interface or the
Java API
o One for each type of interface (GUI, command line or Java API)

___________________________________________________________________
___
The SAP Web AS 640 is shipped with the Software Development Manager
(SDM) Which of the following statements related to the SDM are correct?
There is more than one correct answer to this question. Select which of the following answer are
correct and which are false
o The SDM consists on two software components the gui and the Server
o The SDM is a tool which can be used to deploy software package
o The deployment using SDM must be done online, because the SDM requires at least one
running server to check whether a previous version of the deployed is already available.
o The SDM is not a standard component of the Web AS installation and it comes only with the
additional support packages.
o The SDM is able to deploy components only to local server, since the Software Logistic for
Java is the component used to deploy globally.

___________________________________________________________________
___
For patching an (add-in) instance of SAP Web AS java you need to provide the
following input.
There is more than one correct answer to this question. Select which of the following answer are
correct

and which are false
o The storing location of the (ABAP) instance profile corresponding to instance to be patch.
o The password of the user J2ee_admin
o The password of the user <sapsid>adm
o The password of the user SDM
o The storing location of the (java) instance profile corresponding to the instance to be patched.

___________________________________________________________________
___
Which of the following are features of the Visual Administrator?
There is more than one correct answer to this question. Select which of the following answer are
correct and which are false
o Creating new instance of SAP Web AS Java
o Runtime administration of SAP Web AS Java Services and Manager
o Creating new nodes of an existing SAP Web AS Java instance
o Accessing Local and Global properties of SAP Web AS Java services and managers

1. SAP ERP 6.0 and SAP R/3 4.6C are two completely different
solutions/applications, which are shipped by SAP.
Answer: False
Over years, SAP enhanced SAP R/3 with additional functionality and SAP's
next-generation enterprise resource planning solution (SAP ERP 2005)
became
reality.

2. SAP supports Unicode, Non-unicode and MDMP with SAP ERP
6.0
installations.
Answer: False
With SAP ERP 6.0 MDMP is not supported any longer.

1. An SAP ERP Central Component system does not require more
hardware
resources than SAP R/3 4.6C.
□ True
□ False
Apart from the additional resources required for Unicode, an SAP ERP
Central
Component system in general does require more hardware resources than
SAP
R/3 4.6C.

2. SAP ERP Central Component is build on SAP Basis Technology.
□ True
□ False
SAP ERP Central Component is build on the SAP NetWeaver technology.

2. What are the necessary preparation steps to do a SAP ECC 6.0
installation?

□ A Do a Prerequistes Check?
□ B Install the right JDK?
□ C Install and configure SAPinst?
□ D Rename the host to SAP<sid><instance number>?

3. Name at least one file system that you need to set up manually.

Answer: These file systems need to be set up manually: /sap, /sap/trans,
/sap/<SID>, /sapmnt/<SID>

1. Which of the following is not a classical GUI variant to access
the SAP system?

□ A Business Explorer
□ B SAP GUI for Windows

□ C SAP GUI for HTML
□ D SAP GUI for Java

2. The SAP GUI installation server can be used to install all types
of SAP GUI
(SAP GUI for Windows, SAP GUI for Java, SAP GUI for HTML).
□ True
□ False
Answer: False
The SAP GUI installation server can only trigger the installation and
update of
SAP GUI for Windows.

1.

What is the procedure to perform a full backup for Windows?

Answer:
1. Save the Registry.
2. Save system state data.
3. Back up all SAP-specific and database-related directories.

2.

Name the three steps to install SAP online documentation.

Answer: Install the help files. Customize setup variants for online
help. Install a
web browser or viewer.

3.

What is the need for SAProuter?

Answer: SAProuter increases network security, simplifies network
configuration, and allows you to make indirect network connections.
SAProuter
is required for remote support connections.

4.

After the installation of the central instance, a temporary license is active for six

weeks.

□ True
□ False

5.

SAProuter can be started as a demon under UNIX and as a service under

Windows.
□ True
□ False

6. Identify the activity that is not performed by Installation
Check.

□ A Completeness of installation
□ B Version compatibility
□ C Accessibility of the message server
□ D Network security

7.What are the steps needed to install additional languages?
Answer:
1. Classifying the language.
2. Scheduling of language transport.
3. Scheduling of language supplementation.

8. What are the steps needed to perform a client copy?
Answer:
1. Maintain the client in table T000.
2. Copy the client.
3. Check log files.

9. You cannot use the SGEN transaction to generate the ABAP
loads of a number
of programs, function groups, and classes.
□ True
□ False

10. You cannot activate the functions contained in SAP ECC
Extension Set.
□ True
□ False
You activate the functions by selecting the relevant activation switch in
the IMG

activity, "Activation Switch for SAP ERP Central Component Extension
Set".

11. The installation check checks, among others, whether the
release number in the
SAP kernel matches the one stored in the database system.
□ True
□ False
The installation check determines inconsistencies in the system.

12. You have installed a SAP NetWeaver system. Which tool
makes technical
settings which are required for the technical processing of a
system or a technical
scenario?

□ A Template Wizard
□ B Configuration Wizard
□ C Postinstaller
□ D Configuration Template Installer

1. Which types of dialog instances can be installed to an SAP
system?

□ A ABAP dialog instance
□ B central services dialog instance

□ C Java and ABAP dialog instance
□ D Java dialog instance

2. Which tools can be used to insall an additonal Usage Type?
Answer: SAPinst or JSPM

3. Enhancement Package 2 is installed using transaction SAINT.
□ True
□ False
Enhancement Package 2 is implemented using transaction SAINT. This
procedure can change with newer Enhancement Packages.

Note: AS Java and the SDM server must be started before you can start
JSPM. It is also
important that no applications (e.g. SDM GUI) are connected to the SDM
server since
only one connection can be opened to the SDM server.

Hint: Only the user <sid>adm may start the JSPM.
The SDM is a client/server application. On the AS Java side there runs the
SDM server
that is started by the central instance of the AS Java automatically.

You can reset the SDM password in the SDM Gui after logging on.

You can use the following procedures/methods for the two types
of system copy:
. Database-specific method: homogeneous system copies only
. Database-independent method: homogeneous and heterogeneous
system copies

http://service.sap.com/systemcopy.

Support Packages are bundles of repository objects and Customizing.

the Note Assistant can only change
repository objects, not Customizing, for example.

Caution: The SPDD adjustment should be performed manually in each
system in the landscape and not be replaced by importing a transport
request.
This can lead to inconsistencies and is not recommended.

1. With which program do you install a Support Package for SAP
NW Application
Server Java?
Answer: With the JSPM program

2. What are the steps to apply a kernel patch?
Answer:
1. Decompress kernel patch files to a temporary folder.
2. Follow SAP note 19466.
3. Save the old kernel and replace parts of the old kernel with the new
files.

3. Only the BASIS and ABA Support Packages are applied to the
SAP ERP
Central Component system.
□ True
□ False
There are several other Support Package types.

4. What tools are used in AS Java software lifecycle management?
□ A SAPup
□ B SAPJload
□ C SDM
□ D SAPJup

SDM, SAPJup, JLoad, JSPAM, ... are tools used for AS Java software lifecycle
management.

5. For what are Support Packages used?

□ A To enter user data.
□ B To import SAP objects to keep the system at the current
maintenance
level.
□ C To implement adjustments in the system due to changes in
legal
requirements.
□ D To transport programs developed by the customer.
□ E To import all the transport requests that SAP makes available on
the SAP Service Marketplace.

6. You always have to import all available SPAM/SAINT updates in
order, since
they build on one another.
□ True
□ False
All repository objects that belong to the tools are always upgraded during
the
SPAM/SAINT update. It is therefore not necessary to follow any particular
order.

7. The queue for importing the SPAM update must be confirmed
manually.
□ True
□ False

8. A prerequisite for importing a SPAM/SAINT update is that there
are no aborted
Support Packages in the system.
□ True
□ False

9. Support Packages can be imported in any order.
□ True
□ False
Support Packages must be imported in ascending order, without any gaps.

10. To be able to restore the SAP NW AS Java if a system error
occurs, it is
sufficient to backup the directory /usr/sap.
□ True
□ False
In addition to the proprietary SAP directories, you must also back up the
database and the SDM directory.

1. The SAP Library provides you with information about how to
partition your
hard disks.
□ True
□ False
Partitioning hard disks is not part of the SAP Library.

2. The SAP Library also offers a glossary of important terms.
□ True
□ False

3. The SAP Library is only available on the Internet at the URL
http://help.sap.com.
□ True
□ False
The SAP Library can and should also be set up locally, for example, on a
file or
Web server.

4. The following technical forms of the online help, also known as
the SAP
Library, are available:

□ A Compressed HTML (.comphtml)
□ B PlainHtmlHttp
□ C PlainHtmlFile
□ D StaticHelp
□ E DynamicHelp
□ F SAP HelpKit

5. The sapdoccd.ini file can be stored in three different places. In
which
sequence is the directory tree searched: A) C:Program FilesSAPFrontEnd,
B)
C:WINNT, and C) C:Program FilesSAPFrontEndSAPgui?

B)C:WINNT,
C:Program FilesSAPFrontEndSAPgui?
A) C:Program FilesSAPFrontEnd,

Server Name
Name of the spool server, maximum of 20 characters long (casesensitive). The
field below is intended for a short description.

1. Which of the following access methods exist in the SAP
system?

□ A Remote printing
□ B Front-end printing
□ C Instance printing
□ D Local printing

2. Which of the listed states can a spool request have?

□ A Compl.
□ B Canceled
□ C Error
□ D Waiting
□ E Active
□ F Print

1. How many background processes are currently configured in
your SAP system?
a) Start transaction SM66.
b) Choose the Select Process pushbutton to make the following selections:
. Type: Background only
. Status: choose Wait in addition
Choose Continue and count the number of work processes displayed.

2. What determines the number of available background work
processes?
a) The parameter rdisp/wp_no_btc initially specifies the number of
available
background work processes on the current instance. You can check the
value of the parameter with transaction RZ11 or the report RSPFPAR.
If you have defined operation modes (transaction RZ04), this value can be
overwritten. In this case, use the CCMS Control Panel (transaction RZ03)
to specify the current operation mode.

3. How many background jobs can be processed simultaneously?
a) The SAP system process as many jobs concurrently as there are
background
work processes available.

4. Assume that all background work processes in your system are
currently
processing and there are, therefore, no free resources for other jobs. Can
you set
up additional background work processes without restarting the SAP
system?
a) Using the concept of operation modes, you can define an operation
mode
with additional background work processes in transaction RZ04. You can
then perform a manual operation mode switch using transaction RZ03.
You
do not need to restart your system when doing this.

Note:
To be able to react to external events, the SAP system must be active.
Otherwise an
event triggered by an external program is lost.

For example: sapevt event=MEINEREIGNIS name=DEV
mshost=twdf5000.wdf.sap.corp. The ouptut of sapevt is written to a
trace
file dev_evt in the current directory.

1. A background job contains one or more steps. An ABAP program or
an external
command or program can be executed in a step of this type. A job can be
triggered at a particular time or when a defined event occurs.
Answer: steps, external, step, time, event

2. What status can a job have?

□ A Running
□ B Released
□ C Waiting
□ D Finished
□ E Error
□ F Active

3. Which of the listed options for time-dependent scheduling of a
job can be
implemented with the standard resources of the SAP system?

□ A Daily at 1500
□ B The second-last working day of every month
□ C Every nine days, but not on Sundays
□ D Only tomorrow at 2355

□ E Every year on April 1 at 0800

4. Which of the listed options for event-dependent scheduling of a
job can be
implemented with the standard resources of the SAP system?

□ A Whenever the system switches to the Night operation mode
□ B AfterthejobJob1 has run successfully
□ C Whenever a particular event has been triggered
□ D Whenever the periodic job Job2 has run successfully

5. If one of the system's ten background work processes is
reserved for class A
jobs, and jobs are being processed in the other nine work
processes, the reserved
work process remains free even if a class A job is waiting for
execution.
□ True
□ False
The work processes that are reserved for class A jobs process class A jobs.
The
option to reserve work processes for class A jobs should only prevent all
work
processes being occupied with class B or C jobs.

6. If a user has authorization to schedule an external program as
a step of a

background job, he or she can run any operating system
command.
□ True
□ False
If you do not want, as an administrator, to assign this critical
authorization, but
want to enable your users to run a specific operating system command,
you can
define an external command in the SAP system.
Caution: SAPconnect must be set up client dependent. For example,
the
RML nodes that you use for communication between two SAP systems (via
Remote Mail) use RFC connections that are valid system wide, but the
nodes
themselves are only known within a client.

1. Which of the following statements regarding SAPconnect are
correct?

□ A As of SAP Web AS 6.10, a Microsoft Exchange Infrastructure must
be set up outside the SAP system to be able to send mail from SAP
systems.
□ B It is not possible to connect the UNIX-based sendmail to SAP
systems.
□ C SAPconnect allows you to send mail both by RFC and the
SMTP

plug-in of the SAP AS ABAP.
□ D SAPconnect is configured cross-client.
□ E A send process automatically runs periodically in every SAP system
after the system installation.

2. The connection of a mail server to an SAP system to send emails using SMTP
from the SAP system runs through an SAPconnect node.
□ True
□ False

To configure a send process for SMTP in the SAP system, you must, among
other things, also have configured and activated an SMTP node in
transaction
SCOT (SAPconnect).

1. List the functions of Transport Management System (TMS).
Answer: The Transport Management System (TMS) organizes, monitors, and
performs transports for all SAP systems within a system landscape.
2. List examples of client-specific data.
Answer: Examples of client-specific data are:
. User master data.
. Client-specific Customizing data such as organizational units, assignments,

and document types.
. Application data such as business transaction data and material master data.
3. List categories in which data in an SAP system can be divided.
Answer: Data in an SAP system can be divided into two categories:
client-specific data and cross-client data. Client-specific data, such as user
master and application data, affects only one client.
Cross-client data, such as cross-client customizing data and all Repository
objects, affects the whole system environment.
4. Define a client in an SAP system.
Answer: A client in an SAP system is a self-contained unit in commercial,
organizational, and technical terms. A client has its own user master data and
set of table key ranges.
5. If the system change options are set to not modifiable and in the
client change
options allow the changing of repository objects, you can not change repository
objects from within this client.
□ True
□ False
How many tasks are associated with your workbench transport request?
a) You should have as many tasks assigned to the transport request, as there
are users assigned.
What type of transport request was created? What is the difference
between a
local transport request and a workbench transport request?
a) The newly created request is a workbench transport request.
Workbench transport requests can be distributed/transported to target
systems. Local transport requests are local to the SAP system that it was
created in and can not be distributed/transported to target systems.
In order to transport your newly created package to the subsequent
systems of
your system landscape, export the transport request containing your
package.
a) In the Transport Organizer (SE09): Select the task of the transport request
containing your package. Release the task. Then select the transport
request itself and release it. The transport request with your package is now
being exported. Check, that the export terminated without errors.
There are two locking mechanisms when Repository objects are being
modified:
The editor program, which works with the enqueue work process to ensure that
only one user at a time can modify an object in the system
The workbench transport request, which ensures that the developer modifying
the object is assigned to a valid task within the Workbench transport request.
The version database resides in the development system. Versions
cannot be

transported between SAP systems. If the development system is
removed from the
system landscape, all versions in the version database are lost.
Is there a transport request number associated with this program? Why
or why
not?
a) Go to the Transport Organizer screen by choosing transaction SE09.
There is no transport request associated with this program. Local objects
are not linked to the Transport Organizer.
Is there a package associated with this program? Why or why not?
a) Yes. The package is $TMP.
All repository objects, including local objects, are listed in the Object
Directory (table TADIR). To search the Object Directory, choose transaction
SE38. Enter the name of the program, select Attributes and choose Display.
The package for this object is $TMP.
There are three types of transport requests or development tasks:
unclassified, local,
and transportable.
. Transport requests or tasks of type unclassified have empty object lists.
. Changes to original objects are saved to tasks of type development/correction.
. Changes to copies are saved to tasks of type repair.
SAP Software Change Registration (SSCR),
To adjust the ABAP Dictionary Repository objects during an upgrade, use
transaction
SPDD. To merge all other Repository objects, use transaction SPAU.
1. Select the correct descriptions of what the IMG is or does:
□ A Provides customizing transactions.
□ B Is where all Customizing activities must be performed.
□ C Gives you offline access to all the information required to Customize
an SAP system.
□ D Offers project management tools.
2. It is possible to extend an existing project IMG.
□ True
□ False
The project IMG can be extended with the help of transaction SPRO_ADMIN at
any time. After the change of the IMG, a regeneration has to be done.
3. What is a transport request ?
Answer: A transport request is a information source in the Transport Organizer
that can record all changes and modifications made to repository objects and
customizing settings during the adoption of the system.
4. SAP recommends that:

□ A Project manager or person responsible for the transport (a limited
number of users) are creating the transport requests
□ B Project members should always create their transport request by
there own
□ C The project members are assigned to the transport request by
creation
of tasks for each project member inside the transport request
□ D Project members are recording changes in their own task (assigned
by
the project manager or person responsible for the transport)
5. What should be done before releasing a transport request in the
development
system?





A Unit testing
B Release of all tasks inside the transport request
C Deletion of tasks inside the transport request
D Information of system administration about the released tasks

Before a transport request in the development system is released, first the unit
testing in the development system has to be successfully finished. Second,
all tasks that are contained in the transport request have to be released by the
customizers. Otherwise it is not possible to release the transport request by
the project leader.
6. Client-independent customizing objects must be saved to transport requests of
type workbench.
7. The change management solution in SAP systems is based on
creating,
documenting and distributing transport requests.
□ True
□ False
8. What is the function of Transport Organizer?
Answer: Transport Organizer records customizing changes and ABAP
Development Workbench changes in transport requests for Customizing and
development.
9. All development in a system landscape should be done in a single
SAP System.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
□ True
□ False
All development in an SAP system landscape has to be done in the same source
system, the development system.
10. When are versions being generated?
Answer: Versions are generated when exporting a transport request. According
to the tp parameter settings also when importing a transport request (not by
default). A temporary version can be generated manually at any time by the

developer.
11. How is the changing of an SAP standard Repository object termed?
Answer: An SAP standard Repository object is delivered as a copy in all
customer systems. Changing it is classified as a repair. Repairing an SAP
standard Repository object is also called modification.
12. What is the function of Modification Assistant?
Answer: The Modification Assistant helps you modify SAP standard delivered
objects and simplify a possible Modification adjustment during applying a
Support Package or performing an Upgrade.
As a new feature with SAP Web AS 6.40 it is possible with one tp
process to import
the requests of multiple projects into multiple target clients.
In contrast to standard imports, preliminary imports are imports of single
requests.
SAP strongly recommends only using standard imports because of object
dependencies
and the risk of inconsistencies when importing individual requests. For example,
an ABAP report in one request can be successfully imported, but the table that it
refers to can be in another request that has not yet been imported. Until the
table is
imported, executing the report generates short dumps. Use preliminary imports
only
in exceptional cases.
SAP recommends not rejecting requests containing errors, but correcting the
error
using subsequent transport requests and approving the affected transport
requests as
an entire package.

There are four major steps when importing transport requests:
1. Import dictionary objects
2. .Threatening. dictionary objects
3. Import .everything else.
4. .Threat. everything else

If you trigger an tp import all, tp has to ensure that at the beginning of the
import
process all transport requests stored at this time in the buffer are imported. This
is done by executing command tp setstopmark each time a tp import
all process
is started. After the steps of the import process are completed, the command tp
delstopmark is performed automatically, and a tp cleanbuffer deletes the
transport
requests from the import buffer.
To trigger the transport daemon RDDIMPDP in the SAP System, tp uses the
operating
system level tool sapevt.
p monitors the entries in table TRBAT and table TRJOB. When the header entry in
table TRBAT is set to F and table TRJOB is empty, tp copies the logs of the
completed
steps from directory tmp to log and deletes the corresponding entries in
table TRBAT.
When imports are performed, tp triggers the import dispatcher RDDIMPDP by
sending the event SAP_TRIGGER_RDDIMPDP with the help of the tool sapevt.
The tp unconditional import modes are as follows:
. 0 Imported transport requests are not deleted from buffer.
. 1 Ignore that the transport request has already been imported
. 2 Overwrite originals
. 6 Overwrite objects in unconfirmed repairs.
. 8 Ignore restrictions based on table classification
. 9 Ignore the fact that the system is locked for this type of transport
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1. Using TMS, you can import all transport requests listed in the production
system
import queue in the given sequence.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.

□ True
□ False
2. Describe the relationship between import queues and import buffers.
Answer: The import queue in the SAP System represents the import buffer
located on the operating system level. Import queues display the requests that
are to be imported to the target system, in the order of their release.
3. SAP recommends that you reject transport requests containing
errors.
□ True
□ False
SAP does not recommend the rejecting of transport requests containing errors,
but instead of correcting them using subsequent transport requests and
approving
the affected transport requests as an entire package.

4. State how to create a transport proposal.
Answer: To create a transport proposal, go to the Change and Transport
Organizer and select released requests. Choose Display. Position the cursor on a
request and choose Utilities(M)→ Create transport proposal. Enter a short text,
the target system and you can other transport requests.

5. Which additional tools are called by tp to perform all import steps
□ A tp_abap.exe
□ B RDDIMPDP
□ C R3trans
□ D R3import
RDDIMPDP is used for communication with ABAP. R3trans is used for
communication with database.
To execute transport steps, tp uses the tables TRBAT and TRJOB to
communicate
with the various ABAP programs.
7. To display tp systemlog, you have to log on to operating system and
navigate in
transport directory /usr/sap/trans/log.
□ True
□ False
To display tp systemlog, chooseSTMS → Overview → Imports → Goto →
Import Monitor or use transaction AL11
8. SAP recommends transporting each object as soon as it is syntax
error free.
□ True
□ False
SAP recommends importing a whole change project when all objects are in an
acceptable state rather than each object as soon as it is ready.
9. The command tp check all searches for transport requests that are not
marked for
import into any SAP system.
10. Which statements concerning the transport of non-ABAP obejcts
with the help
of the ABAP Change and Transport System (CTS) are correct?
□ A You must use Customizing requests to transport non-ABAP objects.
□ B You must use Workbench requests to transport non-ABAP objects.
□ C Transport requests for non-ABAP objects can be created using the
CTS_BROWSER Web Dynpro application.
□ D Transport Requests for non-ABAP objects can be created using
transaction SE09 on the transport domain controller.
You can only use Workbench requests to transport non-ABAP objects with the
help of the enhancements of CTS. Transport requests can be created both with

transaction SE09 and using the Web Dynpro application. If you use SE09 on the
Transport Domain Controller, the transport request is named TDCK9xxxxx where
TDC is the System ID of the transport domain controller. If you use the
CTS_BROWSER Web Dynpro application, the transport request can also be named
JADK9xxxx where JAD is the System ID of your Java Development system.
Hint: To estimate the size of a client you can also run program RSTABLESIZE.
Besides other options, you can distinguish between application and
customizing data.
1. Client transport consists of two processes: export and import (with
post import activities).
□ True
□ False
2. The client copy and client transport tools are designed to replace the
data of one
client with data from another client.
□ True
□ False
3. Explain the steps involved in client transport.
Answer: A client transport consists of two steps: .
. First, a client export extracts client data from the source client to files at
the operating system level.
. Second, the data is imported from the file system files into the target client.
4. To avoid the problem of insufficient free space in the database,
perform a
simulation test run or a resource check.
□ True
□ False
5. List the steps to delete a client from within an SAP system.
Answer: To delete a client from within an SAP system:
. Log on to the client to be deleted.
. Use transaction SCC5.
. Either delete the client entry from table T000 by using this function in
transaction SCC5 or by deleting it with transaction SCC4.
6. What is the difference between a client compare and a client
maintenance/adjustment?
Answer: A client compare looks for differences in the Customizing of two
clients, a client maintenance/adjustment copies these differences from one client
to the other.
7. What should be the settings for a productive client, concerning client
copy/comparison?
Answer: Protection level 2: No overwriting, no external availability.

Oracle Certification Example Questions
To reveal the answers, highlight the Answer column and change the text colour
to black
1. During an offline backup, which files must be saved to
ensure that the Oracle database can be restored to an
internally consistent state?

Answer

Oracle executable files.

F

Oracle database transaction log files and offline redo log files.

F

Offline redo log files and the SAP system log.

F

Tablespace data files, database transaction log files, and the
database control file.

T

Database transaction log files and SAP transport files.

F

2. During an online database backup, which files must be
saved to ensure that the Oracle database can be restored to
an internally consistent state?

Answer

Tablespace data files, the database control file, and all database redo
logs written during the online backup.

T

Oracle online redo log files and the database control file.

F

Offline redo log files, the database control file, and the Oracle
executables.

F

The Oracle executables, the database parameter file, and the
tablespace data files.

F

The tablespace data files, the database control file, and the database
parameter file.

F

3. When an Oracle database is used by an SAP System with
the ID C11, what is the name of the file for brbackup and
brarchive parameters?

Answer

initC11.ini

F

initC11.sap

T

initC11.ora

F

sapdba.ini

F

initC11.dba

F

4. Which of the following statements are correct in regards
to using a single run of BRBACKUP to save both the database
files and the offline redo log files?

Answer

BRARCHIVE is started immediately after the database backup is
complete: no further intervention by the database administrator is
necessary.

T

This technique can only be used for offline database backups, not
online backups.

F

The database backup and the backup of the offline redo log files must
fit on one tape because changing tapes is not supported.

F

You can backup the database using multiple tape devices in parallel.

T

The tapes used must have been initialized by BRBACKUP.

T

5. When is data written to the Oracle transaction logs (redo
logs)?

Answer

Sometimes before, sometimes after being written to the database
files.

F

After being written to the database files.

F

At the same time as being written to the database files.

T

After a transaction failed.

F

Before being written to the database files.

F

6. What is the primary function of the "sapbackup" directory?

Answer

Storing database transaction logs (redo logs) temporarily before they
are automatically written to tape.

F

Providing a work area for SAP Instance tasks.

F

Storing database backup log files.

T

Storing the offline redo log files.

F

Providing a work area for SAP database utilities during database
reorganizations.

F

7. SAP recommends checking the database for corrupt data
blocks at least once per backup cycle. How can this be done?

Answer

Oracle always checks for corrupted data blocks when a backup is
performed.

F

The tool brbackup always checks for corrupted data blocks when a
backup is performed.

F

You can perform a level 0 backup using the Oracle Recovery Manager
(RMAN) together with SAP tools, because this method checks all
blocks for corruption.

T

Use the verify option (-w use_dbv) when running brbackup.

T

Use the verify option (-w use_dbv) when running brarchive.

F

8. Which of the following statements is correct in regard to
OPS$connect?

Answer

OPS$connect authorization allows an operating system user to
connect to the database without being prompted for a password.

T

OPS$connect is an Oracle command enabling whoever executes it to
administer the database without using SQL*Plus

F

OPS$connect is used to start up the database in restricted mode.

F

OPS$connect authorization is required for all users connecting to the
Oracle database.

F

OPS$connect enables the saposcol process to communicate and
exchange data with the Oracle database.

F

9. What happens during the shutdown of an Oracle
database?

Answer

When you shutdown the database with the NORMAL option, the
database system disconnects all users before shutting down the
database.

F

When you shutdown the database with the NORMAL or IMMEDIATE
option, the database system writes a checkpoint before shutting
down the database.

T

When you shutdown the database with the IMMEDIATE option, open
transactions are rolled back before the database is shut down.

T

When you shut down the database with the ABORT option, the SAP
system is shut down, too.

F

Shutting down the database with the IMMEDIATE option requires an
instance recovery at the next database startup.

F

10. Which of the following statements are correct for the
SAP-recommended strategy for creating and updating table
statistics used by the cost-based optimizer?

Answer

There are some tables for which statistics should not be created.

T

Statistics are created for all transparent tables that have no statistics.

F

Table DBSTATC contains all statistics and therefore only this table is
updated.

T

The update for table statistics refreshes all transparent tables.

F

The table DBSTATC is used to detect which table statistics need to be
refreshed.

F

11. What happens during the start up of an Oracle database?

Answer

The SGA is created in shared memory according to the parameter
settings in the configuration file init<SID>.ora.

T

The Oracle shadow processes are created.

F

In the mount phase, the database control files are evaluated.

T

At every start up, Oracle automatically performs a media recovery.

F

As the last step, the online redo log files are cleared and the data files
are opened.

F

12. Which Oracle component dynamically maintains
information about the status of the database redo logs, the
database mode, the names and paths of database files, and is
essential during a database recovery?

Answer

The Oracle parameter file, init<SID>.ora.

F

Each tablespace data file contains this data for the whole database.

F

The SGA definition file, sgadef<SID>.def.

F

The Oracle control file, cntrl<SID>.dbf.

T

The sapdba parameter file, init<SID>.dba.

F

13. When an SAP update task aborts with an Oracle error
ORA1653 - failure to allocate an extent for a table in a
specific tablespace - what action needs to be taken?

Answer

The tablespace should be reorganized.

F

The tablespace size should be increased by adding a new data file or
increasing the size of an existing data file.

T

The table should be reorganized.

F

The storage parameter MAXEXTENTS must be increased.

F

The table should be moved to another tablespace.

F

14. Which of the following checks are useful for database
performance monitoring?

Answer

Checking that the cost based optimizer statistics are refreshed once a
week according to the strategy recommended by SAP.

T

Checking that the archive directory contains enough free space.

F

Checking the data buffer quality.

T

Checking the shared cursor cache for expensive SQL statements.

T

Checking for tables with more than 100 extents.

F

15. What information can be found in the Oracle alert log
file?

Answer

DB error messages caused by an archiver stuck.

T

SAP instance start up and shutdown messages.

F

Information about redo log switches.

T

Information about aborted ABAP programs.

F

Information about backups with brbackup.

F

16. Which of the following is true for the SQL statement
highlighted on the "Shared SQL" screen?

Answer

The statement is an expensive statement, because it is on top of the
list.

F

The statement is an expensive statement, because it shows more
than one million buffer gets.

F

The statement is an expensive statement, because the buffer gets in
this statement exceed 5% of the total buffer gets (reads) in this
system.

T

The statement is an expensive statement, because the buffer gets in
this statement exceed 5% of the physical reads (disk reads) in this
system.

F

The statement is not an expensive statement.

F

17. During a workload analysis session, an expensive SQL
statement on table ZLARGE was identified in report ZZSLOW.
Which of the following statements is a correct option to solve
the problem?

Answer

Creating a new secondary index on ZLARGE always solves the
problem without any impact to the rest of the SAP system.

F

Creating a new secondary index on ZLARGE has an impact on the
cost based optimizer which can lead to bad optimizer decisions.

T

Dropping and recreating all indexes of ZLARGE solves the problem.

F

By SAP recommendation, creating an index on table ZLARGE is
preferable to (has priority over) changing the expensive statement in
the code of ZZSLOW.

F

By SAP recommendation, changing the expensive statement in the
code of ZZSLOW is preferable to (has priority over) creating an index
on table ZLARGE.

T

18. The SAP System Oracle database has four online redo
logs, also known as database transaction logs. Each online
redo log has a mirrored copy. What is the effect of a log file
switch?

Answer

The current online redo log is copied to its mirrored copy, then the
next online redo log becomes open for writing.

F

The database alternates between writing to the online and offline
redo log files.

F

The database switches between writing to the original redo log files
and the mirrored redo log files.

F

The current online redo log is closed and the next online redo log
becomes open for writing. The ARCH process is triggered to begin
backing up the recently closed redo log.

T

The current SAP system log file is copied to the SAPARCH directory
and a new log file is created.

F

19. Which of the following statements is correct regarding
online Oracle database backups?

Answer

Users may only read data and may not enter data until after the
backup is done.

F

The database must be running in archivelog mode.

T

A complete online backup consists of tablespace data files and the
control file.

F

Database transaction logs (online redo logs) are not written during
online backups.

F

Online database backups are not supported by Oracle.

F

20. What is the primary purpose of the "sapreorg" directory?

Answer

Storing the offline redo log files.

F

Providing a work area for SAP dialog instance tasks.

F

Storing online database backups instead of writing them to tape.

F

Storing transaction log files.

F

Providing a work area for SAP database utilities.

T

21. Which of the following kinds of information are provided
by the command "brconnect -f check"?

Answer

Information about the last successful or failed backups.

F

Complete path names and file sizes for all data files.

T

Space-critical objects.

T

The tables and indexes with the most free space.

F

Values of all active database configuration parameters.

T

22. Which of the following rules apply when you are
configuring online redo logs?

Answer

Each redo log group should have at least 2 members.

T

In the SAP standard installation, there are 2 redo log groups with 4
members each.

F

The total combined size of all online redo log files must be at least as
large as the maximum amount of redo log data generated by a single
transaction.

F

For optimum database performance, the online redo log files should
not be located on RAID 5 disks.

T

Locating online redo logs on slow disks directly impacts the response
time of SELECT operations.

F

23. Which of the following Oracle parameters should never
be modified in the file init<SID>.ora?

Answer

db_name

T

row_cache_cursors

F

shared_pool_size

F

db_block_size

T

db_block_buffers

F

24. What gives you authorisation to shutdown an Oracle
database?

Answer

SYSOPER privilege

F

SYSDBA privilege

T

START_STOP privilege

F

DBA role

F

OPER role

F

25. Which of the following is true regarding the
ORACLE_HOME variable?

Answer

ORACLE_HOME is a system environment variable that must be set on
the database server.

F

ORACLE_HOME is a system environment variable that must be set on
the database server and all application servers.

F

ORACLE_HOME is a user environment variable that must be set on the
database server.

T

ORACLE_HOME is a user environment variable that must be set on the
database server.

F

ORACLE_HOME contains the Oracle executables.

T

26. Which of the following options will allow you to shutdown
an Oracle database whilst SAP is still running?

Answer

BRSPACE with the option abort and force.

T

BRSPACE with the option abort without force.

F

BRSPACE with the option immediate and force.

T

The SQL*Plus command SHUTDOWN ABORT

T

The SQL*Plus command SHUTDOWN IMMEDIATE

T

27. With which user do SAP work processes connect to the
Oracle database?

Answer

SYS

F

SYSTEM

F

SAP<SCHEMA-ID>

T

SAPDBA

F

SYSDBA

F

28. Which recovery would you recommend in the following
scenario? A customer wants to restore a failed upgrade. The
upgrade was started at 16:00 and the last backup was taken
at 23:00 the night before.

Answer

Perform a complete recovery to 16:00.

F

Perform a complete recovery to 23:00.

F

Perform a database reset to 23:00 and manually recover until 16:00.

F

Perform a database reset to 16:00.

F

Perform a point in time recovery to 16:00.

T

29. Which of the following are true regarding UNDO
segments?

Answer

BRSPACE can convert rollback segments to undo segments.

F

Undo segments are released at transaction commit time.

F

Undo segments are released according to the undo_retention
parameter.

T

Undo segments should be stored in autoextensible tablespaces to
ensure there is no lack of space.

T

The 6.20 installation tools automatically create undo segments
instead of rollback segments.

F

30. What can a database administrator do whilst the
database is in MOUNT mode?

Answer

Review the V$ tables.

T

Recreate missing control files.

F

Add online redo log files.

T

Switch archivelogmode.

T

Perform a database recovery.

T

31. Which of the following are true of reorganisations?

Answer

The SAP recommended reorganisation approach can be carried out
online.

T

You must ensure there is sufficient space in the SAPREORG directory
to be able to reorganise the largest segment.

F

SAP recommends the export/import approach to reorganisations.

F

BRSPACE allows you to convert dictionary managed tablespaces into
locally managed tablespaces.

T

BRSPACE allows you to convert locally managed tablespaces into
dictionary managed tablespaces.

F

32. How can you control the execution of the BRCONNECT –f
check function?

Answer

Using CCMS thresholds.

F

You cannot control the execution of this function.

F

Using the init<SAPSID>.sap parameter file.

T

In table DBCHECKORA using transaction DB17.

T

Using the init<SAPSID>.dba parameter file.

F

33. Which of the following are possible with BRPSACE
tablespace administration?

Answer

Moving a data file to a non-SAPDATA directory.

F

Resetting the backup status of a tablespace after a failed online
backup.

T

You can add a data file to a tablespace.

T

You can resize an existing data file of a tablespace.

T

You can coalesce free extents in a tablespace.

T

34. To enlarge the system global area (SGA) for the Oracle
database instance, which of the following Oracle parameters
should be modified in the file init<SID>.ora?

Answer

db_block_buffers

T

log_archive_dest

F

shared_pool_size

T

rollback_segments

F

db_block_size

F

35. What is indicated by the Oracle database message
"Checkpoint not complete"?

Answer

The database was corrupted because a checkpoint could not
complete.

F

A log switch had to wait for a checkpoint to complete.

T

There was a temporary database standstill while waiting for a
checkpoint to complete.

T

An archiver stuck situation occurred that prevented the ongoing
checkpoint from completing.

F

The database system tried to reuse an online redo log that had not
yet been copied to the archive directory by the ARCH process.

F

36. An instance error occurs when one or more Oracle
background processes become corrupted. As the database
administrator, what action should you take?

Answer

Shutdown abort and startup open. The SMON process will use the
current redo log files and checkpoint information from the control files
to execute an automatic instance recovery upon database startup.

T

Shutdown the operating system and reinstall the Oracle software.

F

Call the Oracle hotline, as this is a serious error.

F

Shutdown the operating system and turn all hardware off. After the
hardware cools off, start everything up again and execute Orainst
using the repair option.

F

Restore all missing files, apply the offline redo logs, update the
control files, and execute the startup open command.

F

37. When do Oracle shadow processes get created?

Answer

When Oracle is started.

F

When connections are created from SAP instances.

T

When an Oracle background process fails.

F

When an online redo log needs to be archived.

F

At a checkpoint.

F

ADM100 review questions
(Note: Fill in (T)rue or (F)alse in the T/F column for each proposed answer. Once
you have answered all of the questions, you can reveal the correct answers by
selecting the text in the Answer column (which is currently white) and changing
it to a different colour.

T/F

Answer

1. What types of SAP GUI are there?
SAPGUI for Windows

T

SAPGUI for Java

T

T

SAPGUI for Linux

F

F

SAPGUI for HTML

T

T

SAPGUI for Apple

F

F

T

2. Which types of work process can you find on an SAP Web Application
Server?

T/F

Answer

1. What types of SAP GUI are there?
SAPGUI for Windows

T

T

Dialog work process

T

T

Message server work process

F

F

Update work process

T

T

ICM process

F

F

Background work process

T

T

3. The term ‘central instance’ describes the instance That you are logged on to while working in the system

F

On which all SAP process types are available

F

T

On which the gateway process is configured

T

F

On which the majority of work processes are configured

F

F

On which the majority of dialog work processes are
configured

T

F

F

4. What are the benefits of using logon groups?
Users can still log on even if one or more application servers
are down

T

The program buffers perform better

F

T

Dialog load balancing can occur

T

F

The program buffers can be set up smaller

T

The program buffers may now be larger than 1 GB in size

F

T

F
F

6. What is the read/replace sequence of SAP parameters during
startup?
1. Instance profile 2. Default profile 3. Kernel 4. User profile

F

1. Client copy profile 2. Kernel 3. Default profile 4. Instance
profile

F

F
F

T/F

Answer

1. What types of SAP GUI are there?
SAPGUI for Windows

T

1. Kernel 2. Default profile 3. Instance profile

T

T

1. Kernel 2. User profile 3. Default profile 4. Instance profile

F

F

1. Kernel 2. Default profile 3. User profile 4. Instance profile

F

F

T

7. In what forms is the online help available?
HtmlHelpFile

F

PlainHtmlHttp

T

T

PlainHtmlFile

T

T

HelpHtmlFile

F

F

DynamicHelp

T

F

T

8. Which types of RFC does SAP provide?
Synchronous RFC

T

Reflexive RFC

F

F

Looped RFC

F

F

Transactional RFC

T

T

Queued RFC

T

T

T

9. Which of the following statements with regard to CUA are correct?
CUA allows the central maintenance of user master records.

F

Only R/3 systems can be linked to a CUA.

F

F

CUA allows the central maintenance of roles.

T

F

The clients linked by CUA are called logical systems.

T

T

The clients linked with the CUA are known as the central
system and child systems

F

T

T

T/F

Answer

1. What types of SAP GUI are there?
SAPGUI for Windows

T

T

T/F

Answer

10. The following logon parameters can be used to ensure your system
is adequately secured.
login/fails_to_user_lock

T

login/min_password_specials

F

T

login/min_password_diff

F

T

login/named_super_user

F

F

login/gui_timeout_seconds

T

F

T

11. Which of the following statements about saprouter are correct?
saprouter acts as a packet filter

F

saprouter runs automatically as a background process

F

F

saprouter makes the firewall superfluous

F

F

The configuration of saprouter is stored in a file called
saprouttab

T

T

saprouter is a stand-alone program that can run on any
server

T

T

F

12. Which of the following statements about SNC are correct :
SNC can be used to implement single sign-on.

F

SNC is used to encrypt HTTP traffic to the Web AS.

T

F

SNC is used to encrypt RFC/DIAG traffic to the Web AS.

T

T

SNC stands for System Network Cryptography.

F

F

SNC stands for Secure Network Communications.

T

T

T

13. Which of the following profile parameters control passwords?
login/min_password_lng to control the minimum password
length

T

T

T/F

Answer

login/max_password_lng to control the maximum password
length

T

F

login/password_expiration_time to control how many days a
user’s password is valid

T

T

login/multiple_login_users to control which users are allowed
to log into the system

T

T

login/number_repeated_passwords controls how many of your
previous passwords are recorded as invalid passwords

T

F

14. How are dialog work processes assigned to a user that logs on via a
logon group?
The user remains assigned to the same dialog work process,
regardless of server load.

F

Different dialog work processes of the same instance will be
assigned to the user.

T

T

Different dialog work processes of different instances will be
assigned to this user.

F

F

It is not possible to logon via logon groups.

F

F

F

15. Which of the following statements are true regarding the SAP
authorization concept?
Authorizations control access to data and functions.

F

You need authorizations to define users.

T

T

SAP users automatically receive authorizations for the
database and the operating system.

F

F

User sessions are limited by the login/max_user_mode
parameter.

F

F

The SAP* and DDIC users should be copied and deleted.

F

F

T

16. When an operation switch occurs to a mode in which no background
work processes are available, what happens to the active background
jobs?
The jobs are allowed to complete and the switch is cancelled.

F

F

T/F

Answer

The jobs are allowed to complete before the processes are
switched.

F

T

The jobs are terminated.

T

F

The jobs are held until the next switch.

F

F

The jobs are cancelled 5 minutes after the switch.

F

F

17. Which of the following is true of operation modes in R/3?
Operation modes may only be switched manually.

F

Operation modes may be switched manually or periodically.

T

T

Operation modes start and stop SAP instances.

F

F

Operation mode switches can be scheduled for specific dates
and times.

F

T

Operation modes can be used to make more work processes
available for an instance.

F

F

F

18. Which of the following components can be secured when Secure
Network Communication (SNC) is used?
Communication between SAProuter and SAP instance.

T

Communication between SAPGUI and SAP instance.

F

T

Communication between SAPlpd and SAP instance.

F

T

Communication between SAP central instance and database.

F

F

Communication between RFC programs and SAP instance.

T

T

F

19. Which of the following statements are true for user master records
in clients of SAP systems?
An authorization profile can be assigned to a user master
record.
One or more roles can be assigned to a user master record.

T

T

T
T

T/F

Answer

An authorization object can be assigned to a user master
record.

F

F

A user master record is generated using transaction PFCG.

T

F

A single authorization value can be assigned to a user master
record.

F

F

20. How is a newly created role assigned to a user?
Using transaction SU01.

T

The generated profile is assigned to the user using
transaction PFCG.

T

F

A role is assigned an object that is in turn assigned to the
user in transaction SU01.

F

F

A role is automatically assigned to the user who created the
role.

F

F

A role is assigned to the user to whom a generated profile has
been assigned using transaction SU01.

T

F

T

21. In which profile would you assign the login/* parameters?
The instance profile

T

F

The default profile

F

T

The start profile

F

F

The user profile

F

F

The client copy profile

F

F

22. In which profile would you assign the rdisp/wp_no_dia parameter?
The instance profile

T

The default profile

F

The start profile

F

The user profile

F

The client copy profile

F

T/F

Answer

23. Which resources can you use to diagnose startup problems with an
SAP system called DEV?
SM21

F

Database logs.

T

Developer traces in /usr/sap/DEV/<INSTANCE>/trace

F

Developer traces in /usr/sap/DEV/<INSTANCE>/work

T

The startup manager log files.

F

24. RFC destinations should not allow dialog logons in case the RFC
connection is abused. Which of the following statements are true
regarding this scenario?
A blank target host in the destination will log the user on to
client 000 of the same system using user SAPSYS.

F

The RFC destination should be type ‘R’.

F

You should test the destination with the ‘Test connection’
button.

T

The RFC destination should use a user of type
‘Communication’.

T

The RFC destination can be configured without a user so that
a logon is requested each time the connection is used.

T

25. Which of the following startup sequences are correct?
1. Message Server 2. Database 3. Dispatcher

F

1. Gateway 2. Message Server 3. Dispatcher

F

1. Database 2. Dispatcher 3. Work process

T

1. Database 2. Message Server 3. Gateway

T

1. ICM 2. Dispatcher 3. Work process

F

1 - The ______ manages the information exchange between the SAPGUI
and the work processes.
Click on the button next to the right answer.
a)
b)
c)
d)

Data Dictionary
Message server
Gateway service
Dispatcher

2 - What does "enqueue" and "dequeue" mean?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
a)
b)
c)
d)

Puts/reads messages in the SAP message queue.
Locks/unlocks SAP objects during database updates.
Enables/disables SAP print queues.
Reads/writes update messages in the database.

3 - Update workprocesses may be categorized as V1 or V2. Which of the
2 types of Update workprocesses has priority?
a)
V1 and V2 workprocesses are handled simultaneously
without
priority.
b)
V1 and V2 workprocesses are handled on a first-in-firstout
basis.
c)
Processing priority is determined by the rdisp/wp_no_vb
profile
parameter.
d)
V1 workprocesses have priority over V2
e)
V2 workprocesses have priority over V1
4 - If a user is logged on to a server group, how are dialog work
processes assigned to this user?
a)
The user always remains assigned to the same dialog work
process,
regardless of server load.
b)
Depending on the load of the servers, different dialog work
processes of the same R/3 Instance will be assigned to the user.
c)
Depending on the load of the servers, different dialog work processes of
different instances will be assigned to
this user.
d)
It is not possible to logon to a server group.
5 - If an R/3 System has the dialog, update, enqueue, background,
message, gateway and spool services installed using Instance ID 01 and
connects to a database using the database system identifier C11, what
is the R/3 System Instance name?
a)
b)
c)
d)

DVBMGS01_C11
DVEBMGS
DVEBMGS01_C11
DVEBMS01_C11

6 - What controls R/3 System user authorizations and default id values?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
a)
b)

User administration at the operating system level.
The ABAP/4 Dictionary.

c)
d)
e)

The Developer's Workbench.
The R/3 System user master record.
The Workbench Organizer.

7 - Which of the following is NOT true of the R/3 System Authorization
concept?
a)
Authorizations are used to administer and assign access rights to data
and functions in the R/3 System.
b)
Authorizations are used to set up users in the R/3 System.
c)
Users defined in the R/3 System automatically receive full
operating system user privileges.
d)
Access to specific R/3 data can be defined using authorizations.
e)
R/3 objects may have several authorizations assigned.
8 - When you create a new user and no role is assigned, to which client may the
user log on?
All clients.
a)
Only in the client where the user was created.
b)
In the client where the user was created and in client 000.
c)
In the client where the user was created and in client 001.
d)
Can not logon to any client as no role is assigned
e)
User will still can logon on client 000 as reference roles
available

are

9 - When an SAP instance switches to a new operation mode which has
no configured background tasks, what happens to any active
background processes at the time of the switch?
a)
All active batch processes are aborted.
b)
All batch processes are suspended and are resumed when batch
services become available.
c)
All active batch processes finish to completion before the
operation mode is switched.
d)
All active batch processes complete and the operation mode does not
switch.
10 - Which of the following is NOT true of event controlled background
processing in R/3?
a)
An event can be triggered from within R/3 by ABAP/4 programs.
b)
An event in R/3 can be triggered from outside of the R/3
System
by using the operating system level program,
sapevt.
c)
It is not necessary for the R/3 System to be active for events to
be triggered.
d)
Events are used internally by the R/3 System and cannot be raised by
users.
e)
The sapevt program can start the event scheduler in R/3 which
checks the job queue for scheduled jobs waiting for this event and then
starts these jobs.

11 - What are 2 ways to start an ABAP/4 program?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
a)
In online or in offline mode.
b)
In online or in background mode.
c)
As local or as remote programs.
d)
ABAP/4 programs can only be started online.
e)
As a client or as a server program.
14.
How many different clients get installed with a fresh ECC
installation?
a)
b)
c)
d)
15.

What is the password of DDIC ?
a)
b)
c)
d)

16.

One
Two
Three
None

pass
It is based on password set during installation
19920607
Sap

What is the maximum number of Dialog work processes can be
configured in an instance?
a)
b)
c)
d)

No Limit
100
40
50

17 Database transactions are based on the ACID principle. So are SAP
transactions. Why does the database transaction concept nevertheless
not cover all the needs of the SAP system?
a)
An SAP transaction can bundle several database
transactions. It is only as a result of all of these bundled database
transactions that the data is consistent in business terms.
b)
Due to work process multiplexing, each work process
starts a separate database transaction within each dialog
step.
c)
This is because less resources are utilized in the system by
following this strategy
d)
Using the SAP transaction as a structural level above the
database transaction significantly
improves the performance of your SAP system.
18) The following personalization options are available in the SAP GUI:
a) You can change the font size (within limits) in the SAP GUI
b) You can have system messages displayed in a dialog box
c) You can change the size of input fields
d) You can suppress the display of pictures in the SAP GUI
e) Every user can display a picture of his or her choice on the SAP
Easy Access screen

f) You can use a personal input history on your front end
19) To be prepared as best as possible for an SAP system installation
you should ( one answer is correct)
a) Manually prepare /sap/db/dbtype, respectively for database
installation
b) Make sure that enough memory is available to avoid rebooting the
server during installation
c) Always download and install the newest java SDK available
at http://www.sun.com
d) Get more details on installation problem by
checking http://service.sap.com/installationproblems
e) Make the installation CDS available for installation in
parallel.
20.
Which one is true while installing SAP in Windows
environment?
a)
b)
c)
d)

Install SAP instance, database software and then database load
and finally dialog instance
Install SAP instance, install dialog instance followed by database
and then database load
Install database software, install SAP instance and db load
and finally extra dialog instance
No specific sequence to be followed

21.
How can the Internet access to SAP systems from web
browsers using ICM be scaled
a) By using ICM from other SAP systems as well
b) By increasing the number of instances , the ICM process is
configured
c) By increasing number of ICM processes per instance.
d) By using stand alone ITS for the corresponding process as well
e) By increases the number of threads of the ICM
(ICM/min_threads)
22.

What is the configuration file used by sap router?
a)
b)
c)
d)

saprouter.ini
saproute.ini
router.sap
saprouttab

23.
Which transaction is used to maintain the start, default &
instance profile?
a)
b)
c)
d)

SM21
RZ01
RZ20
RZ10

24.

If an SAP distributed instance has the system no. 10, hostname
'DAS1' and SID 'DEV', what would be the name of the instance
profile be?
a)
b)
c)
d)

default_dev.pfl
DEV_DVEBMGS10_DAS1
DAS1_DVEBMGS10_DEV
DEV_DBS10_DAS1

25.
Which of the following is true in terms of configuring the SAP
Message Service?
a)
service.
b)
c)
System.
d)
Instance.
e)

27.

The host where the message service runs is defined in the
database parameter profile.
There must be exactly 1 message service per SAP
The message service must run on the SAP Central
In a networked SAP System environment consisting
of 1 database host and 1 or more Application Servers,
1 Application Server functions as the Update work
process server.

If you would like to create a new user in a remote client by
using Central User Administration, you can assign new logical
system by fields on the following tabs
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)

28.

Each SAP instance must have a locally running message

Address
Roles
Logon Data
Groups
Systems

Which of the following types of steps can be entered when
defining background jobs in SAP?
a)
BAPIs and SMAPIs
b)
ABAP programs
c)
External commands (predefined by the system
administrator)
d)
External RFC steps
e)
External programs (direct command input by
system administrator)

29.

Which of the following is true of operation modes in SAP?
a)
manually.
b)
periodically.
c)
instances.

Productive operation modes may only be switched
Test operation modes may be switched manually or
Operation modes can be used to startup/shutdown SAP

d)
and times.
e)

31.

Communication between SAPGUI and SAP instance.
Communication between SAPlpd and SAP instance.
Communication between SAP central instance and
Communication between RFC interface programs
and SAP instance.

Average number of active SAPGUI connections.
SAP System Number (Instance ID).
Application Modules to be used (FI,MM,SD...).
Average number of active users.
SAP System Identifier (SAPSID).

How should you buffer a table that is frequently updated?.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)

35.

Communication between SAProuter and SAP

Which of the following can be selected during an ECC
installation with SAPINST?
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)

33.

Operation modes must be defined as either productive,
test, or demo.

Which of the following components can be secured when
Secure Network Communication (SNC) is used?
a)
instance.
b)
c)
d)
database.
e)

32.

Operation modes can be scheduled for specific dates

Single-record buffering
Generic buffering
No buffering
00% buffering
50% buffering

Which of the following statements is true for when the
processing of an Update task is interrupted?
a).
b)

c)

d)

The complete SAP System halts until the problem situation
is resolved
Interruption of V1 or V2 update tasks will cause a rollback
of the already executed database changes, a log entry is
made in the VBLOG, and no further V1 or V2 updates will be
made until the problem is resolved. An error message is sent
to the user.
Interruption of V1 tasks will cause a rollback of the already
executed database changes, a log entry is made in the
VBLOG, and no further V1 or V2 updates will be made until
the problem is resolved. An error message is sent to the user.
Interruption of V2 tasks will cause a rollback of the already
executed database changes, a log entry is made in the

e)

36.

Which table contains list of all client in SAP System.
a)
b)
c)
d)

37.

VBLOG, and no further V1 or V2 updates will be made until
the problem is resolved. An error message is sent to the user.
Interruption of V2 tasks will cause a rollback of the
already executed database changes, a log entry is
made in the VBLOG, and other V1 and V2 updates may
continue to be made. An error message is sent to the
user.

TCLIENT
T000
SCC4
SM30

Which of the following is true for remote client copy?
a)

Remote client copy can be used to copy repository objects
from on system to another
b)
Remote client copy can copy multiple clients
simultaneously.
c)
Remote client copy uses RFC to connect to source
system
d)
Up to three data files are created in transport directory
38.

Which of the following is result of releasing task?
a)
b)
c)
d)

39.

A development class/package is
a)
b)
changed.
c)
d)

40.

Client independent
To be assigned to an object when original object is
Assigned to a transport level
Defined by group of developers

Which of the following true for locally defined object?
a)
system.
b)
c)
systems.
d)

41.

A data file is created in transport directory and contains
objects recorded in change request.
Object list and documentation for the task is copied to the
change request
All objects recorded in task are locked.
You can no longer save changes to that task.

Local object are saved in the file system of development
Local objects can be transport to other systems.
Local objects cannot be transport to other
Customizing is save as a "local object".

Version history for all repository objects is result of which of
the following activities?

a)
b)
c)
released.
d)
released.
42.

The transport parameters for all SAP Central and Dialog
The database host for each of the systems in the system
The SAP Dialog instance startup parameters.
The location of the transport directory

Which of the following statements are correct in regard to the
Transport Management System (TMS)?
a)
b)
c)

d)

e)

44.

When a change request containing a repository object is

What is configured in the transport parameter file?
a)
instances.
b)
landscape.
c)
d)

43.

When the repository object is recorded to change request.
The import of change requests into an SAP System when
the transport parameter vers_at_imp is activated.
When a task containing a repository object is

For TMS to work, the user ID "TMSADM" must be explicitly
created in User Maintenance in each client of each SAP
System.
For TMS to work, the user ID "TMSADM" is
automatically set up on the Transport Domain
Controller in client 000.
To enable communication between SAP Systems
through Remote Function Call (RFC), for each SAP
System, TMS creates RFC destinations, which can be
displayed using Transaction SM59 (Display/Maintain
RFC Destinations).
To enable communication between SAP Systems through
Remote Function Call (RFC), for each SAP System and each
client, TMS creates RFC destinations, which can be displayed
using Transaction SM59 (Display/Maintain RFC Destinations).
During the configuration of the domain controller,
transport domain control data is written to the files
DOMAIN.CFG in the transport directory
"/usr/sap/trans/bin" or "<log. drive>:usrsaptransbin".

Which of the following statements are correct in regard to
cross system viewer and transaction SM30 (Table views) to
compare clients in SAP?
a)
Table contents can be compared between R/2 and
SAP ECC Systems.
b)
Table contents can be compared between different
clients in the same SAP System.
c)
Table contents can be compared between different
clients in different SAP Systems.

d)
e)

The contents of the same tables in different clients
can be automatically adjusted.
Table contents can only be compared directly on the
database level.

45.
Printing in SAP system is handled by TemSe and spool
components, which of the following is not true.
a)
b)
c)
d)

The TemSe stores the output request data.
The instance parameter ,rspo/store_location, determines
whether TemSe data is stored in the database or in operating
system file.
TemSe data is stored in the operating system file must be
backed up separately to the database data.
TemSe data is stored in the database backed up regularly
database backup are done.

46.
Name the SAP System transaction used for printing and spool
administration.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
47.

SM50
SM51
SPAD
SP01
SM37

Which of the following can cause an SAP Instance to not start,
or to start with an error message,
After you change SAP Parameters for memory management?
a)
The program buffer size specified in the parameter
abap/buffer_size exceeds the limit that exists due to
Address space restrictions.
b)
There is not enough physical memory to allow the new
setting
c)
The paging file is not large enough to allow the new
setting.
d)
The amount of SAP extended memory specified in the
parameter em/initial_size_MB exceeds the Limit that exists
due to address space restrictions.

48.

How should you configure dynamic user distribution?
a)
b)
c)
groups.
d)

49.

By setting the appropriate SAP profile parameter. For
example rdisp/wp_no_dia
By using transaction Sm04, User overview.
By using Transaction SMLG, maintain Logon
None above

What is high Roll wait time?
a)
problem.

A unique index for a GUI or RFC communication

b)
c)
d)
e)

A problem caused by an ineffective network between the
application and database level.
A unique index for RFC communication problem with SAP
or non-SAP system.
A unique index for a GUI communication problem,
for example, in the network between the
presentation server and the application server.
A unique index for a GUI or RFC communication problem.

50.
Which of the following can cause CPU bottleneck on the
database sever?
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)

External process that does not belong to the
database or an SAP instance is running on the
database server.
The SAP extended memory is configured too small.
Work processes that belong to an SAP instance
running on the database (For example, background or
update work processes) require CPU capacity
There are expensive SQL statements - for example
those that contribute 5% or more of the entire
database load in the Shared SQL Area.
The database buffers are set too small, so that data
must be continuously reloaded from the hard disks.

51.
Which of the following are necessary to achieve optimal
database performance?
a)
b)
c)
d)
52.

Table analyses (through a program such as Update
Statistics) must be regularly scheduled.
The database buffer must be sufficiently large.
You should regularly check whether expensive Sal
statements are unnecessarily occupying CPU and main
memory resources.
The database instance should be run only on a separate
computer with out SAP instances.

In local work process overview, the information displayed for a
particular work process over a considerable time period Is as
follows: running, sequential read, and a specific table name. What
does this tell you?
a)
b)
c)
d)

There may be an expensive SQL statement, which
accesses the table and can be analyzed more closely
in the database process display.
There may be an exclusive lock wait that you can detect in
the monitor for the expensive lock waits.
There may be a network problem between the
application server and database server.
There may be a wait situation in the dispatcher,
preventing a connection to the database. The
dispatcher queue should be analyzed more closely.

53) What can you find out using the Transaction profile in Tx ST03N
(More than one answer is correct)
a) The average dialog response time for each user
b) What Transactions are causing high loads on the database
c) What transactions cause the highest load with respect to
the total dialog response time
d) The index used for data access on data base level
e) What transactions are causing high wait times
54) Concerning the processing time, what are the recommendations of
SAP ( more than one answer is correct)
a) CPU time should always be higher that processing time
b) Processing time should not be higher than 2 times the CPU
time
c) Processing time should always be kept below 200 ms
d) Processing time should normally contribute about 40% to dialog
response times
e) Processing time should never be lowe that 45 % of the total dialog
response time
55.

Which of the following statement is correct with regards to
expensive SQL statements?
a)

They can lead to hardware bottleneck (CPU or I/O
bottleneck) and negatively affect the runtime of other
SQL statements.
b)
They can occupy a lot of space in the SAP table buffer and
displace objects, which cause unnecessary reload operations.
c)
They can occupy a lot of space in the data buffer of
the database; displace objects that are needed by
other SQL statements,
And negatively affect the runtime of the other SQL
statements.
d)
If they performed after database locks were set by
the same program, this can cause expensive lock wait
situations in the
Database, which can cause a brief system standstill.
e)
Expensive SQL statements in programs for reporting or in
background programs are not normally a problem for the
database.
56)

In the results of SQL trace, you find an SQL statement that has
a runtime of 1 second and select only 10 records.
Which of
the following could be the reason for the long runtime?
a)
b)
c)

Hardware bottleneck on Database server
There is a network problem between the
application server and the database server.
The database optimizer has created an inefficient
execution plan-For Example, by choosing an efficient
index.

d)
statement.
e)
f)
57)

There is no appropriate index for the SQL
There are exclusive lock waits in the database.
None

When buffering number range objects in main memory, which of
the following considerations should you keep in mind?
a)
b)

c)

d)

Since buffering occurs in all SAP instances, buffer
synchronization may cause some numbers to be assigned
twice.
Gaps occur in the number assignment when using
buffered number ranges. You must check whether
these gaps are permitted by business law and are
acceptable from a business viewpoint.
If the quantity of numbers in the buffer is too
small, performance problems will result, particularly
during mass data entry using Batch input or fast
Input.
Sufficient physical memory must be available, because
number range buffering consumes a good deal of memory.

58. Which of the following are correct?
a)
b)
c)
d)

e)

59.
trace?

The CPU Time is measured by the operating system of the
application server.
The database time is measured by the database system.
High network times for data transfers between the
presentation server and the application Server is reflected in
an increased response time in the Workload Monitor.
High network times for the data transfers between
the application server and the database server are
reflected in an increased response time in the
Workload monitor.
The roll out time is not a part of the response time
because the roll out of the user occurs only after the
answer has been sent to the presentation server.
Nevertheless, it is important for
The performance of the SAP system to keep the roll
time to a minimum, as during the rollouts, the SAP
work process remains occupied.

What should you have to consider when you perform an SQL
a)
b)
c)

There is only one trace file in each SAP system; therefore,
only one SQL trace can be performed at a time.
The user whose actions are being traced should not
run multiple programs concurrently.
You should perform the SQL trace on second
execution of a program because the relevant buffers
are already loaded.

d)

60.

SQL traces are useful on the database server, but not on
an application servers, which yield inexact results due to
network times.

When should you perform an ABAP trace?
a)
b)
c)
d)

61.

Which are the following factors are reasons for not activating
full buffering on a table?
a)
b)
c)
d)

62.

The table is very large.
The SQL statement that is used most frequently to access
the table contains the first two of five key fields in an EQUALS
condition.
The table is changed often.
All above

CUA uses the below Technology.
a)
b)
c)
d)

63.

If a problem occurs with the table buffer.
For programs with High CPU requirements.
For I/O problems with the hard disks.
All above

EDI
ALE
BAPI
None

CUA User Master Records

are maintained in

a) Local System
b) Central system
c) a & b with RFC connection
d) b only
64.
CUA

Transaction code to Set Distribution Parameters for Field for
a)
b)
c)
d)

SUIM
SCUM
SUUM
SCUG

65. Which Tocdes are used to protect Production Clients against
unauthorized system changes?
a)
b)
c)
d)

STMS and SE09
SCC4 and SE06
Both
None

66) SAP master component information contains information about all
SAP products and components. Customers can keep this information in
their local SLD up-to-date if they (please choose the best answer)
a)
b)
c)
d)

Install correct version of the SAP Web Application server
Connect their SLD to central SLD at SAP site and update their SLD
from there
Import the current updates of the master component
information downloadables on the SAP service market place.
Install current version of the SLD server.

67) Which of the software components listed below are components of
SAP Web AS? Choose the correct answer(s).
a) Java dispatcher
b) ABAP work processes
c) Message server
d) Internet Communication Manager
68) Which are the following statements are true
a) When starting an SAP system in which only Java instances are installed,
the database is started only after the Java instances have been started.
b) It is not possible under UNIX operating systems to stop individual
instances in the case of an SAP system with Java instances (without ABAP
instances).
c) The most important trace and log files are stored in the work
directory of each instance, that is, for example, under
/usr/sap/<SID>/DVEBMGS00/work.
d) The Startup and Control Framework consists of the processes message
server process and dispatchers processes
69) Which are the following statements are true
a) You can maintain parameter settings of a SAP Web AS Java with the
Visual administrator when no SAP Web AS Java instance has been started.
b) You can use the Config Tool to maintain Java VM parameters
for a SAP Web AS Java instance.
c) The parameters that are maintained with the Visual Administrator only
become active after the SAP Web AS Java has been restarted.
d) If you want to use the System Information tool, you need to install it
on your front end.
e) You can use the Config Tool to add additional server
processes to an SAP Web AS Java instance.
70) Which UME properties can you influence with parameters?
a) Number of failed logon attempts before a user is locked
b) E-mail notification if a user is locked by the administrator
c) Average length of the user name
d) Directory service data source: specification of the instance number
of the directory service
e) SAP Web AS ABAP data source: Specification of the SID

f) Passwords are automatically generated.
71) Which are the following statements are true
a) You can assign permissions directly to users in the UME console
b) The term J2EE security role is another name for a UME role.
c) You can lock users with the UME console.
d) UME is set by default during the installation of an SAPWeb
AS 6.40
72) Which actions are possible using the Visual Administrator in the
Monitoring service?
a) Changes to threshold values
b) Delete history values
c) Cross-system monitoring
d) Display monitoring data for Java instances

73) Which of the following steps do you need to perform when installing
an agent?
a) Start the SAP NetWeaver CCMS Agent Setup Tool
b) Create the CSMADMIN user
c) Create the CSMCONF file
d) Set up an RFC connection to the central monitoring system before
the installation
74) Which statements about the architecture and configuration of the
SAP NetWeaver Java Development Infrastructure are correct?
a) The System Landscape Directory (SLD), Design Time Repository (DTR),
Component Build Service (CBS), Change Management Service (CMS), and Name
Service must always be configured on the same SAP system.
b) SLD, CMS, CBS, and DTR can be installed on different SAP systems
c) If only the CMS is configured on an SAP system, you do not need to deploy the
entire JDI on this host.
d) If only the CMS is configured on an SAP system, you still need to
deploy the entire JDI on this host.
76) Which statements about the Design Time Repository (DTR) and the
Central Build Service (CBS) are correct?
a) The DTR consists of an active and an inactive workspace.
b) Checking development components into the DTR means that they can be
used by other developers.
c) Activating development components in the CBS means that they can
be used by other developers.
d) If the central build fails, the elements of the active workspace are placed in
the inactive workspace.
77) Which statements about transporting Java objects are correct?

a) When importing requests into the consolidation system, the
activation of the objects is automatically started.
b) As in the ABAP environment, only individual development objects and, in
general, not entire software components are imported into the production
system.
c) During the assembly step, only links to required software
components are created.
d) All required software components are included in the archive to be created
during the assembly step.
78) Which of the following traces are part of SAP Web AS Java?
a) Developer trace
b) Single Activity Trace
c) Application trace
d) System trace
e) Performance trace
f) SQLtrace
80) When installing SAP web application server add-in (Abap+java)
many users are created. What is the default name of the UME created
J2EE engine administration user when ABAP is used as Data source
a)
SAPJSF
b)
DDIC
c)
J2EE_admin
d)
SAPJAVA
1) What is the name of the alert log file for an Oracle database using a
system identifier (SID) of C11?
a) ora_log_C11.log
b) ora_log_C11.trc
c) alert_C11.log
d) alert_C11.trc
e) orasrv.log
2)

The brbackup tool can create a database backup when the
database is up and running or when it has been shutdown. During
an online database backup which of the following is TRUE?
a)
b)

Users must stop entering data but may continue working
using read-only transactions.
Users must stop working because their work would be
unrecoverable in case of problems with the backup.
Users may continue working without interruption.
Power-users may continue working but data-entry users

c)
d)
must log off.
e)
Users must log off until the online backup is started but
then may continue working.
3)

What is the name of the brbackup and brarchive
parameter file for an Oracle database used by an SAP Central
Instance with SAP System ID C11?

a)
b)
c)
d)
e)

initC11.ini
initC11.ora
initC11.sap
sapdba.ini
initC11.dba

4) What is the primary function of the $ORACLE_HOME/sapbackup
directory?
a) The sapbackup directory is used for database backups
which are written to disk.
b) The sapbackup directory is a work area for the SAP Instance
tasks.
c) The sapbackup directory is the temporary holding area for the
database transaction logs (redo logs) before they are
automatically written to tape.
d) The sapbackup directory holds the archived database log files.
e) The sapbackup directory is used by the SAP database utilities
during database reorganizations.
5)

What are the 3 different Oracle database startup modes?
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)

6)

Warm, cold, maintenance
Mount, nomount, open
Online, offline, utility
Level 1, level 2, level 3
Normal, restrict, utility

What is the purpose of the Oracle "OPS$connect" function?
a) OPS$connect authorization allows an operating system
user to connect to the database without being prompted
for a password.
b) OPS$connect is an Oracle command enabling whoever executes
it to administer the database without using sqldba.
c) OPS$connect is used in Oracle Parallel Server installations to
enable remote database connections over a LAN.
d) OPS$connect authorization is required of all database users and
is required for connection to the database.
e) OPS$connect enables the SAP System saposcol process to
communicate and exchange data with the database.

7)

What happens if a table wants to allocate another
extent but there is not enough contiguous free space in the
tablespace?

a) The extent is allocated in another tablespace.
b) The Oracle error message ORA-1653 is sent to the Syslog
file and to the ABAP/4 short dump.
c) The extent is distributed across the free space that is available.
d) Oracle dynamically reorganizes the tablespace to make all
available space contiguous.
e) The database switches into maintenance mode and sends a
system message to the database administrator.

8.
Your daily backups are performed with automatic tape
selection, no volume for backup is specified. Which tapes will be
accepted for backup (assuming the tape lock period is expired in all
cases.)
Note! More than one answer is correct. Please click on the buttons next
to the correct answers
A. any labeled tape
B. the tape labeled with the volume name you got from DB13,
Goto  Tapes needed.
C. A tape labeled with volume name scratch
D. Any unlabeled tape.
9.

The Oracle SGA comprises of
a)
b)
c)
d)

10.

log buffer
data buffer
shared pool
none

Rule based is chosen for
a)
b)
c)
d)

table with statistics
table without statistics
Secondary index analysis
none

11.
When using a tape device that supports hardware compression
which of the following statements is true ?
Note: There is more than one right answer! Click on the buttons next to the
right answers.
A. The tape_address and tape_address rew init<SID>.sap parameters are
automatically calculated based upon the value of the "compression"
parameter.
B. Drivers for hardware compression must be specified for the tape_address and
tape_address rew parameters in the init<SID>.sap file.

C. The compression ratio is calculated using "brbackup -k only"
immediately after installation and should be repeated at least once a
month to update compression ratios.
D. The compression ratio should be calculated using "brbackup -k only"
immediately after installation and never needs to be repeated.
E. The "compression" parameter should be set to "hardware" in the
init<SID>.sap file.
12.

brbackup determines the tapes from -----------tables.
a)
b)
c)
d)

13.

BAHSD&BADSD
none
SBDAH&SBDAH
SDBAH&SDBAD

What is the name of brbackup summary log file
a)
b
c)
d)

14.

Backup<SID>.log
back<SID>.log
brbackup<SID>.sap
none

If the tape is used more often the value set in
parameter--------------it generates a warning and can be used
a)
b)
c)
d)

15.

tape_count_<SID>
count_use_tape
count_tape_used
tape_use_count

How do we initialize new tapes , lock tapes,nonstop tapes
a)
b)
c)
d)

brbarchive –i show
brbackup -i force
backup –I force
none

16) Which of the following Oracle parameters should never be modified
in the file init<dbsid>.ora
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.

db_block_buffers
shared pool_size
db_name
db_block_size
row_cache_cursors

17) During the upgrade you encounter a serious problem and decide to
restore and recover the database until the time when you started the
upgrade which was Friday, 3:00 pm. The Last backup taken was an

offline backup taken on Thursday 8pm. Which is the correct recovery
scenario from BRRECOVER in this case
a) Perform a restore and recovery using the complete database recovery
scenario of BRRECOVER to recover the database until Friday 3pm
b) Perform a whole database reset using the offline backup taken on
Thruday 8PM then perform a manual recovery until Firday 3 pm
c) Perform a whole database reset using the offline backup taken on
Thursday 8 pm
d) Perform a restore and recovery using the point in time
recovery scenario of VRRECOVER to recover the database until
Friday 3pm
18) What Happens during shutdown of an Oracle database
a)

Shutting down the database with the immediate option requires an
instance recovery at the next database startup
b) When you shutdown the database with immediate option,
open transactions are rolled back before the database is shut
down
c) When you shutdown the database with the NORMAL option, the
database system disconnects all users before shutting down the
database
d) When you shutdown the database with the ABORT option, the SAP
system is shutdown too
e) When you shutdown the database with the NORMAL or
immediate option, the database system writes a checkpoint
before shutting down the database
19) of the following statements is true?
a) Data files can be mirrored by Oracle.
b) Online redo log files can be mirrored by Oracle.
c) Control files can be mirrored by Oracle.
d) Parameter files can be mirrored by Oracle.
20) Which users are standard Oracle users created by the Oracle
installer?
a) SYSTEM
b) SYS
c) SAP<SCHEMA-ID>
d) OPS$<HOSTNAME>/<SAPSID>ADM (Windows),
OPS$<SAPSID>ADM (UNIX)
e) SYSDBA

21) Which of the following tools does not have its own menus?
a) BRTOOLS
b) BRBACKUP
c) BRCONNECT
d) BRSPACE
e) BRRECOVER

22) The correct procedure to change the password of database user
SAP<SCHEMA-ID> is to use the Oracle command ALTER USER.
a) True
b) False
23) Which of the following is true?
a) Using RMAN, you can perform online and offline backups.
b) Using RMAN, you can perform complete, incremental, and
partial backups.
c) Using RMAN, you can perform whole and full backups.
d) You can perform incremental backups without using RMAN.
e) You can perform partial backups without using RMAN.
f) Before performing an incremental backup, a whole backup must be
performed.
25) Concerning backups, which of the following is true?
Choose the correct answer(s).
a) When a daily offline backup is performed, backup of offline redo log files is not
necessary.
b) When performing an incremental backup, an extra database block
verification does not need to be performed.
c) Performing a daily consistent online backup is a sufficient backup strategy; no
additional backups need to be performed.
d) An online backup also backs up the offline redo log files.
26) The BR*Tools profile init<DBSID>.sap is saved by:
a) BRBACKUP
b) BRARCHIVE
c) BRTOOLS
d) Not at all
27) For optimal monitoring of the Oracle database within the CCMS
alert
monitor, you must:
a) Maintain check conditions in table DBCHECKORA using
transaction DB17.
b) Schedule the database system check to run daily.
c) Maintain thresholds in the CCMS alert monitor itself.
d) Schedule report RSDBMON0 to run daily.
28) The rows in a table a sorted by the primary key
a) True
b) False
29) Which of the following rules are basic rules of secondary index
design?
a) Include as much fields as possible
b) Include only selective fields
c) Create as few indexes per table as possible
d) Create as much indexes per table as possible

30) The SAP recommended update statistics strategy contains the
following
a) watch and hide log entries
b) monitoring and evaluation of table accesses
c) scanning and compiling indexes
d) check and update statistics
e) write to file and delete old table entries
31) The main purpose of database statistics is ...
a) to count read accesses.
b) its use by the cost based optimizer.
c) to filter data.
d) ease database backups.
32) Which of the following parameters influence the behavior of the
Oracle cost based optimizer?
a) TUNE_OPTIMIZER
b) OPTIMIZER_MODE
c) CBO_ULTRA_WARP
d) DB_FILE_MULTIBLOCK_READ_COUNT
e) dbs/ora/use_hints

33) What happens if a table wants to allocate another extent but there is
not enough contiguous free space in the tablespace? Click on the button
next to the right answer.
A.
B.
C.
D.

Please click on the button next to the correct answer.
The extent is allocated in another tablespace.
The extent is distributed across the free space that is available.
The Oracle error message ORA 1653 is sent to the file SYSLOG and
to the ABAP short dump.
E. Oracle dynamically reorganizes the tablespace to make all available space
contiguous.
The database switches into maintenance mode and sends a system message to
the database administrator
34 - Which Oracle component dynamically maintains information about the
status of the database redo logs, database mode, names and paths of
database files, and is essential during a database recovery?
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

The Oracle parameter file, init<SID>.ora.
Each tablespace data file contains this data for the whole database.
The Oracle control file, cntrl<SID>.dbf.
The SGA definition file, sgadef<SID>.def.
The sapdba parameter file, init<SID>.dba.

35 - An Instance error occurs when 1 or more Oracle background processes
become corrupted. What actions should the database administrator take to
correct the problem?
A. This is a serious error. Call the Oracle hotline.
B. Shutdown the operating system and reinstall the Oracle software.
C. Shutdown abort and startup open. The SMON process will use the
current redo log files and checkpoint information from the control
files to execute an automatic instance recovery upon database
startup.
D. Shutdown the operating system and turn all hardware off. After the hardware
cools off start everything up again and execute Orainst using the repair
option.
E. Restore all missing files, apply the offline redo logs, update the control files,
and execute the startup open command.
36 - Which files must be restored from tape to allow a full database restore
and recovery ?
Database control file, tablespace data files, and the database alert log.
A. Tablespace data files, database control file, and all archived
database transaction logs created since the last full backup.
B. $ORACLE_HOME, Oracle parameter file, tablespace data files.
C. Database control file, tablespace data files, R/3 Syslog, R/3 Transport
directory.
D. Oracle parameter file, tablespace data files, and the Oracle control file.
37 - The R/3 System Oracle database has 4 online redo logs, also known as
database transaction logs. Each online redo log has a mirrored copy. What
is the effect of a log file switch?
A. The current online redo log gets copied to its mirrored copy, upon completion
the next online redo log becomes open for writing.
B. The database alternates between writing to the online and offline redo log
files.
C. The database switches between writing to the original redo log files and the
mirrored redo log files.
D. The current R/3 Syslog file gets copied to the saparch directory and a new
Syslog file is created.
E. The current online redo log gets closed and the next online redo log
gets opened for writing. The ARCH process gets triggered to begin
backing up the recently closed redo log.
38 - Which statement is true of online Oracle database backups ?
A. Users may only read data and may not enter data until after the backup is
done.

B. Database transaction logs (online redo logs) are not written during online
backups.
C. The tablespace data files and control file comprise the complete online
backup and are all that is necessary for restoring the database to a consistent
status.
D. The database must be running in archivelog mode.
E. Online database backups are not supported by Oracle.

39 - Which of the following configurations would have the slightest
impact upon data security and/or performance?
A. Operating system swap and Oracle tablespace data files installed on the
same physical disk(s).
B. Operating system swap and Oracle database transaction logs (redo logs)
installed on the same disk(s).
C. Operating system swap and the /usr/sap directory on the same physical
disk(s).
D. Oracle database archived log files (offline redo logs) accessed over a shared
(or NFS) directory connection.

40 - The physical separation of database logs from their mirror copies
means?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A.
B.
C.
D.

Using physically separate partitions of a physical disk.
Using physically separate disks.
Using physically separate disks in the same logical device group.
Using generic database utilities to split the flow of data between randomly
chosen operating system directories.
E. Use of database specific utilities to fork log backups to 2 physically separate
backup media.

TADM51
SGA
Every time an Oracle instance is started, a shared memory region called the
System Global Area (SGA) is allocated. The SGA allocated by an Oracle
instance can only be accessed by the processes of this instance. This means
that each instance has its own SGA. The SGA contains copies of data and
control information for the corresponding Oracle instance. When the instance
is stopped, the SGA is deallocated.
After an Oracle instance is started, a special process, the Listener allows the
database

clients and the instance to communicate with each other.
Note: The listener process is not part of an Oracle instance; it is part of
networking processes that work with Oracle.
Databases are stored in data files on disks. To accelerate read and write access
to data,
it is cached in the database buffer cache in the SGA. .
The size of an Oracle data block can generally be chosen during the creation of a
database. In SAP installations, however, the block size is always 8 KB.

Examples of instance parameters:
. DB_CACHE_SIZE specifies the size of the buffer pool.
. LOG_BUFFER specifies the amount of memory that Oracle uses when buffering
redo entries.
. LOG_ARCHIVE_START=TRUE specifies that the archive is started
automatically.
. CONTROL_FILES specifies one or more names of control files.
1. The system global area consists of the database buffer, the redo log buffer,
and the shared pool
2. Which of the following statements is true?





A Data files can be mirrored by Oracle.
B Online redo log files can be mirrored by Oracle.
C Control files can be mirrored by Oracle.
D Parameter files can be mirrored by Oracle.

3. For minimal security of an Oracle database:






A The database must be installed on a cluster.
B The online redo log files must be mirrored.
C Online redo log files and data files must reside on different disks.
D Archiving must be turned on.
E Offline redo log files and data files must reside on different disks.

4. Which files are stored in directory %ORACLE_HOME%database (on
Windows), and $ORACLE_HOME/dbs (on UNIX)?







A Control files
B Oracle profiles
C BR*Tools profiles
D Oracle trace and log files
E BR*Tools log files

5. Which users are standard Oracle users created by the Oracle
installer?
□ A SYSTEM
□ B SYS
□ C SAP<SCHEMA-ID>
□ D OPS$<HOSTNAME>/<SAPSID>ADM (Windows),
OPS$<SAPSID>ADM (UNIX)
□ E SYSDBA
6. Which users are standard Oracle users created by the SAP
installation tool?
□ A SYSTEM
□ B SYS
□ C SAP<SCHEMA-ID>
□ D OPS$<HOSTNAME>/<SAPSID>ADM (Windows),
OPS$<SAPSID>ADM (UNIX)
□ E SYSDBA
7. The correct procedure to change the password of database user
SAP<SCHEMA-ID> is to use the Oracle command ALTER USER.
□ True
□ False
8. The Oracle tool to test the connection to the listener is called TNSPING. To
test
the connection to the database with SID C11 on host twdf0505, enter tnsping
C11 at the operating system level. If you detect that the listener is not running
on the database server, you can use the command lsnrctl start on Windows
and
UNIX to start the listener.Fill in the blanks to complete the sentence.
9. Which of the following tools does not have its own menus?






A BRTOOLS
B BRBACKUP
C BRCONNECT
D BRSPACE
E BRRECOVER

10. Because the interactive programs of BR*Tools provide their own
menus, they
cannot be called from BRTOOLS or BRGUI.
□ True
□ False
All functional programs can be called from BRTOOLS or BRGUI.

11. If you know the correct SQL command, we recommend that you call
this
command (for example, as seen in BR*Tools) from SQLPLUS to perform
changes to the database.
□ True
□ False
12. All recommended regular activities for checks, housekeeping and
backups can
be scheduled in the DBA Planing Calendar (transaction DB13)
□ True
□ False
13. After creating the server profile from init<DBSID>.ora, you can
change Oracle
profile parameters in both the server profile and init<DBSID>.ora.
□ True
□ False
Changes are only allowed in the server profile, preferably through BR*Tools, as
init<DBSID>.ora is regularly recreated from the server profile.
14. When using the server parameter file
□ A After changing parameters with scope BOTH, the database must
be restarted.
□ B After changing parameters with scope MEMORYT, the database
must be restarted.
□ C After changing parameters with scope SPFILE, the database must
be restarted.
□ D With scope MEMORY, the previous parameter value is used after
restart of the database instance.
15. When stopping the database using shutdown mode abort, instance
processes are stopped immediately and no rollback of open transactions is
performed during the shutdown.
16. Which of the following shutdown modes leaves the database in a
consistent state?





A NORMAL
B TRANSACTIONAL
C IMMEDIATE
D ABORT

17. The Oracle alert log file is located in directory $SAPDATA_HOME/saptrace/background.
1. You lost data files and offline redo log files on a disk crash, because they were
on the same disk. Complete recovery is possible anyway, because you perform a
backup of the offline redologs with BRARCHIVE twice per day.
□ True
□ False

The chance that you lost offline redo log files not yet backed up is high. In this
case, complete recovery is not possible.
2. Assuming a full database backup and all offline redo log files would fit on one
tape, you would need at least one tape to backup the database plus offline
redo log files
3. Which of the following is true?
□ A Using RMAN, you can perform online and offline backups.
□ B Using RMAN, you can perform complete, incremental, and partial
backups.
□ C Using RMAN, you can perform whole and full backups.
□ D You can perform incremental backups without using RMAN.
□ E You can perform partial backups without using RMAN.
□ F Before performing an incremental backup, a whole backup must
be performed.
4. Before performing an incremental backup, a level 0 must be performed first. A
backup of this type is called a full backup.
Fill in the blanks to complete the sentence.

5. For complete recovery using the latest full and incremental backup,
offline
redo log files are not necessary.
□ True
□ False
6. Concerning backups, which of the following is true?
□ A When a daily offline backup is performed, backup of offline redo
log files is not necessary.
□ B When performing an incremental backup, an extra database block
verification does not need to be performed.
□ C Performing a daily consistent online backup is a sufficient backup
strategy; no additional backups need to be performed.
□ D An online backup also backs up the offline redo log files.
7. On a full backup, the database itself, including the Oracle software
directories,
are backed up.
□ True
□ False
8. When starting a backup directly from the command line using
BRBACKUP, the
result and logs are also shown in transaction DB14.
□ True
□ False
9. The BR*Tools profile init<DBSID>.sap is saved by:






A BRBACKUP
B BRARCHIVE
C BRTOOLS
D Not at all

10. An offline redo log file was backed up once by BRARCHIVE. The log filenow
has the status SAVED.
11. To perform a complete database reset, you need which of the
following backups?





A Complete offline backup
B Complete online backup
C Consistent online backup
D Backup of offline redo log files

12. When you loose a disk, you can recover the database using the Complete
database recovery scenario.
13. You have a serious problem during an upgrade and decide to restore and
recover the database to the state before the upgrade, that is, to the state after
the SAP system was last shut down, and no other live activities were being
run. As your latest backup was performed the evening before, you choose
the database
point-in-time recovery scenario.
14. An operating system administrator accidently deleted a data file. To recover
the
database, you chose the Complete database recover scenario.
To switch from manual to automatic undo management, the following
steps generally
have to be performed:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Create the new undo tablespace PSAPUNDO.
Change or insert the four new Oracle parameters with appropriate values.
Drop all rollback segments (except the SYSTEM rollback segment).
Delete (or comment out) the Oracle parameter rollback_segments.
Drop the rollback tablespace.

1. Your database is expected to grow to 300 GB. A good size for data files in
this case is 4 GB.
2. Oracle stores its data in tablespaces. A tablespace consists of one or more
. A segment (for example, a table or an index) allocates space
within a tablespace using one or more .
3. For optimal monitoring of the Oracle database within the CCMS alert
monitor,
you must:
□ A Maintain check conditions in table DBCHECKORA using transaction
DB17.

□ B Schedule the database system check to run daily.
□ C Maintain thresholds in the CCMS alert monitor itself.
□ D Schedule report RSDBMON0 to run daily.

Database Support without ABAP Schema
As of SAP Web Application Server Java 6.40 SR 1, the tables SDBAH and SDBAD
are created in the Java database schema (SAP<Schema-ID>DB) as standard.
This
completes the requirements for using BR*Tools for pure Java databases (without
ABAP schema), which means you can save and restore Java databases with the
BR*Tools.
Hint: The problem can also be solved without performing a recovery, which
can take a long time depending on the database activity and the duration of the
tablespace being in backup mode. To avoid a long recovery, use SQL*Plus
and startup the database into mount state. Then execute the
command ALTER
DATABASE END BACKUP and open the database.
database
An Oracle database is a collection of data, logically treated as a unit. Physically,
the data is stored in one or more data files on disks.
Oracle manages database data in logical units called tablespaces. A database
object, such as a table, is always created in a particular tablespace. A tablespace
consists of one or more data files.
instance
Because the database is only a passive part of a database server, some
processes
and memory structures are needed to access the data and manage the
database.
The combination of Oracle (background) processes and memory buffers is called
an Oracle instance.
Every running Oracle database is associated with an Oracle instance. Moreover,
every Oracle database needs its own instance.
SGA
Every time an Oracle instance is started, a shared memory region called the
System Global Area (SGA) is allocated. The SGA allocated by an Oracle
instance can only be accessed by the processes of this instance. This means that
each instance has its own SGA. The SGA contains copies of data and control
information for the corresponding Oracle instance. When an instance shuts
down, it deallocates the SGA.
processes
Every time an Oracle instance is started, Oracle background processes are
started. When an instance shuts down, the processes are stopped.
SGA: The size is determined indirectly from the size of the contained memory
areas.
. Buffer pool: DB_BLOCK_BUFFERS (unit: blocks) or DB_CACHE_SIZE
when you use the dynamic SGA
. Shared pool: SHARED_POOL_SIZE

.
.
.
.

Java pool: JAVA_POOL_SIZE
Large pool: LARGE_POOL_SIZE
Streams pool (Oracle 10g or later): STREAMS_POOL_SIZE
Redo buffer: LOG_BUFFER

In addition, in the context of the dynamic SGA , you can define parameter
SGA_MAX_SIZE, which sets an upper limit for the total size of the SGA. In
general, you can only increase the size of parameters, such as DB_CACHE_SIZE
or SHARED_POOL_SIZE, up to the size defined by SGA_MAX_SIZE.
1. Which memory areas are part of the Oracle System Global Area?
□ A Redobuffer
□ B Sort cache
□ C Datacache
□ D SharedSQLarea
2. Which parameters chan be changed dynamically when using dynamic
System
Global Area?






A SGA_MAX_SIZE
B DB_CACHE_SIZE
C DB_BLOCK_BUFFERS
D SHARED_POOL_SIZE
E BLOCK_SIZE

3. The shared SQL area is a memory structure that contains the parsed
SQL
statements and execution plans.
□ True
□ False
4. Which of the following parameters are used to activate automatic
Program
Global Area?





A PGA_AUTO_ENABLE
B WORKAREA_SIZE_POLICY
C PGA_AGGREGATE_TARGET
D PGA_AREA_SIZE

1. Which of the following statements is correct?
□ A The new database monitor makes database backups obsolete.
□ B Transaction ST04N provides access to Oracle performance views
V$ and DBA.
□ C The new database monitor automatically optimizes SQL statements.
□ D ST04N only supports Oracle databases.
1. Which of the following wait events are busy wait situations?
□ A CPU used by this session
□ B log file sync
□ C db file sequential read

□ D SQL*Net message from client
2. Which of the following wait events may be caused by full table scans?





A enqueue
B log file parallel write
C db file scattered read
D log buffer space

Expensive SQL Statements: Important Questions and Where to Find the
Answers in SAP Systems
Question Where to find the answer
1. Which reports/transactions contain expensive
selects?
SM50/SM66, ST03, STAD

2. Which table is accessed expensively? SM50/SM66, ST04/DBACOCKPIT
3. Which index is used for the access? ST04/DBACOCKPIT, ST05
4. Which WHERE clause is being used? ST04/DBACOCKPIT, ST05,
SM50
5. Which statement is worth tuning? ST03, ST04/DBACOCKPIT
Note: Please also consider sorting for the following criteria:
1. Buffer gets/execution
Considers rarely called, but extremely expensive, statements (typically
batch jobs)
2. Disk reads
Expensive statements concerning I/O performance
3. Buffer gets/record
Expensive statements for database and application server performance
1. Which of the following data sources are supported by the UME:





A Database
B Filesystem
C ABAP User Management
D Directory service

2. What is the purpose of the data partitioning of the UME?
Answer: The data partitioning allows a distribution of the users or user
attributes
to different data sources.
3. You can lock users with the UME console.
□ True

□ False
4. You can assign permissions directly to users in the UME
Administration Console.
□ True
□ False
5. The term J2EE security role is another name for a UME role.
□ True
□ False
A J2EE security role is part of the J2EE standard and is used for a declarative
authorization check. A UME role is an (SAP) extension to the J2EE standard
and is used for a programmable authorization check.
6. If the emergency user (SAP*) is activated, the administration user
(Administrator,
J2EE_ADMIN or J2EE_ADMIN_<SID>) can also log onto AS Java.
□ True
□ False
If the emergency user SAP* is activated then no other users can log onto AS Java.
#!certi
;
=====================================================
==== short summary
; File should start with #!certi
;
; Starting letter determines type of line:
; ; = Remark
; T = Title
; T = Timelimit in minutes (default to 120 mins)
;
; # = sectionname
; M = maximum questions in section (default all questions)
;
; q = question
;

Each question can have following type of answers:

;

- = false answer (false and true possible)

;

+ = true answer (false and true possible)

;

Or:

;

o = radiobutton (false)

;

x = radiobutton (true)

;
=====================================================
===================
T TADMD5 delta
T 88
; ========================================== section

# SAP Web AS 6.40 Java Supportability and Security

Which of the following statements are correct regarding the UME authorization
concept?
- UME permissions are defined by an administrator
+ UME roles can be assigned using the Visual Administrator
+ ABAP roles can be used as groups in UME
+ UME actions are directly assigned to roles

Logs and traces are important information sources, especially in the Java world.
But what are the differences between logs and traces?
- Logs contain normal events, whereas traces contain exceptional events.
+ Logging is switched on during normal operation.
- By default traces are written in separate files.
+ Log messages are also visible in the corresponding trace.

The main administration too for Java administration is the Visual Administrator. It
displays all services for administering and monitoring in a tree-based structure.
Which of the following services are crucial for daily monitoring purposes?
- Administration adapter service
+ LogViewer service
+ Monitoring service
- Basic administration service
- Monitor server service

The Logging API introduces two types of messages - logs and traces.
Which of the following descriptions are true for traces?
- During a normal operation traces are usually turned off, or are set to an Error
severity level.
- Traces are mainly addressed to an administrator of a customer system.
+ Traces are used for understanding the program execution path and
the internal status of a system component of an application
- Traces write all significant events that occur on a cluster node of the Java
Cluster.
+ According to the logging API traces are written to categories.

Java monitoring in SAP Web AS Java is designed to take advantage of the SAP
CCMS Monitoring Architecture. Most off the data written by the monitoring
functions of the SAP Web AS Java can be easily transferred to the CCMS.
However, there is data that is written by the SAP Web AS Java, but can only be
viewed in the CCMS.
Which are this data?
- Application Trace data
- Performance Trace data
- Single Activity Trace data
+ Distributed Statistical Records data.
+ JARM data

For administrators it is crucial to periodically check the availability of the
landscape components. SAP offers an automatism called Generic Request and
Message Generator (GRMG) to check especially the availability of Java
components. Which of the statements below is correct? GRMG ...
O ...is an SNMP-based protocol to check the Javacomponent availability

O ...is a periodic ping on operatingsystem level to check the availability of the
Java component
O ...uses RFC protocol to call the Java component
X ...uses HTTP/HTTPS to exchange XML-based monitoring data

Efficient system monitoring becomes key at customer site to run an IT
infrastructure with low TCO (Total cost of Ownership). With SAP Netweaver, SAP
delivers a lot of tools and functionality for efficient monitoring. Which for the
following statements are correct?
- The CCMS agent is a piece of Java software running in an SAP Web AS Java.
+ Using the CCMS monitoring infrastructure, the SAP Web AS ABAP and
Java can be monitored centrally. That saves time.
- Using the System Landscape Directory SLD, the SAP Web AS ABAP and Java can
be monitored centrally. That saves time.
+ Using distributed and statistics records, the SAP Web AS ABAP and
Java can be monitored centrally. That saves time.

What should you do if the system shows a slow performance
o Use the Application Tracing to start all deployed Java application in modified
mode to collect detailed method-level performance information from them.
o Activate the Performance Trace for all the components and try to find where
bad results appear.
o Activate Session trace on each running application to see which of them causes
the problem
x Use the Distributed Statistics to systematically go through the data
generated for the last several hours and try to find the components,
actions, or users that cause the problem.

Which type of User Stores can be used on SAP Web AS Java?
- Web Services
+ LDAP directory
+ UDDI
+ UME

Which of the following statements are correct regarding the UME authorization
concept?

+ ABAP roles can be used as groups in UME.
+ UME roles can be assigned using the Visual Administrator.
+ UME actions are directly assigned to roles.
- UME permissions are defined by an administrator.

The integrated Log Viewer is presented as a service of the SAP Web AS Java. It
provides a runtime control for working with log messages. Which of the following
are true for the Integrated Log Viewer?
o Log Viewer is the right tool for setting and modifying Severity levels
x The Integrated Log Viewer merges logs within one SAP Web AS Java
instance.
o The Integrated Log Viewer provides options for log and trace configuration. You
can add new locations and categories and change the configuration of the
existing ones.
The monitoring functionality of an SAP Web AS Java 6.40 has been greatly
improved. Which of the following functionalities can be used in a pure SAP Web
AS Java 6.40 environment.
- Multiple activity log.
- Notification in case of a CCMS alert.
+ State Monitoring.
- Display of aggregated distributed statistics records.
+ SQL Trace.

How can UME user management be integrated in an existing landscape?
- The SAP Web AS Java database can not be used for user management, even if
access to the SAP Web AS ABAP systems is not required.
+ If a central user administration (CUA) is present, an CUA child system
can be used for UME persistence.
- A stand-alone SAP Web ABAP can not be used for UME persistence.
+ if a central LDAP directory is present, it can be used for UME
persistence.
+ A stand-alone SAP Web AS ABAP can be used for UME persistence.

What would you do if you receive a customer complain that his / her SAP Web AS
Java has crashed?

o I will ask the customer to install a Central Log Viewer on his computer and try
to find the problem browsing the logs.
o I will ask him to send me via e-mail the logs and traces from his / her ./log
directory so that I can have a look at them.
o I will schedule a Net meeting and try to browse through the customer logs and
traces to find the problem.
x I will ask the customer to start a Remote Server on his host and I will
then connect to his Remote Server with my Central Log Viewer and try
to find the problem.

# Delta SAP Web AS 6.20 - 6.40 Core Features

Which kernel parameter is responsible for enabling/disabling the integrated ITS?
x itsp/enable
o em/global_Area_MB
o itsp/memory_check
o em/address_space_MB

Which technologies does SAP Web AS 6.40 fully support?
x ABAP, Java and Java 2 Enterprise Edition (J2EE)
o The proven ABAP technology and the internet-driven .NET Technology.
o Only ABAP technology.

The SAP Web Application Server Java uses central services (SCS) such as a
message service and enqueue service during communication. The SCS requires
an instance an instance number during installation. Which of the following is
correct regarding the SCS instance number?
o It must be a value from 00 to 3600, the number must be unique on the
installation host
x It must be a value from 00 to 97, the number must be unique on the
installation host.
o It must be a value from 00 to 97 and identical to the instance number for the
SAP Web Application Server ABAP system.
o It is always 00. If 00 is already used on the installation host then a different
installation host must be used.

The SAP Java Development Infrastructure (JDI) brings the powerful SAP software
logistics concept to the java world. Which of the following statements regarding
the JDI are correct?
- The Software Logistics for Java is still not fully integrated with the SAP Web AS
6.40 and the java developers and system administrators have to do the transport
and the landscape configurations manually.
+ The Design Time Repository (DTR) is a repository for central storage.
It provides versioning and management of development objects and
other resources.

- The SAP Netweaver Developer Studio is not integrated into the development
infrastructure. Hence the developers must use a Software Delivery Manager
(SDM) to deploy their applications to the test server
+ The Component Build Service (CBS) passes on the results of the
successful build process of the project to the test system.

Which statements are correct when talking for the open standards in the SAP
Web AS?
+ SAP Netweaver Developer Studio is based on the Open Source Eclipse
framework.
- SAP Web AS is J2EE compliant, but the enterprise presentation layer is
represented only with the Web Dynpro UI framework.
+ SAP Web AS 6.40 is fully Java 2 Enterprise Edition (J2EE) 1.3
compliant.
- SAP is not member of the Java Community Process (JCP), because SAP does not
want to share its application server know-how with other members.

The SAP Web AS 6.40 consists of 2 application stacks ABAP and Java/J2EE. Which
of the following statements regarding the database and the database schema of
the Web AS are correct?
- The SAP Web AS 6.40 is only possible to be installed on 2 different physical
databases - one for the ABAP and one for the Java stack
+ Database transactions spanning between ABAP and Java stacks are
not allowed.
- The ABAP stack and the Java stack are using one and the same database
schema.
- SAP Web AS allows direct table access across ABAP and Java stacks
+ The ABAP stack and the Java stack can share one database
- Database transactions spanning between ABAP and Java stacks are allowed.

When installing a SAP Web Application Server ADD-In (ABAP+Java) many users
are created. What is the default name of the UME created J2EE engine
administration user when ABAP is used as Data Source?
o SAPJSF
x J2EE_ADMIN
o DDIC
o SAPJAVA

Which service parameters are obsolete when integrated ITS is used and will
therefore be ignored?
x SAP system parameters (e.g. ~messageserver, ~systemNumber)
o Logon parameters (e.g. ~client, ~language, ~login, ~password)
o Layout parameters (e.g. ~designs, ~flickerfree).
o Application parameters (e.g. ~transaction, ~theme, ~style).

Before you can test an ITS service using the integrated ITS
- ...the ICF service must be deleted in the transaction SICF
- ...the service must be renamed to sap-<servicename>
- ...the service file must be published to site INTERNAL.
+ ...the complete service must be published to site INTERNAL
+ ...the ICF service must be activated in transaction SICF

What kind of applications run using the integrated ITS functionality?
o Applications based on WebRFC.
x Dynpro-based applications.
o Applications using ITS Flow Logic.
o Applications based on WebReporting.

The SAP Web Application Server is the complete infrastructure to develop, deploy
and run ...
+ ...some SAP NetWeaver components.
- ...only some SAP Netweaver components.

+ ...mySAP Business Suite.
+ ...Java 2 Enterprise Edition (J2EE) compliant applications.
- ...only SAP-developed applications.

Which parameters affect the size of shared memory consumption of integrated
ITS?
- Trace level
+ Browser type
- Session time
- Client
+ Logon language

The SAP Web Applications Server 6.40 now contains a Java stack. Which of the
following is a correct statement about the installation of the SAP Web AS Java?
o it is installed in the same schema and same database as the SAP Web
Application Server ABAP server
x it uses a separate schema in the same database as the SAP Web
Application Server ABAP server
o it is always installed in a separate database from the SAP Web Application
Server ABAP server
o it is installed in the file system

The default path of ICF services for usage with integrated ITS functionality is:
o default_host - sap - public - its - <servicename>
o default_host - sap - bc - its - <servicename>
o default_host - sap - bc - bsp - its - <servicename>
x default_host - sap - bc - gui - sap - its - <servicename>

In a SAP Web Application Server Add-in (ABAP+Java) installation, how are
patches for the SAP Web AS Java applied?
o In the ABAP system using transaction code SPAM.
x The patch files are applied with the SAP installation tool SAPinst.
o In the ABAP system using transaction code SAINT.
o The patch files are copied directly into the system, overwriting the previous
files.

# SAP Web AS Java Administration

For patching an (add-in) instance of SAP Web AS Java you need to provide the
following input:
- The password of the user j2ee_adm
- The storing location of the (ABAP) instance profile corresponding to the instance
to be patched.
+ The password of the user <sapsid>adm.
+ The storing locations of the (Java) instance profile corresponding to
the instance to be patched.
- The password of the user sdm.

Which of the following are the correct statements related to the connectivity
between the SAP Web Dispatcher and the Message Server ?
+ The communication protocol between the Web Dispatcher and the
Message Server is HTTP.
+ The SAP Web Dispatcher connects to the Message Server to get
information about the load and application running in each node.
- the communication protocol between the Web Dispatcher and the Message
Server is the DIAG protocol used also in the SAPGUI
- The SAP Web Dispatcher substitutes the Message Server for the SAP GUI
access.

Which method you need to use to add a new Java instance to your SAP system?
x SAPinst, installation configuration
o Shell Console Administrator, ADD command
o Config tool, "Add new instance" button

Which tool is used to add a new server node to an existing SAP Web AS Java
instance?
o Visual Administrator
o SAPinst
o A new node can not be added to an existing SAP Web AS JAva instance. Nodes
are created only during installation.
x Config Tool

The startup and control framework of the SAP Web AS 6.40 has different
programs to control and to monitor the processes. Which of the following refer to
the JCMon process? JCMon...
+ ..implements a local and cluster administration menu for local and
remote instance operations
- ..is the process which starts all SAP Web AS Java processes
+ ..is a Java instance monitor program with commandline interface
which support all operating systems.
- ..represents the monitoring API between the SAP Web AS Java and the CCMS
monitoring interface.

How many concurrent connections are accepted by an SDM server
o One for each type of interface (GUI, commandline or Java API)
o There is no limit but the hardware limits.
x Only one connection is allowed at certain time.
o Only one GUI connection is allowed, but there is no limit for the command line
interface or the Java API.
What action should be taken so that a change in the Java Virtual Machine (JVM)
settings done with the Config Tool, can take effect?
o Launch the instance Bootstrap process with the Config Tool
x Restart the system so that the node Bootstrap process can read the
new settings
o Backup the system.
o Launch the node Bootstrap process with the Config Tool.

The Web AS Java is using the Java startup and control framework to start and
stop. Which statements are correct in respect to the Java startup and control
framework?
+ In a SAP Web Java Add-in installation, the ICM monitoring can be used
to start and stop the SAP Web AS Java.
+ The Java startup framework can be used to monitor the Java
processes.
- The Java startup and control framework doesn't support stopping Java
processes under Unix and Unix flavours. To stop the Java Engine running under
Unix and other Unix flavours the administrator has simply to kill the
corresponding processes,
+ On Windows operations systems the SAP Management console can be
used to start/stop and monitor the WEB AS Java (only).

Which of these tools are SAP Web AS JAva administration tools?
- Netweaver Developer Studio
+ Visual Administrator
+ Config Tool
- SAPinst

Which of the following statements should be considered when using the Offline
Configuration Editor?
+ High risk of corrupting the system if Configuration Editor used
without deep administration knowledge
- Offline Configuration Editor needs a Java Virtual Machine (JVM) 1.5.x to run.
+ The SAP Web AS Java has to be offline.
- The corresponding DB must be offline.

Does SAP Web Dispatcher needs a Database in the Demilitarize Zone (DMZ) to
run ?
x The Web Dispatcher doesn't require a Database
o Yes, because the Web Dispatcher is not able to connect to a Database behind a
firewall.
o The Web dispatcher can use the WEB AS Database.

Which of the branches of the config tool shown in the picture should be
expanded in order to update the Java Virtual Machine (JVM) settings of all server
nodes?
o server_ID5648550
o Global dispatcher configuration
o Global server configuration
x instance_ID56485

The SAP Web Dispatcher is a software web switch that is the entry point for
HTTP(s) requests into a system, which consists of one or more Web application
servers. Which service must be active in the HTTP Service Tredd (transaction
SICF) for the Web Dispatcher to operate properly?
o /sap/public/icf_check
x /sap/public/icman
o /sap/bc/icf
o /sap/public/bc/its

Which of the following statements regarding the (Java) message server are
correct ? The Message Server ...
+ ..keeps a list of all Java processes of the cluster
- ..synchronizes data across the cluster
+ ..supplies information to the SAP Web Dispatcher about load
balancing between many java instances
- ..is a brand new coding especially invented for the SAP Web AS 6.40
- ..is not a critical component of SAP Web AS system and it can be kept stopped
when is not in use.

Which of the following are features of the Visual Administrator?
+ Accessing Local and Global properties of SAP Web AS Java Services
and Managers.
+ Runtime administration of SAP Web AS Java Services and Managers.
- Creating new instances of SAP Web AS Java.
- Creating new nodes of an existing SAP Web AS Java instance.

Concerning the template configuration tool, which of the following statements
are correct?
- The Template Configuration Tool is used to monitor the configured properties of
the SAP Web AS java instances.

+ The Template Configuration Tool is a local instance sizing tool
- The Template Configuration Tool is a new tool which replaces the old Web AS
6.20 Config Tool.
+ The usage of the Template Configuration Tool reduces the time for tuning and
sizing the SAP Web AS Java installation.

The SAP Web Dispatcher is a software Web switch that can be used to distribute
internet requests in a SAP Web Application Server system. How is the Web
Dispatcher run ?
o It is a program that is installed and configured in the RFC Destinations
(transaction SM59)
o It is a service that is activated in the HTTP service tree (transaction SICF)
o It is a part of the Basis layer and is controlled through Instance profile
parameters
x It is a program that is installed and started on a machine that is
directly connected to the internet

q The SDM Server shown on the picture (Picture: MMC with server green, 1
database, 2 instances running, 1 J2EE dispatcher and 1 J2EE server) ....
o ...is working as a Stand Alone SDM Server.
o ...is in offline state
x ...is working as an integrated SDM Server.
o ...has been restarted 2 times.

The SAP Web Dispatcher can be used to distribute HTTP requests over one or
more SAP Web Application Server instances. The SAP Web Dispatcher stores
connection information in a configuration file. Which of the following parameters
is mandatory in the SAP Web Dispatcher configuration file?
o icm/HTTP/j2ee_<xx>
o icm/host_name_full
o rdisp/msserv
o ms/http_was_required
x ms/http_port

The SAP Web AS Java generates plenty of log and files when in operation. Which
of the following applies to the startup framework output files?

- All Java instances in the cluster store their startup output files in one central
place - the SAP Web AS database.
- The startup log files are stored locally for every instance and usually the old
versions are overwritten after every second restart.
- The log files generated from the Java startup and control framework are written
in specific binary format and can be watched only with the SAP Web AS Java Log
Viewer.
+ Most relevant information about the startup of the different Java
processes can be found in the jlaunch trace files.

Once web applications are up and running, more SAP Web Application Servers
may be added to the landscap to help process the load. To balance the web
application load across several SAP Web Application Servers, SAP offers the SAP
Web Dispatcher as a software loadbalancing mechanism. Which of the following
is a correct statement about the usage of the Web Dispatcher?
- It is used only in ABAP-only systems.
- It is used only in ABAP+Java systems.
- It is used only in Java-only systems.
+ It is used in all configurations of the SAP Web AS: ABAP-only systems,
Java-only systems and ABAP+Java systems.

Which of these Administration tools has a text based interface?
+ Console access by Telnet.
- System info web Page.
- Visual Administrator.
- Configurator Editor.

# JDI administration
Which of the following statements regarding development configurations are
correct?
+ There is one development configuration for each track in the SLD
+ Development configurations are stored in the CMS
- Development configurations are required for track creation
- Development configurations are stored in the SLD
+ Development configurations are generated on track creation.

+ Development configurations consist of two DTR workspaces and one
CBS buildspace
+ Development configurations must exist for every system of a track
(i.e. for the central development system, the consolidation system, the
test system and the production system)

Prior to the track creation, some prerequisites must be fulfilled. Which of the
following statements regarding the prerequisites are correct ?
- Four workspaces and two buildspaces used by the new track must exist
+ A DTR server and a CBS server used by the new track must exist and
have been configured
+ The software component versions to be developed in the new track
and their dependencies to the software component versions required by
them are defined in the SLD.
+ Required software components for the new track has already been
approved in the predecessor track.
- The SAP Netweaver Developer Studio used by the administrator ins installed.

Which of the following statements regarding the basic idea of the SLD is correct?
o SLD is a Java application. Therefore, ABAP applications can't make use of the
information provided by the SLD
o SLD is based on an SAP proprietary product standard called Solution Manager
o SLD is only available with the shipment of the SAP Exchange Infrastructure (XI)
x SLD is the landscape-wide information provider for system landscape
data and acts as a foundation of many SAP applications.

The Component Build Service (CBS) carries out the central builds on demand.
However, who triggers the central builds in the Central Development System
(DEV-system)?
x Developers trigger the central builds when they activate their source
changes.
o Developers are not allowed to trigger the central builds.
o Developers trigger the central builds when they are checking in their source
changes.
o The administrator of the CBS always triggers the central build.

The SAP master component information contains information about all SAP
products and components. Customers can keep this information in their local SLD
up-to-date, if they
x ...import the current updates of the master component information
downloadable on the SAP Service Marketplpace.
o ...install the current version of the SLD server
o ...install the current version of the SAP Web Application server
o ...import the newest full version of the master component information
downloadable on the SAP Service Marketplace

Which of the following statements regarding name reservation are correct?
- Both a reserved namespace prefix at the SAP Service Marketplace and a name
server are optional for using the SAP Netweaver Development infrastructure
- A reserved namespace prefix at the SAP Service Marketplace is mandatory for
using the SAP Netweaver Development Infrastructure
+ The global uniqueness of a reserved namespace prefix at the SAP
Service Marketplace is guaranteed
+ A name server is mandatory for using the SAP Netweaver
Development Infrastructure
q The Design Time Repository keeps all development source versions. Which of
the following statements are correct?
+ Developers have to create an activity when they are checking in their
changes to the DTR.
- Developers change the sources directly in the DTR
- To view the sources, developers have to synchronise them to their local disk
+ To change the sources, developers have to check them out to their
local disk
+ Developers may view all development source versions of a certain
source
- Developers may view only the most recent development source version of a
certain source.

QUESTION NO: 1
Is data written to the Oracle transaction logs (redo logs) before or after the
information is written in
the database files?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A. Before
B. After
C. Simultaneously
D. The priority and sequence of database writes and transaction log writes is
controlled by the
parameter "dblg_after" in the ORACLE initialization file.
E. Randomly, sometimes before, sometimes after.
Answer: A
QUESTION NO: 2
What is the primary function of the $ORACLE HOME/saparch directory?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A. The saparch directory is a work area for the R/3 database utilities.
B. The saparch directory is a work area for the R/3 Instance tasks.
C. The saparch directory is used as the holding area for online database backups
instead of
writing them to tape.
D. The saparch directory holds the archived database log files.
E. The saparch directory contains the current database transaction log files.
Answer: D
QUESTION NO: 3
Which customer specific specific files does sapdba save during an offline backup to
insure that the
Oracle database could be restored to a consistent state in case of problems?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A. The Oracle executables files.
B. The Oracle database transaction log files and archived log files.
C. The tablespace data files, database transaction log files, and the database control
file.
D. The database archived log files and R/3 Syslog file.
E. The database transaction log files and the R/3 transport structures.
Answer: C
QUESTION NO: 4
Which customer specific files must be saved during an online database backup to be
able to
restore the Oracle database to a consistent state ?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A. The Oracle executables, database parameter file, and the tablespace data files.
B. The Oracle online redo log files and the database control file.
C. The archived log files, database control file and the Oracle executables.
D. The tablespace data files, database control file, and all database redo logs written
during the

online backup.
E. The tablespace data files, database control file, and the database parameter file.
Answer: D
QUESTION NO: 5
What is the primary function of the $ORACLE_HOME/sapbackup directory?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A. The sapbackup directory is used for database backups which are written to disk.
B. The sapbackup directory is a work area for the R/3 Instance tasks.
C. The sapbackup directory is the temporary holding area for the database
transaction logs (redo
logs) before they are automatically written to tape.
D. The sapbackup directory holds the archived database log files.
E. The sapbackup directory is used by the R/3 database utilities during database
reorganizations.
Answer: A
QUESTION NO: 6
What is the name of the brbackup and brarchive parameter file for an Oracle
database used by an
R/3 Central Instance with SAP System ID C11?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A. initC11.ini
B. initC11.ora
C. initC11.sap
D. sapdba.ini
E. initC11.dba
Answer: C
QUESTION NO: 7
When using a tape device that supports hardware compression which of the
following statements
is true?
Note: There is more than one right answer! Click on the buttons next to the right
answers.
A. The tape_address and tape_address rew init<SID>.sap parameters are
automatically
calculated based upon the value of the "compression" parameter.
B. Drivers for hardware compression must be specified for the tape_address and
tape_address
rew parameters in the init<SID>.sap file.
C. The compression ratio is calculated using "brbackup -k only" immediately after
installation and
should be repeated at least once a month to update compression ratios.
D. The compression ratio should be calculated using "brbackup -k only" immediately
after
installation and never needs to be repeated.
E. The "compression" parameter should be set to "hardware" in the init<SID>.sap
file.
Answer: C,E

QUESTION NO: 8
Sapdba and the Computer Center Management System (CCMS) use operating
system level programs for certain database administration tasks. Which program
would be called by CCMS for
backing up the data files for the PSAPBTABD and PSAPBTABI tablespaces?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A. Brarchive
B. Brconnect
C. sapdba –b
D. brbackup
E. backoffl
Answer: D
QUESTION NO: 9
What are the 3 different Oracle database startup modes?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A. Warm, cold, maintenance
B. Mount, nomount, open
C. Online, offline, utility
D. Level 1, level 2, level 3
E. Normal, restrict, utility
Answer: B
QUESTION NO: 10
What are the 3 different Oracle database shutdown modes?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A. Warm, cold, maintenance
B. Level 1, level 2, level 3
C. Normal, immediate, abort
D. Regular, active, passive
E. Standard, now, kill
Answer: C
QUESTION NO: 11
What is the primary purpose of the $ORACLE_HOME/sapreorg directory.
(Windows NT: $ORACLE_HOMEsapreorg)?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A. The sapreorg directory is a work area for the R/3 database utilities.
B. The sapreorg directory is a work area for the R/3 Dialog Instance Tasks.
C. The sapreorg directory is used as the holding area for online database backups
instead of writing them to tape.
D. The sapreorg directory holds the database transaction log files.
E. The sapreorg directory contains the archived database log files.
Answer: A
QUESTION NO: 12
To perform a complete database reset, you need one of the following backups.
Note! More than one answer is correct. Please click on the buttons next to the
correct answers

A. Complete offline backup.
B. Complete online backup.
C. Consistent online backup.
D. Backup of offline redo log files.
Answer: A,C
QUESTION NO: 13
What is the purpose of the Oracle "OPS$connect" function?
1. Parameter rdisp/mshost found in which profile
a)default
b)start profile
c)Central instance –instance profile
c)Application Instance – instance profile
2. Parameter rdisp/vbname found in which profile
a)default
b)start profile
c)Central instance – instance profile
c)Application Instance – instance profile
3. One screen dump of sytem status . find the Database host name?
4. Performance optimization
SQL statement given –screen dump of ST04 detail analysis SQL request
& ST04 main screen dump- Single choice only
To find SQL statement is expensive or not
a)buffer gets > 5% Total Reads so Statement is expensive
b)buffer gets > 5% Physical Reads so Statement is expensive
c)Statement is not expensive
d)Very high buffer gets so statement is expensive
e)High no of execution so statement is expensive
5. Program ZZSLOW is there and it access ZZTABLE .And want to improve the
performance
(multiple choice )
a) create an index on ZZTABLE and this is preferred over option of tuning SQL statement
b) Creating an index would definitely improve the performance
c)Tuning the SQL statement would solve the performance and is preferred over Index
Creation
d)Optimizer may choose wrong index after creation of the index
6. One screen dump of update termination .
7. Sequence of Updates V1 & V2
a) both occur independently
b) first V1 and then v2
c)both simultaneously
8. How many minimum V1 and V2 processes should be there?
If V1 process is only there and there are not V2 process then will V1 process will handle
V2 updates as well ?? True/False
9. Which of the foll. Traces can be started without restarting SAP system
a)Buffer Trace
b)SYSLOG Trace
c) Database Trace
d)Dispatcher Trace
e)Authorization
10. Analyse problem of system startup. Before anyone could login system stops . Check
using(multiple choice)

A)check sm21
b)/usr/sap/log directory
c)analyse database error log in details
d)check files in usrsap<instance>instance_nowork folder
e)check files in sapbackup folder
11. Sapdba –check is used to (multiple choice)
a) check & displays the status of all datafiles along with complete path name
b)lists free space usage of index & tables
c)check for consistency of database
d)check for failed brbackup & brarchive backuop
e) check for values of active database parameters
12. Update optimizer statistics jobs does … (multiple choice)
a) Not update statistics of pool and cluster tables
b)update statistics of all transparent tables.
C) update statistics of all transparent tables who doesn’t have any statictics
D) Check DBSTATCO for updation of selected tables
E) updates only statictics for DBSTATCO
13. One screen dump of sapdba…
Archive stuck situation is possible
14. One screen dump of backup failure
trying to take offline backup while R/3 is on
15. One screen dump on TIME_LIMIT_EXCEED explanations and some questions.
16. What of the foll. Components are in mysap technology
a) SAPGUI
b)mysap database
c) ITS
d)SAPDB
e)
17. Can Wgate and Webserver be on different boxes.
18. From where can ITS be adminstrerd -multiple choice
a) from within SAP system
B) from web server
c) from ITS admin instance
19. Which of the following files are required for transport in to QAS system
a)transport.pfg
b)DOMAIN_DEV.cfg
c)TP_DOMAIN_<SID>.pfl
d)tpimport.pfg
20. Which is the sapbda & brarchive parameter file
21. Files Required to do full database & recovery
22. File backed up during online backup
23. File backup up during offline backup
24. Questions on RFC+CPIC time & Roll Wait Time
25. Uses of solution manager
26. Sapdba supports following (multiple choice)
a)2 step backup, first disk then to tape
b)Replication database
c)
27. Enque table is stored in (single choice)
a) Table Tlock in database
b)In Central instance at file level
c) in shared memory of the Central instance
d)In shared memory of each SAP instance

28. Enque/deque is related to
a) lock & unlocking at Database level
b)Lock & unlock of SAP transactions
c)
29. Locking process of SAP transactions carried out by
a) Dialog process
b)enque process
c)Message server process
30. A communication is to be done between 2 systems, such that none should use
anonymous logon for misuse to do remote logon to target system (multiple choice)
a) if you do not give RFC target system,system no etc. then a default Logon is performed
on to 000/own system with user SAPCPIC.
b)To create a communication user in su01 and specify it in target destination
c)to keep logon details blank so that each user has to specify the detials every time a
connection is made
31. Which process first connects to the database ?
a) Dispatcher
b) Message server
c)Work process
d) SAPGUI
e)Gateway
32. What is the startup sequence of the SAP system?(multiple choice)
a)Database ,gateway ,dispatcher
b)Dispatcher ,gateway ,database
c)Database , dispatcher ,gateway
d)etc.. etc…
33. SCU0 along with SM30 can be used to (multiple choice)
a) compare clients within same system
b)compare different clients within different systems
c)Can be used to adjust customizing alongwith SM30
d)Can be used to comapare transaction tables
34. With OPS$connect mechanism
a)OS user need not enter the password during database connection (T/F)
b)SAPDBA always uses ops$connect mechanism (T/F)
c)
d)
35. At then end of prepare phase which log file is created
a)R3up.log
b)prepare.log
c)Checks.log
d)upgrade.log
36. Allocation sequence of DIA work process
a)rollfirst,heap memory until exhausted,remaining of roll area,then Extended memory
b)rollfirst,Extended memory until quota reached,remaining of Roll area, then Heap
memory
c)
37. 3-4 Questions on Device configuration …..( swap space,online logs,sapdata files on
RAID5 or RAID1., on same disks,.. etc)
38. To check & avoid block corruption
a) Use RMAN level 0 backup with SAP tools for backup
b)brbackup and brarchive always check for coruption
c)use –w use_dbv option with brbackup
d)oracle automatically checks for block corruption

39. How to create additional Sap service marketplace users (single choice)
a)one user Sapadm always there for every customer
b)At customer place the user with Administrator rights can create additional users
c)Create an oss message for creating additional users
d)has to check license& contract between SAP & customer
40. Buffering for a frequently updated table should be (single choice)
a)single record buffered
b)generic buffered
c)No buffering
c)Full buffering
41. For buffer synchronisation
a)In central system only way is to make bufrefmode=sendon/exeauto
b)In central instance and all dialog instance it should be bufrefmode=sendoff/exeauto
c) In central system it should be bufrefmode=sendoff/exeauto
d)In central system and all dialog system in exceptional conditions may be set as
bufrefmode=sendoff/exeauto
42. One screen dump on Load average of ST06 screen (Single Choice)
a)Load average is the Average CPU utilisation of the server
b)No. of CPU processes waiting in front of the CPU
c)
d)
43. Client copy
a)Remote copy creates huge file in operating system level in target systems (T/F)
b)Client copies can be done within same system(T/F)
c)Remote Client copy can be done using parallel processes (T/F)
d)
44. From external programs which process is used to trigger an event within an SAP
system(Single Choice)
a)sapxpg
b)gwrd
c)dpmon
d)sapevt
e)disp+work.exe
45. From SAP system which process is used to start external program & external commands
(Single Choice)
a)sapxpg
b)gwrd
c)dpmon
d)sapevt
e)disp+work.exe
46. How many spool work process can be configured (Single Choice)
a) one per sap instance
b)one per SAP system
c) more than one per SAP instance
d)one on the Central instance
47. In 3 system landscape from where the request can be imported in QAS system (Single
Choice)
a)Only from DEV
b)Only from QAS
c)From all of the 3 systems
d)only from PRD
48. Some questions on TMS
a)TMSADM are automatically created in 000 client (T/F)

b)TMS* RFC’s are automatically generated
c)
49. SAPCONNECT
a)sapconnect only works with RFC destinations (T/F)
b)if you configure sapconnect in client 000 then it is available to all other clients(T/F)
c)for Auto reaction method sapconnect needs to be configured in client 000 (T/F)
d) for External mail configuration an connection has to be maintained in SCOT (T/F)
e)No extra setting required for Mail config(T/F)
f)An program has to be scheduled so that sapconnect send external mails . (T/F)
50. RZ20/RZ21
a) in order to add create new monitor set you have to switch to ‘Activate Maintenance
function mode’ (T/F)
b)It is recommended to copy Entire Monitor Set and then make changes to it (T/F)
c)It is recommended to keep monitor set with minimum monitoring objects so that
loading time of the set is minimum (T/F)
d)You should maintain the threshold values of the monitor set (T/F)
51. When you do a modification then (single choice)
a)The package /dev class of the object has to be changed to customer dev. Class
b) The package /dev class of the object is within that of SAP and cannot be changed
c)
d)
52. A customer wants to restrict modification what should he do
a) change to not modifiable in Se06 system change option (T/F)
b)avoid modification by using enhancements & Business Addins(T/F)
53. Further on modifications
a)Every modification has to be registered as SAP Service marketplace (T/F)
b)Every manual modification required Developer Acess key for the developer (T/F)
c)Modification request has to be sent to SAP thru FAX(T/F)
d) All modifications should be done in DEV system for techincal reasons (T/F)
e)If modifications done then further work is required during upgrades (T/F)
54. Use of native SQL
a) Will always improve the performance (T/F)
b)Will remove the programs from being database independent(T/F)
c) data accessed will not be buffered (T/F)
d)
55. Operation mode switch from BTC to DIA
a)if jobs are running in BTC process then operation modes will be switched after the jobs
are completed (T/F)
b) if jobs are running in BTC process then operation modes switch will be cancelled (T/F)
c)The running jobs would be temporarily put in suspended status (T/F)
d)

1. Data is written to the Data Files before it is written to the Redo Logs. True/False
2. In an offline backup, what files are backed up?
3. In an online backup, what files are backed up?

4. What are the uses of the sapbackup and sapreorg directories?
5. What are the following files used for?
- init<SID>.sap
- init<SID>.dba
- init<SID>.ora
6. How do you verify corrupt data blocks at least once per Backup cycle?
7. What is the use of the OPS$<SID>adm user in an SAP database?
8. What happens during each of the shutdown options?
- shutdown normal
- shutdown immediate
- shutdown force
9. What happens during each of the startup phases?
- startup nomount
- startup mount
- startup open
10. Explain the 2 phase strategy recommended by SAP for maintaining Optimizer statistics?
11. What is the file to troubleshoot Oracle errors and where is it located?
12. Table and Index Reorganization?
13. If an index or a table is unable to allocate another extent, what would be the error code
and the cause of it?
15. Which Oracle file is used during recovery and maintains information about LSNs, etc?
16. What is to be done for an index/table for which the MAXEXTENTS limit has been
reached?
17. "Checkpoint not Complete" - Can an archiver stuck situation cause this condition? How
about Block Corruption?
18. If a Background Process aborts, what kind of recovery do you initiate after starting up the
database?
19. During a log file switch, what is the role of the ARCH process?
20. To run Offline Backups, the database has to be running in ARCHIVELOG mode.
True/False?
21. How do you adjust the size of the Shared SQL Cache?
22. How do you adjust the DB_BLOCK_SIZE of your database?
23. Know your SAPDBA Restore & Recovery Menu Paths and available options?
24. Information provided in Report for sapdba -check?
25. Identify the best disk layout for the following files w.r.t to security?

a. origlogA, origlogB, mirrorlogA, mirrorlogB.

1) What is SAP Instance? (Single Choice)
a. Group of Database that make a system runnable
b. Group of SAP instances that make a system runnable
c. Group of Services that make a system runnable
d. Group of O/S level Files that make a system runnable
2) What is the name of the DEFAULT Profile in SAP System? (Single Choice)
a. DEFAULT.imp
b. DEFAULT.prof
c. DEFAULT.pfl
d. DEFAULT.ini
3) Spool Request is created by which Work Process? (Single Choice)
a. Spool Work Process
b. Dispatcher
c. Message Server
d. Dialog Work Process
4) What is the Profile Parameter name used to set the Trace Level in SAP system? (Single
Choice)
a. rdisp/trace_level
b. rdisp/tracelevel
c. rdisp/LEVEL
d. rdisp/TRACE
5) The Standard SAP User SAP* has the following password (Single Choice)
a. 06071992
b. 19920706
c. 07061992
d. 19920607
6) What is the order in which the Profile files are read during the system start? (Single Choice)
a. DEFAULT, INSTANCE & START
b. INSTANCE, DEFAULT & START
c. START, INSTANCE, DEFAULT
d. START, DEFAULT, INSTANCE
7) Transaction Code used for Profile Maintenance / Job overview is: (Single Choice)
a. PFCG / SM37
b. RZ11 / SM36
c. RZ10 / SM37
d. RZ03 / SM37
8) What will happen if a background job is running and the Operation Mode Switch is activated in
between? (Single Choice)
a. The job will be cancelled
b. The job will be put in Suspended state

c. The Job will continue to run and once it finishes then the Operation Mode Switch will
occur
d. The Operation Mode will happen the next day
9) State whether the followings statements are True or False:
a. W Gate should always be on Web Server
b. A Gate should always be coupled with W Gate
c. SAP System should be installed on NT Operating System
d. Dual Host Installation in ITS means A Gate and W Gate are on the same host
10) From SAP System which process is used to start External Command / Program (Single
Choice)
a. sapxpg
b. sapevt
c. disp+work.exe
d. gwrd
11) ‘Event-Based Job Scheduler’ runs on every instance (True / False)
12) Printer Name in SAP is not case sensitive (True / False)
13) SAP System has a Operation Mode configured. There are performance issues in the System
and finally the BASIS administrator adds RAM (Physical Memory) to the Server. He
configures few parameters and increases the no. of work processes. The BASIS
administrator needs to redefine Operation Mode to take effect of the new processes –
(True/False)
14) The standard System Landscape recommended by SAP is: (Single Choice)
a. DEV, QAS & PRD systems on one Server
b. DEV & QAS on one server and PRD on another server
c. DEV, QAS & PRD on separate server
d. DEV on one server and QAS & PRD on one server
15) Access Method is: (Single Choice)
a. Connection between Dialog & Spool Work Process
b. Connection between OS Spool and the Actual Printer
c. Connection between Spool Work Process and OS Spool
d. Connection between Spool Request & Output Request
16) Locking Process of SAP Transactions is carried out by: (Single Choice)
a. Enqueue
b. Dialog
c. Spool
d. Background
17) Spool Data is stored in which table: (Single Choice)
a. TSP01
b. TSP03
c. TST03
d. TSP02
18) From External Program which process is used to trigger an event in SAP System? (Single
Choice)
a. sapxpg
b. sapevt
c. disp+work.exe

d. icmon
19) In 3 system landscape from where the request can be imported in QAS system (Single
Choice)
a. Only from DEV
b. Only from QAS
c. Only from PRD
d. From all three systems
20) State whether the following statements are True/False in case of Note Assistant: (Multiple
Choice)
a. No SPDD modification adjustment required during upgrade / when importing Support
Packages
b. SSCR request is required
c. Changes are noted in Modification Assistant (SE95)
d. Changes are done through SNOTES transaction
21) While importing Support Packages you need to do the following. State True/False:
a. Update SPAM/SAINT update with latest version
b. Client 000 is not to be used for importing
c. Import must always be performed during peak operations
d. Aborted packages must be kept untouched
22) Uses of Solution Manager (Multiple Choice)
a. Operations Portal
b. Solution Monitoring
c. Support Portal
d. Transaction Creation Portal
23) CCMS Monitoring Infrastructure consists of: (Single Choice)
a. Data Migration
b. Data Collection
c. Data Storage
d. Data Archiving
24) The following are the components of a DB: (Multiple Choice)
a. Database Buffer
b. Data Files
c. SAP Kernel
d. Special DB Processes
25) ICM (Internet Communication Manager) is a Process (True/False)

1 - What is the name of the alert log file for an Oracle database using a system identifier (SID) of C11?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A.
B.
C.
D.

ora_log_C11.log
ora_log_C11.trc
alert_C11.log
alert_C11.trc

E. orasrv.log
2 - What happens if a table wants to allocate another extent but there is not enough contiguous free space
in the tablespace?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A. The extent is allocated in another tablespace.
B. The Oracle error message ORA-1653 is sent to the Syslog file and to the ABAP/4 short
dump.
C. The extent is distributed across the free space that is available.
D. Oracle dynamically reorganizes the tablespace to make all available space contiguous.
E. The database switches into maintenance mode and sends a system message to the database
administrator.

3 - What action needs to be taken when Oracle returns an ORA-1653 error, failure to allocate an extent for
a table in a specific tablespace?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

The tablespace should be moved to a faster disk so that Oracle can find the extents quicker.
The tablespace size should be increased by adding 1 or more datafiles.
This is an Oracle internal error message which should be registered with Oracle immediately.
The database must be shutdown immediately to avoid damage.
The affected table should be dropped to avoid similar problems in the future.

4 - Under which circumstances does a table/index have to be reorganized?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

If the extents belonging to the table/index are distributed across several data files.
If a log switch occurs before a database commit is completed.
If the tablespace overflows during a redo log file switch.
If an archiver stuck situation occurs during a write to the table/index.
If the table/index reaches the upper limit for the MAXEXTENTS parameter value when
attempting to allocate another extent.

5 - Which Oracle component dynamically maintains information about the status of the database redo logs,
database mode, names and paths of database files, and is essential during a database recovery?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A.
B.
C.
D.

The Oracle parameter file, init<SID>.ora.
Each tablespace data file contains this data for the whole database.
The Oracle control file, cntrl<SID>.dbf.
The SGA definition file, sgadef<SID>.def.

E. The sapdba parameter file, init<SID>.dba.
6 - An Instance error occurs when 1 or more Oracle background processes become corrupted. What
actions should the database administrator take to correct the problem?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A. This is a serious error. Call the Oracle hotline.
B. Shutdown the operating system and reinstall the Oracle software.
C. Shutdown abort and startup open. The SMON process will use the current redo log files and
checkpoint information from the control files to execute an automatic instance recovery
upon database startup.
D. Shutdown the operating system and turn all hardware off. After the hardware cools off start
everything up again and execute Orainst using the repair option.
E. Restore all missing files, apply the offline redo logs, update the control files, and execute the
startup open command.
7 - Which files must be restored from tape to allow a full database restore and recovery ?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A. Database control file, tablespace data files, and the database alert log.
B. Tablespace data files, database control file, and all archived database transaction logs
created since the last full backup.
C. $ORACLE_HOME, Oracle parameter file, tablespace data files.
D. Database control file, tablespace data files, R/3 Syslog, R/3 Transport directory.
E. Oracle parameter file, tablespace data files, and the Oracle control file.
8 - The R/3 System Oracle database has 4 online redo logs, also known as database transaction logs.
Each online redo log has a mirrored copy. What is the effect of a log file switch?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A. The current online redo log gets copied to its mirrored copy, upon completion the next online redo
log becomes open for writing.
B. The database alternates between writing to the online and offline redo log files.
C. The database switches between writing to the original redo log files and the mirrored redo log files.
D. The current R/3 Syslog file gets copied to the saparch directory and a new Syslog file is created.
E. The current online redo log gets closed and the next online redo log gets opened for
writing. The ARCH process gets triggered to begin backing up the recently closed redo log.
9 - Which statement is true of online Oracle database backups ?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A. Users may only read data and may not enter data until after the backup is done.
B. Database transaction logs (online redo logs) are not written during online backups.
C. The tablespace data files and control file comprise the complete online backup and are all that is
necessary for restoring the database to a consistent status.
D. The database must be running in archivelog mode.

E. Online database backups are not supported by Oracle.
10 - Given Oracle database with system ID C11. If tablespace PSAPBTABD has been extended 200 MB
by adding another datafile which of the following statements is true?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A. In the event of a full database restore the new tablespace data file will be automatically created
based upon information in the initC11.ora file.
B. All data files for PSAPBTABD should be backed up along with the database control file to maintain
database recoverability.
C. The database should be shutdown and started up again to register the existence of the new file in
the Oracle internal system tables.
D. The data files for PSAPBTABD, the control file, and the redo logs must be backed up to
maintain database recoverability.
E. An R3INST database copy should be run to create a clean copy of the complete database.

11 - What is the highest priority when planning the distribution of the database transaction logs, mirrored
transaction logs, archived transaction logs, and tablespace data files over multiple logical device groups?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

Better performance through more hardware.
More flexibility in case of hardware failure.
Easier database backups and quicker restores.
Higher data security and easier administration.
To make the system physically more modular for transport reasons.

12 - Which of the following oracle parameters should never be modified in the init<SID>.ora file?
Note: There is more than one right answer! Click on the buttons next to the right answers.
A. db_block_buffers
B. db_block_size
C. db_name
D. controlfiles
E. shared_pool_size
13 - Which of the following configurations would have the slightest impact upon data security and/or
performance?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A. Operating system swap and Oracle tablespace data files installed on the same physical disk(s).
B. Operating system swap and SAP kernel (executable files) installed on the same physical
disk(s).
C. Operating system swap and Oracle database transaction logs (redo logs) installed on the same
disk(s).

D. Operating system swap and the /usr/sap directory on the same physical disk(s).
E. Oracle database archived log files (offline redo logs) accessed over a shared (or NFS) directory
connection.
14 - The physical separation of database logs from their mirror copies means?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A.
B.
C.
D.

Using physically separate partitions of a physical disk.
Using physically separate disks.
Using physically separate disks in the same logical device group.
Using generic database utilities to split the flow of data between randomly chosen operating
system directories.
E. Use of database specific utilities to fork log backups to 2 physically separate backup media.
15 - Which of the following Oracle parameters should be modified in the init<SID>.ora file to enlarge the
shared memory usage for the Oracle database instance?
Note: There is more than one right answer! Click on the buttons next to the right answers.
A. log_archive_dest
B. db_block_size
C. rollback_segments
D. shared_pool_size
E. db_block_buffers
16. brbackup tool can create a database backup when the database is up and running or when it has
been shutdown. During an online database backup which of the following is TRUE? Click on the button
next to the right answer.

A. Users must stop entering data but may continue working using read-only transactions.
B. Users must stop working because their work would be unrecoverable in case of problems with the
backup.
C.Users may continue working without interruption.
D.Power-users may continue working but data-entry users must log off.
E.Users must log off until the online backup is started but then may continue working
17. Which of the following statements are correct in regard to using a single run of
BRBACKUP to
save both the database files and the offline redo log files?
Note! More than one answer is correct. Please click on the buttons next to the correct answers.
A. BRARCHIVE is started immediately after the database backup is complete: no further
intervention by the database administrator is necessary.
B. This technique can only be used for offline database backups, not online backups.
C. The database backup and the backup of the offline redo log files must fit on one tape
because changing tapes is not supported.
D. You can backup the database using multiple tape devices in parallel.
E. The tapes used must have been initialized by BRBACKUP.

18. What happens during the startup of an Oracle database?
Note! More than one answer is correct. Please click on the buttons next to the correct answers.
A. The SGA is created in shared memory according to the parameter settings in the
configuration file init<SID>.ora.
B. The Oracle background and shadow processes are created.
C. In the mount phase, all copies of the control file are opened.
D. If necessary, Oracle automatically performs an instance recovery.
E. As the last step, the online redo log files are cleared and the data files are opened.
19. What happens during the shutdown of an Oracle database?
Note! More than one answer is correct. Please click on the buttons next to the correct answers.
A. When you shutdown the database with the NORMAL option, the database system disconnects all
users before shutting down the database.
B. When you shutdown the database with the NORMAL or IMMEDIATE option, the database
system writes a checkpoint before shutting down the database.
C. When you shutdown the database with the ABORT or IMMEDIATE option, open transactions are
rolled back before the database is shut down.
D. When you shut down the database with the ABORT option, the R/3 system is shut down, too.
E. Shutting down the database with the ABORT option always requires an instance recovery
at the next database startup.
20. Which of the following statements express part of the SAP-recommended strategy for creating and
updating the table statistics used by the cost-based optimizer?
Note! More than one answer is correct. Please click on the buttons next to the correct answers.
A. No statistics are created for R/3 pool and cluster tables.
B. Statistics are created for all transparent tables that have no statistics.
C. The table DBSTATC can be used to trigger an exact computation of the statistics of specific
tables.
D. The update for table statistics refreshes all transparent tables.
E. The table DBSTATC can be used to detect which table statistics need to be refreshed .
21. What happens if a table wants to allocate another extent but there is not enough contiguous free
space in the tablespace? Click on the button next to the right answer.
A.
B.
C.
D.

Please click on the button next to the correct answer.
The extent is allocated in another tablespace.
The extent is distributed across the free space that is available.
The Oracle error message ORA 1653 is sent to the file SYSLOG and to the ABAP short
dump.
E. Oracle dynamically reorganizes the tablespace to make all available space contiguous.
F. The database switches into maintenance mode and sends a system message to the database
administrator.

22. When the R/3 update task aborts with an Oracle error ORA1653 - failure to allocate an extent for a
table in a specific tablespace - what action needs to be taken?
Note! More than one answer is correct. Please click on the buttons next to the correct answers.
A. The tablespace should be reorganized.
B. The tablespace size should be increased by adding a new data file.
C. The table should be reorganized.
D. The storage parameter MAXEXTENTS must be increased.
E. After the cause of the error has been removed, the R/3 update task must be reactivated.
23. Which of the following checks are useful for database performance monitoring?
Note! More than one answer is correct. Please click on the buttons next to the correct answers.
A. Checking that the CBO statistics are refreshed once a week according to the strategy
recommended by SAP.
B. Checking that the archive directory contains enough free space.
C. Checking the data buffer quality.
D. Checking the shared cursor cache for expensive SQL statements.
E. Checking for tables with more than 100 extents.

24. ___________ is used as default user when you can an SAP tool for Oracle administration.
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

SYSTEM
SYSDBA
SYSOPER
SAP<SCHEMA-ID>
SIDADM

25. Name the standard Database users created in Oracle.
Note! More than one answer is correct. Please click on the buttons next to the correct answers
A. SIDADM
B. ORASID
C. SYS
D. SAP<SCHEMA-ID>
E. SYSTEM
26. The recommended method of changing the password of SAP<SCHEMA-ID> is
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A.
B.
C.
D.

SQL> ALTER USER
SAP tool BRCONNECT
SQL > ALTER USER
SQLPLUS>CHANGE PASSWORD

E. SAP tool BRUSER
27. The Oracle tool to test the connection to the database with SID C11 ON HOST twdf0505 is
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

TNSLISTENER
lsnrctl start
tnspingC11
CONNECT
BRCONNECT

28. Your daily backups are performed with automatic tape selection, no volume for backup is
specified. Which tapes will be accepted for backup (assuming the tape lock period is expired in all
cases.)
Note! More than one answer is correct. Please click on the buttons next to the correct answers
A. any labeled tape
B. the tape labeled with the volume name you got from DB13, Goto  Tapes needed.
C. A tape labeled with volume name scratch
D. Any unlabeled tape.
29. The BR*TOOLS profile init<DBSID>.sap can be edited by;
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A. BRBACKUP
B. BRARCHIVE
C. BRTOOLS
D. Operating system editor.
E. None of the above.
30, To perform a complete database reset, you need one of the following backups.
Note! More than one answer is correct. Please click on the buttons next to the correct answers
A.
B.
C.
D.

complete offline backup
complete online backup
consistent online backup
backup of offline redo log files.

1)

What is SAP Instance? (Single Choice)

a.

Group of Database that make a system runnable

b. Group of SAP instances that make a system runnable
c.

Group of Services that make a system runnable

d. Group of O/S level Files that make a system runnable
2)

What is the name of the DEFAULT Profile in SAP System? (Single Choice)

a.

DEFAULT.imp

b. DEFAULT.prof
c.

DEFAULT.pfl

d. DEFAULT.ini
3)

Spool Request is created by which Work Process? (Single Choice)

a.

Spool Work Process

b. Dispatcher
c.

Message Server

d. Dialog Work Process
4)

What is the Profile Parameter name used to set the Trace Level in SAP system? (Single Choice)

a.

rdisp/trace_level

b. rdisp/tracelevel
c.

rdisp/LEVEL

d. rdisp/TRACE
5)

The Standard SAP User SAP* has the following password (Single Choice)

a.

06071992

b. 19920706
c.

07061992

d. 19920607
6)

What is the order in which the Profile files are read during the system start? (Single Choice)

a.

DEFAULT, INSTANCE & START

b. INSTANCE, DEFAULT & START
c.

START, INSTANCE, DEFAULT

d. START, DEFAULT, INSTANCE
7)

Transaction Code used for Profile Maintenance / Job overview is: (Single Choice)

a.

PFCG / SM37

b. RZ11 / SM36
c.

RZ10 / SM37

d. RZ03 / SM37
8)

What will happen if a background job is running and the Operation Mode Switch is activated in
between? (Single Choice)

a.

The job will be cancelled

b. The job will be put in Suspended state
c.

The Job will continue to run and once it finishes then the Operation Mode Switch will occur

d. The Operation Mode will happen the next day
9)

State whether the followings statements are True or False:

a.

W Gate should always be on Web Server

b. A Gate should always be coupled with W Gate
c.

SAP System should be installed on NT Operating System

d. Dual Host Installation in ITS means A Gate and W Gate are on the same host
10) From SAP System which process is used to start External Command / Program (Single Choice)
a.

sapxpg

b. sapevt
c.

disp+work.exe

d. gwrd
11) ‘Event-Based Job Scheduler’ runs on every instance (True / False)
12) Printer Name in SAP is not case sensitive (True / False)
13) SAP System has a Operation Mode configured. There are performance issues in the System and
finally the BASIS administrator adds RAM (Physical Memory) to the Server. He configures few
parameters and increases the no. of work processes.

The BASIS administrator needs to redefine

Operation Mode to take effect of the new processes –(True/False)
14) The standard System Landscape recommended by SAP is: (Single Choice)
a.

DEV, QAS & PRD systems on one Server

b. DEV & QAS on one server and PRD on another server
c.

DEV, QAS & PRD on separate server

d. DEV on one server and QAS & PRD on one server
15) Access Method is: (Single Choice)
a.

Connection between Dialog & Spool Work Process

b. Connection between OS Spool and the Actual Printer
c.

Connection between Spool Work Process and OS Spool

d. Connection between Spool Request & Output Request
16) Locking Process of SAP Transactions is carried out by: (Single Choice)
a.

Enqueue

b. Dialog
c.

Spool

d. Background
17) Spool Data is stored in which table: (Single Choice)
a.

TSP01

b. TSP03
c.

TST03

d. TSP02
18) From External Program which process is used to trigger an event in SAP System? (Single Choice)
a.

sapxpg

b. sapevt
c.

disp+work.exe

d. icmon
19) In 3 system landscape from where the request can be imported in QAS system (Single Choice)
a.

Only from DEV

b. Only from QAS
c.

Only from PRD

d. From all three systems
20) State whether the following statements are True/False in case of Note Assistant: (Multiple Choice)
a.

No SPDD modification adjustment required during upgrade / when importing Support Packages

b. SSCR request is required
c.

Changes are noted in Modification Assistant (SE95)

d. Changes are done through SNOTES transaction
21) While importing Support Packages you need to do the following. State True/False:
a.

Update SPAM/SAINT update with latest version

b. Client 000 is not to be used for importing
c.

Import must always be performed during peak operations

d. Aborted packages must be kept untouched
22) Uses of Solution Manager (Multiple Choice)
a.

Operations Portal

b. Solution Monitoring
c.

Support Portal

d. Transaction Creation Portal
23) CCMS Monitoring Infrastructure consists of: (Single Choice)
a.

Data Migration

b. Data Collection
c.

Data Storage

d. Data Archiving
24) The following are the components of a DB: (Multiple Choice)
a.

Database Buffer

b. Data Files
c.

SAP Kernel

d. Special DB Processes
25) ICM (Internet Communication Manager) is a Process (True/False)

Ques 1) How many server socket listner and new connection can be processed by Default
in SAP WEB AS JAVA
a)
b)
c)

5 S.S.L. and 10 new connections/sec
10 S.S.L. and 350 new connections/sec
5 S.S.L. and 650 new connections/sec

d)

5 S.S.L. and 1000 new connections/sec

Ans:- c
Ques 2) JRE Consists of
a)
b)
c)
d)

Class Loader & Byte Code Verifier
Byte Code Verifier & JVM
JVM,Class Loader & Byte Code Verifier
J2SDK
Ans:- c
Ques 3) Which parameter keeps the incoming HTTP request in store for SAP WEB AS Java
Ans:- HTTP_KeepAliveTimeOut
Ques 4) Connection b/n a Dispatcher and Server is called as

a)
b)
c)
d)

Message Server Communication
Lazy Communication
Session Communication
Cluster Communication
Ans:- c
Ques 5) While installing Support Packs through Sapinst for SAP WEB AS JAVA J2ee engine
should be stopped.
True
False
Ans:- False

Ques 6) What are the user stores provided by SAP WEB AS JAVA
a)
b)
c)
d)

UME
UDDI
Database
None of the Above
Ans :- a,b,c
Ques 7) What are the two managers in UME

Ans:- Persistent Manager
Replication Manager
Ques 8) Different Types of Data Partitioning in UME.
a)
b)
c)
d)

Attribute base
User Base
Client Base
Type Base
Ans:- a,b,d
Ques 9) Which manager is first started in SAP WEB AS JAVA?

a)
b)
c)
d)

Cluster Manager
Log Manager
Application Manager
Thread Manager
Ans:- b
Ques 10) Which trace works on Byte Code?

a)
b)
c)
d)

SAT
CUA
JARM
Application Trace
Ans:- b,d
Ques 11) Which tool can define password rule?

a)
b)
c)
d)

ABAP User management
CUA
UME Console
Visual Administrator
Ans:- a,d
Ques 12) Which business logic component runs on the server?

a)
b)
c)

Applets
Enterprise Java Beans
Servlets

d)

JSP
Ans:- b
Ques 13) Severities of Log Controller can be changed by

a)
b)
c)
d)

Log Viewer
Config tool
Visual Administrator
Log Configurator Service
Ans:- d
Ques 14) Which log viewer can be used to display local log file?

a)
b)
c)

Integrated Log Viewer
Central Log Viewer
Log Viewer
d) Command Log Viewer
Ans:- d
Ques 15) What are the development Infrastructure used SAP WEB AS JAVA?

a)
b)
c)
d)

JDI
IDE
SAP Netweaver Studio
None of the Above
Ans:- a,b

Ques 16) All development objects are stored in a central repository called as
a)
b)
c)
d)

DTR
CBS
CMS
Software Logistics Process
Ans:- a

1) Software Logistics provide: (Single Choice)
a. Procedure for Central User Administration
b. Procedure for Development / Customizing
c. Procedure for Post Installation Steps

d. Process to help you monitor your system externally
2) The administrator wants to deactivate the import of all the requests in an import queue for a SAP
System, he should set which parameter? (Single Choice)
a. IMPORT_ALL_NO
b. IMPORT_ALL_STOP
c. NO_ALL_IMPORT
d. NO_IMPORT_ALL
3) The area of CTS that schedules and monitors the importing of Change Request is: (Single Choice)
a. Workbench Organizer
b. Transport Organizer
c. TMS
d. CTS
4) The transaction used for Cross-System Viewer and Client Transport – Export Processing is: (Single
Choice)
a. SUC0/SCC7
b. SCU0/SCC7
c. SUC0/SCC8
d. SCU0/SCC8
5) Types of Client Specific Data? (Multiple Choice)
a. Dictionary Data
b. User Data
c. Master Data
d. Transaction Data
6) Select the correct statements pertaining to TMS configuration (Multiple Choice)
a. Several transport groups can be in a transport domain
b. Transports can take place in the different transport groups
c. Transport layer is not required while defining transport routes
d. Only one transport layer can be defined in the system at any given time
7) Which of the following are the Transport directories? (Multiple Choice)
a. bin
b. actlogs
c. profile
d. tmp
e. log
8) List the Transport Requests that are generated during Client Export and the description of each
request giving the type of data exported
Sr. No.

Request Name

Description

9) Transaction Code used for Transport Management System / Transport Organizer is: (Multiple Choice)
a. STMS / SE09
b. SMTS / SE10
c. STMS / SE10
d. STSM / SE01
10) Which of the following is NOT a profile that can be used for client copies? (Multiple Choice)
a. SAP_USER – User master records
b. SAP_ACUST – Application & Customizing data
c. SAP_EXBC – Client dependent/independent Customizing & Users
d. SAP_MAST – Master data only
11) You can get Support Packages from the following places (Multiple Choice)
a. SAP Service Marketplace
b. SAPNet-R/3 Frontend
c. Online Documentation CD
d. HelpSAP.com
e. Collection CDs
12) Why did SAP introduced CRTs?
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________

13) BW Support Package for Release 30B will be named according to which format? (Single Choice)
a. SAPBW30B<serial no.>
b. SAPKY30B<serial no.>
c. SAPKW30B<serial no.>
d. SAPKB30B<serial no.>
14) Which tool is used for carrying out R/3 Upgrade (Single Choice)
a. PREPARE
b. SPAU
c. R3UP
d. SPDD
15) List the differences between Local Client Copy & Remote Client Copy
Sr. No.
1

Local Client Copy

Remote Client Copy

2
3
4

16) The logs generated by ‘tp’ tool are: (Multiple Choice)
a. tp system log
b. Transport Step Monitor
c. ULOG
d. <Source SID><Import Step><6 digit>.<Target SID>

17) Which of the following statements are correct in regard to preliminary imports? (Multiple Choice)
a. SAP recommends using preliminary imports rather than imports of the entire queue
b. Preliminary imports should only be performed in exceptional cases
c. Change request imported as preliminary imports remain in the queue and are imported again when an
import of the entire queue is performed
d. Change request are deleted from the import queue after a preliminary import is performed
18) Parallel Processing in case of Client Copy is: (Single Choice)
a. Performed in Local Client Copy
b. Performed in Client Transport
c. Performed when you want to do other client copy in parallel
d. Not recommended by SAP
19) Explain the meaning of Consolidation Route & Delivery Route (Not more than 30 words)
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________

20) Which are the two most frequently used Change Request Types available in Transport Organizer?
Give a short description of each one
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________

21) Which of the following best describes SAP Customizing? (Single Choice)
a. Writing new ABAP Programs to satisfy business needs
b. Entering Master data
c. Configuring business process to meet the requirements

d. Installing the R/3 software as per recommendations
e. Creating users and granting authorizations
22) The Customizing Client should have the option in SCC4 as: (Single Choice)
a. No Changes Allowed
b. Changes w/o automatic recording of changes
c. Automatic recording of changes
d. Changes w/o automatic recording, no transports allowed
23) Before releasing a change request, the following tasks should be completed (Multiple Choice)
a. All tasks must have previously been released
b. SE09 needs to be installed
c. TMs has to be configured
d. All tasks must have previously been tested

24) List at least three things that are automatically generated when a Transport Domain Controller is first
created
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________

25)

Draw a Transport Route (in Graphical Editor Mode) for a 3 system landscape with
SIDs D01 (Development), Q01 (Quality), P01 (Production). Include another Production system with
SID P02 in the transport Route. The IT Department decides to have the development changes to be
transported to Training System with SID T01 for urgent training requirements. Place the same in the
Transport Route?

(Use assumptions wherever required)

1.

Parameter rdisp/mshost found in which profile
a)default
b)start profile
c)Central instance –instance profile
c)Application Instance – instance profile

2.

Parameter rdisp/vbname found in which profile
a)default
b)start profile
c)Central instance – instance profile
c)Application Instance – instance profile

3.

One screen dump of sytem status . find the Database host name?

4.

Performance optimization
SQL statement given –screen dump of ST04 detail analysis SQL request
& ST04 main screen dump- Single choice only
To find SQL statement is expensive or not
a)buffer gets > 5% Total Reads so Statement is expensive
b)buffer gets > 5% Physical Reads so Statement is expensive
c)Statement is not expensive
d)Very high buffer gets so statement is expensive
e)High no of execution so statement is expensive

5.

Program ZZSLOW is there and it access ZZTABLE .And want to improve the performance
(multiple choice )
a) create an index on ZZTABLE and this is preferred over option of tuning SQL statement
b) Creating an index would definitely improve the performance
c)Tuning the SQL statement would solve the performance and is preferred over Index Creation
d)Optimizer may choose wrong index after creation of the index

6.

One screen dump of update termination .

7.

Sequence of Updates V1 & V2
a) both occur independently
b) first V1 and then v2
c)both simultaneously

8.

How many minimum V1 and V2 processes should be there?
If V1 process is only there and there are not V2 process then will V1 process will handle V2
updates as well ?? True/False

9.

Which of the foll. Traces can be started without restarting SAP system
a)Buffer Trace
b)SYSLOG Trace
c) Database Trace
d)Dispatcher Trace
e)Authorization

10. Analyse problem of system startup. Before anyone could login system stops . Check
using(multiple choice)
A)check sm21
b)/usr/sap/log directory
c)analyse database error log in details
d)check files in \usr\sap\<instance>instance_no\work folder
e)check files in sapbackup folder

11. Sapdba –check is used to (multiple choice)
a) check & displays the status of all datafiles along with complete path name
b)lists free space usage of index & tables
c)check for consistency of database
d)check for failed brbackup & brarchive backuop
e) check for values of active database parameters
12. Update optimizer statistics jobs does … (multiple choice)
a) Not update statistics of pool and cluster tables
b)update statistics of all transparent tables.
C) update statistics of all transparent tables who doesn’t have any statictics
D) Check DBSTATCO for updation of selected tables
E) updates only statictics for DBSTATCO
13. One screen dump of sapdba…
Archive stuck situation is possible
14. One screen dump of backup failure
trying to take offline backup while R/3 is on
15. One screen dump on TIME_LIMIT_EXCEED explanations and some questions.
16. What of the foll. Components are in mysap technology
a) SAPGUI
b)mysap database
c) ITS
d)SAPDB
e)
17. Can Wgate and Webserver be on different boxes.
18. From where can ITS be adminstrerd -multiple choice
a) from within SAP system
B) from web server
c) from ITS admin instance
19. Which of the following files are required for transport in to QAS system
a)transport.pfg
b)DOMAIN_DEV.cfg
c)TP_DOMAIN_<SID>.pfl
d)tpimport.pfg
20. Which is the sapbda & brarchive parameter file
21. Files Required to do full database & recovery

22. File backed up during online backup
23. File backup up during offline backup
24. Questions on RFC+CPIC time & Roll Wait Time
25. Uses of solution manager
26. Sapdba supports following (multiple choice)
a)2 step backup, first disk then to tape
b)Replication database
c)
27. Enque table is stored in (single choice)
a) Table Tlock in database
b)In Central instance at file level
c) in shared memory of the Central instance
d)In shared memory of each SAP instance
28. Enque/deque is related to
a) lock & unlocking at Database level
b)Lock & unlock of SAP transactions
c)
29. Locking process of SAP transactions carried out by
a) Dialog process
b)enque process
c)Message server process
30. A communication is to be done between 2 systems, such that none should use anonymous logon
for misuse to do remote logon to target system (multiple choice)
a) if you do not give RFC target system,system no etc. then a default Logon is performed on to
000/own system with user SAPCPIC.
b)To create a communication user in su01 and specify it in target destination
c)to keep logon details blank so that each user has to specify the detials every time a connection is
made
31. Which process first connects to the database ?
a) Dispatcher
b) Message server
c)Work process
d) SAPGUI
e)Gateway

32. What is the startup sequence of the SAP system?(multiple choice)
a)Database ,gateway ,dispatcher
b)Dispatcher ,gateway ,database
c)Database , dispatcher ,gateway
d)etc.. etc…
33. SCU0 along with SM30 can be used to (multiple choice)
a) compare clients within same system
b)compare different clients within different systems
c)Can be used to adjust customizing alongwith SM30
d)Can be used to comapare transaction tables
34. User in 000 used to logon to a newly installed system
a)sap* ,pass
b)sap*,19920706
c)ddic,06071992
d)ddic,19920706
c)system/pass
35. Password of SAP Dictionary user
a)DDIC,06071992
b)SAP*,pass
c)DDIC,19920706
d)SAP*,06071992
36. User/Password in newly created client
a)DDIC,06071992
b)SAP*,pass
c)DDIC,19920706
d)SAP*,06071992
37. With OPS$connect mechanism
a)OS user need not enter the password during database connection (T/F)
b)SAPDBA always uses ops$connect mechanism (T/F)
c)
d)
38. At then end of prepare phase which log file is created
a)R3up.log
b)prepare.log
c)Checks.log
d)upgrade.log
39. Allocation sequence of DIA work process
a)rollfirst,heap memory until exhausted,remaining of roll area,then Extended memory

b)rollfirst,Extended memory until quota reached,remaining of Roll area, then Heap memory
c)
40. 3-4 Questions on Device configuration …..( swap space,online logs,sapdata files on RAID5 or
RAID1., on same disks,.. etc)
41. To check & avoid block corruption
a) Use RMAN level 0 backup with SAP tools for backup
b)brbackup and brarchive always check for coruption
c)use –w use_dbv option with brbackup
d)oracle automatically checks for block corruption
42. How to create additional Sap service marketplace users (single choice)
a)one user Sapadm always there for every customer
b)At customer place the user with Administrator rights can create additional users
c)Create an oss message for creating additional users
d)has to check license& contract between SAP & customer
43. Buffering for a frequently updated table should be (single choice)
a)single record buffered
b)generic buffered
c)No buffering
c)Full buffering
44. For buffer synchronisation
a)In central system only way is to make bufrefmode=sendon/exeauto
b)In central instance and all dialog instance it should be bufrefmode=sendoff/exeauto
c) In central system it should be bufrefmode=sendoff/exeauto
d)In central system and all dialog system in exceptional conditions may be set as
bufrefmode=sendoff/exeauto
45. One screen dump on Load average of ST06 screen (Single Choice)
a)Load average is the Average CPU utilisation of the server
b)No. of CPU processes waiting in front of the CPU
c)
d)
46. Client copy
a)Remote copy creates huge file in operating system level in target systems (T/F)
b)Client copies can be done within same system(T/F)
c)Remote Client copy can be done using parallel processes (T/F)
d)
47. From external programs which process is used to trigger an event within an SAP system(Single
Choice)
a)sapxpg

b)gwrd
c)dpmon
d)sapevt
e)disp+work.exe
48. From SAP system which process is used to start external program & external commands (Single
Choice)
a)sapxpg
b)gwrd
c)dpmon
d)sapevt
e)disp+work.exe
49. How many spool work process can be configured (Single Choice)
a) one per sap instance
b)one per SAP system
c) more than one per SAP instance
d)one on the Central instance
50. In 3 system landscape from where the request can be imported in QAS system (Single Choice)
a)Only from DEV
b)Only from QAS
c)From all of the 3 systems
d)only from PRD
51. Some questions on TMS
a)TMSADM are automatically created in 000 client (T/F)
b)TMS* RFC’s are automatically generated
c)
52. SAPCONNECT
a)sapconnect only works with RFC destinations (T/F)
b)if you configure sapconnect in client 000 then it is available to all other clients(T/F)
c)for Auto reaction method sapconnect needs to be configured in client 000 (T/F)
d) for External mail configuration an connection has to be maintained in SCOT (T/F)
e)No extra setting required for Mail config(T/F)
f)An program has to be scheduled so that sapconnect send external mails . (T/F)
53. RZ20/RZ21
a) in order to add create new monitor set you have to switch to ‘Activate Maintenance function
mode’ (T/F)
b)It is recommended to copy Entire Monitor Set and then make changes to it (T/F)
c)It is recommended to keep monitor set with minimum monitoring objects so that loading time
of the set is minimum (T/F)
d)You should maintain the threshold values of the monitor set (T/F)

54. When you do a modification then (single choice)
a)The package /dev class of the object has to be changed to customer dev. Class
b) The package /dev class of the object is within that of SAP and cannot be changed
c)
d)
55. A customer wants to restrict modification what should he do
a) change to not modifiable in Se06 system change option (T/F)
b)avoid modification by using enhancements & Business Addins(T/F)
56. Further on modifications
a)Every modification has to be registered as SAP Service marketplace (T/F)
b)Every manual modification required Developer Acess key for the developer (T/F)
c)Modification request has to be sent to SAP thru FAX(T/F)
d) All modifications should be done in DEV system for techincal reasons (T/F)
e)If modifications done then further work is required during upgrades (T/F)
57. Use of native SQL
a) Will always improve the performance (T/F)
b)Will remove the programs from being database independent(T/F)
c) data accessed will not be buffered (T/F)
d)
58. Operation mode switch from BTC to DIA
a)if jobs are running in BTC process then operation modes will be switched after the jobs are
completed (T/F)
b) if jobs are running in BTC process then operation modes switch will be cancelled (T/F)
c)The running jobs would be temporarily put in suspended status (T/F)
d)

Oracle Database related questions from SAP Basis/Netweaver Certification
point of view

TADM51
1 - Is data written to the Oracle transaction logs (redo logs) before or
after the information is written in the database files?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A.
B.
C.

Before
After
Simultaneously

D.

The priority and sequence of database writes and transaction log
writes is controlled by
the parameter "dblg_after" in the
ORACLE initialization file.
E.
Randomly, sometimes before, sometimes after.
2 - What is the primary function of the $ORACLE HOME/saparch directory?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A.
B.
C.

The saparch directory is a work area for the R/3 database utilities.
The saparch directory is a work area for the R/3 Instance tasks.
The saparch directory is used as the holding area for online database
backups instead of writing them to tape.
D.
The saparch directory holds the archived database log files.
E.
The saparch directory contains the current database transaction log
files.
3 - Which customer specific specific files does sapdba save during an
offline backup to insure that the Oracle database could be restored to
a consistent state in case of problems?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A.
B.
C.

The Oracle executables files.
The Oracle database transaction log files and archived log files.
The tablespace data files, database transaction log files, and the
database control file.
D.
The database archived log files and R/3 Syslog file.
E.
The database transaction log files and the R/3 transport structures.
4 - Which customer specific files must be saved during an online database
backup to be able to restore the Oracle database to a consistent
state ?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

The Oracle executables, database parameter file, and the tablespace
data files.
The Oracle online redo log files and the database control file.
The archived log files, database control file and the Oracle
executables.
The tablespace data files, database control file, and all database
redo logs written during the online backup.
The tablespace data files, database control file, and the database
parameter file.

5 - What is the primary function of the $ORACLE_HOME/sapbackup directory?
Click on the button next to the right answer.

A.
B.
C.

D.
E.

The sapbackup directory is used for database backups which are
written to disk.
The sapbackup directory is a work area for the R/3 Instance tasks.
The sapbackup directory is the temporary holding area for the
database transaction logs (redo logs) before they are automatically
written to tape.
The sapbackup directory holds the archived database log files.
The sapbackup directory is used by the R/3 database utilities during
database reorganizations.

6 - What is the name of the brbackup and brarchive parameter file for an
Oracle database used by an R/3 Central Instance with SAP System ID C11?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

initC11.ini
initC11.ora
initC11.sap
sapdba.ini
initC11.dba

7 - When using a tape device that supports hardware compression which of
the following statements is true ?
Note: There is more than one right answer! Click on the buttons next to
the right answers.
A.

B.
C.

D.
E.

The tape_address and tape_address rew init<SID>.sap parameters are
automatically calculated based upon the value of the "compression"
parameter.
Drivers for hardware compression must be specified for the
tape_address and tape_address rew parameters in the init<SID>.sap file.
The compression ratio is calculated using "brbackup -k only"
immediately after installation and should be repeated at least once a
month to update compression ratios.
The compression ratio should be calculated using "brbackup -k only"
immediately after installation and never needs to be repeated.
The "compression" parameter should be set to "hardware" in the
init<SID>.sap file.

8

- Sapdba and the Computer Center Management System (CCMS) use operating
system level programs for certain database administration tasks. Which
program would be called by CCMS for backing up the data files for the
PSAPBTABD and PSAPBTABI tablespaces?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A.

Brarchive

B.
C.
D.
E.

Brconnect
sapdba –b
brbackup
backoffl

9
- What are the 3 different Oracle database startup modes?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

Warm, cold, maintenance
Mount, nomount, open
Online, offline, utility
Level 1, level 2, level 3
Normal, restrict, utility

10 - What are the 3 different Oracle database shutdown modes?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

Warm, cold, maintenance
Level 1, level 2, level 3
Normal, immediate, abort
Regular, active, passive
Standard, now, kill

11 - What is the primary purpose of the $ORACLE_HOME/sapreorg directory
(Windows NT: $ORACLE_HOME\sapreorg)?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A.
B.

The sapreorg directory is a work area for the R/3 database utilities.
The sapreorg directory is a work area for the R/3 Dialog Instance
Tasks.
C.
The sapreorg directory is used as the holding area for online
database backups instead of writing them to tape.
D.
The sapreorg directory holds the database transaction log files.
E.
The sapreorg directory contains the archived database log files.
12 - Based upon the information in the initial sapdba program menu, what
is the name of the parameter file used by Oracle when the database is
started?
The name of the Oracle parameter file is:spfilesid.ora, initsid.ora
Type the correct file name in the field provided.
13 - What is the purpose of the Oracle "OPS$connect" function?
Click on the button next to the right answer.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

OPS$connect authorization allows an operating system user to connect
to the database without being prompted for a password.
OPS$connect is an Oracle command enabling whoever executes it to
administer the database without using sqldba.
OPS$connect is used in Oracle Parallel Server installations to enable
remote database connections over a LAN.
OPS$connect authorization is required of all database users and is
required for connection to the database.
OPS$connect enables the R/3 System saposcol process to communicate
and exchange data
with the database.

14 - What is the name of the alert log file for an Oracle database using a
system identifier (SID) of C11?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

ora_log_C11.log
ora_log_C11.trc
alert_C11.log
alert_C11.trc
orasrv.log

15 - What happens if a table wants to allocate another extent but there is
not enough contiguous free space in the tablespace?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A.
B.

The extent is allocated in another tablespace.
The Oracle error message ORA-1653 is sent to the Syslog file and to
the ABAP/4 short dump.
C.
The extent is distributed across the free space that is available.
D.
Oracle dynamically reorganizes the tablespace to make all available
space contiguous.
E.
The database switches into maintenance mode and sends a system
message to the database administrator.

16 - What action needs to be taken when Oracle returns an ORA-1653 error,
failure to allocate an extent for a table in a specific tablespace?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A.

The tablespace should be moved to a faster disk so that Oracle can
find the extents quicker.
B.
The tablespace size should be increased by adding 1 or more
datafiles.

C.

This is an Oracle internal error message which should be registered
with Oracle immediately.
D.
The database must be shutdown immediately to avoid damage.
E.
The affected table should be dropped to avoid similar problems in the
future.
17 - Under which circumstances does a table/index have to be reorganized?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

If the extents belonging to the table/index are distributed across
several data files.
If a log switch occurs before a database commit is completed.
If the tablespace overflows during a redo log file switch.
If an archiver stuck situation occurs during a write to the
table/index.
If the table/index reaches the upper limit for the MAXEXTENTS
parameter value when attempting to allocate another extent.

18 - Which Oracle component dynamically maintains information about the
status of the database redo logs, database mode, names and paths of
database files, and is essential during a database recovery?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

The Oracle parameter file, init<SID>.ora.
Each tablespace data file contains this data for the whole database.
The Oracle control file, cntrl<SID>.dbf.
The SGA definition file, sgadef<SID>.def.
The sapdba parameter file, init<SID>.dba.

19 - An Instance error occurs when 1 or more Oracle background processes
become corrupted. What actions should the database administrator take
to correct the problem?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A.
B.
C.

This is a serious error. Call the Oracle hotline.
Shutdown the operating system and reinstall the Oracle software.
Shutdown abort and startup open. The SMON process will use the
current redo log files and checkpoint information from the control
files to execute an automatic instance recovery upon database startup.
D.
Shutdown the operating system and turn all hardware off. After the
hardware cools off start everything up again and execute Orainst using
the repair option.
E.
Restore all missing files, apply the offline redo logs, update the
control files, and execute the startup open command.

20 - Which files must be restored from tape to allow a full database
restore and recovery ?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

Database control file, tablespace data files, and the database alert
log.
Tablespace data files, database control file, and all archived
database transaction logs created since the last full backup.
$ORACLE_HOME, Oracle parameter file, tablespace data files.
Database control file, tablespace data files, R/3 Syslog, R/3
Transport directory.
Oracle parameter file, tablespace data files, and the Oracle control
file.

21 - The R/3 System Oracle database has 4 online redo logs, also known as
database transaction logs. Each online redo log has a mirrored copy.
What is the effect of a log file switch?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

The current online redo log gets copied to its mirrored copy, upon
completion the next online redo log becomes open for writing.
The database alternates between writing to the online and offline
redo log files.
The database switches between writing to the original redo log files
and the mirrored redo log files.
The current R/3 Syslog file gets copied to the saparch directory and
a new Syslog file is created.
The current online redo log gets closed and the next online redo log
gets opened for writing. The ARCH process gets triggered to begin
backing up the recently closed redo log.

22 - Which statement is true of online Oracle database backups ?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A.
B.
C.

D.
E.

Users may only read data and may not enter data until after the
backup is done.
Database transaction logs (online redo logs) are not written during
online backups.
The tablespace data files and control file comprise the complete
online backup and are all that is necessary for restoring the database
to a consistent status.
The database must be running in archivelog mode.
Online database backups are not supported by Oracle.

23 - Given Oracle database with system ID C11. If tablespace PSAPBTABD has
been extended 200 MB by adding another datafile which of the following
statements is true?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A.

B.
C.
D.
E.

In the event of a full database restore the new tablespace data file
will be automatically created based upon information in the initC11.ora
file.
All data files for PSAPBTABD should be backed up along with the
database control file to maintain database recoverability.
The database should be shutdown and started up again to register the
existence of the new file in the Oracle internal system tables.
The data files for PSAPBTABD, the control file, and the redo logs
must be backed up to maintain database recoverability.
An R3INST database copy should be run to create a clean copy of the
complete database.

24 - What is the highest priority when planning the distribution of the
database
transaction
logs,
mirrored
transaction
logs,
archived
transaction logs, and tablespace data files over multiple logical
device groups?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

Better performance through more hardware.
More flexibility in case of hardware failure.
Easier database backups and quicker restores.
Higher data security and easier administration.
To make the system physically more modular for transport reasons.

25 - Which of the following oracle parameters should never be modified in the
init<SID>.ora file?
Note: There is more than one right answer! Click on the buttons next to the
right answers.
A.
db_block_buffers
B.
db_block_size
C.
db_name
D.
controlfiles
E. shared_pool_size
26 - Which of the following configurations would have the slightest impact
upon data security and/or performance?
Click on the button next to the right answer.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

Operating system swap and Oracle tablespace data files installed on the
same physical disk(s).
Operating system swap and SAP kernel (executable files) installed on the
same physical disk(s).
Operating system swap and Oracle database transaction logs (redo logs)
installed on the same disk(s).
Operating system swap and the /usr/sap directory on the same physical
disk(s).
Oracle database archived log files (offline redo logs) accessed over a
shared (or NFS) directory connection.

27 - The physical separation of database logs from their mirror copies means?
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A.
B.
C.
D.

Using physically separate partitions of a physical disk.
Using physically separate disks.
Using physically separate disks in the same logical device group.
Using generic database utilities to split the flow of data between
randomly chosen operating system directories.
E.
Use of database specific utilities to fork log backups to 2 physically
separate backup media.
28 - Which of the following Oracle parameters should be modified in the
init<SID>.ora file to enlarge the shared memory usage for the Oracle
database instance?
Note: There is more than one right answer! Click on the buttons next to the
right answers.
A.
log_archive_dest
B.
db_block_size
C.
rollback_segments
D.
shared_pool_size
E.
db_block_buffers

29. brbackup tool can create a database backup when the database is up and
running or when it has been shutdown. During an online database backup
which of the following is TRUE? Click on the button next to the right
answer.

A. Users must stop entering data but may continue working using read-only
transactions.
B. Users must stop working because their work would be unrecoverable in case
of problems with the backup.
C.Users may continue working without interruption.

D.Power-users may continue working but data-entry users must log off.

E.Users must log off until the online backup is started but then may continue
working

30. Which of the following statements are correct in regard to using a
single run of
BRBACKUP to save both the database files and the
offline redo log files?
Note! More than one answer is correct. Please click on the buttons next to
the correct answers.
A.
BRARCHIVE is started immediately after the database backup is
complete: no further intervention by the database administrator is
necessary.
B.
This technique can only be used for offline database backups, not
online backups.
C.
The database backup and the backup of the offline redo log files must
fit on one tape because changing tapes is not supported.
D.
You can backup the database using multiple tape devices in parallel.
E.
The tapes used must have been initialized by BRBACKUP.

31. What happens during the startup of an Oracle database?
Note! More than one answer is correct. Please click on the buttons next to
the correct answers.
A.
The SGA is created in shared memory according to the parameter
settings in the configuration file init<SID>.ora.
B.
The Oracle background and shadow processes are created.
C.
In the mount phase, all copies of the control file are opened.
D.
If necessary, Oracle automatically performs an instance recovery.
E.
As the last step, the online redo log files are cleared and the data
files are opened.
32. What happens during the shutdown of an Oracle database?
Note! More than one answer is correct. Please click on the buttons next to
the correct answers.
A.
When you shutdown the database with the NORMAL option, the database
system disconnects all users before shutting down the database.
B.
When you shutdown the database with the NORMAL or IMMEDIATE option,
the database system writes a checkpoint before shutting down the
database.
C.
When you shutdown the database with the ABORT or IMMEDIATE option,
open transactions are rolled back before the database is shut down.
D.
When you shut down the database with the ABORT option, the R/3 system
is shut down, too.
E.
Shutting down the database with the ABORT option always requires an
instance recovery at the next database startup.

33. Which of the following statements express part of the SAP-recommended
strategy for creating and updating the table statistics used by the
cost-based optimizer?
Note! More than one answer is correct. Please click on the buttons next to
the correct answers.
A.
No statistics are created for R/3 pool and cluster tables.
B.
Statistics are created for all transparent tables that have no
statistics.
C.
The table DBSTATC can be used to trigger an exact computation of the
statistics of specific tables.
D.
The update for table statistics refreshes all transparent tables.
E.
The table DBSTATC can be used to detect which table statistics need
to be refreshed.
34. What happens if a table wants to allocate another extent but there is
not enough contiguous free space in the tablespace? Click on the button
next to the right answer.
A.
B.
C.
D.

Please click on the button next to the correct answer.
The extent is allocated in another tablespace.
The extent is distributed across the free space that is available.
The Oracle error message ORA 1653 is sent to the file SYSLOG and to
the ABAP short dump.
E.
Oracle dynamically reorganizes the tablespace to make all available
space contiguous.
F.
The database switches into maintenance mode and sends a system
message to the database administrator.

35. When the R/3 update task aborts with an Oracle error ORA1653 - failure
to allocate an extent for a table in a specific tablespace - what
action needs to be taken?
Note! More than one answer is correct. Please click on the buttons next to
the correct answers.
A.
The tablespace should be reorganized.
B.
The tablespace size should be increased by adding a new data file.
C.
The table should be reorganized.
D.
The storage parameter MAXEXTENTS must be increased.
E.
After the cause of the error has been removed, the R/3 update task
must be reactivated.
36. Which of the following checks are useful for database performance
monitoring?
Note! More than one answer is correct. Please click on the buttons next to
the correct answers.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

Checking that the CBO statistics are refreshed once a week according
to the strategy recommended by SAP.
Checking that the archive directory contains enough free space.
Checking the data buffer quality.
Checking the shared cursor cache for expensive SQL statements.
Checking for tables with more than 100 extents.

37. ___________ is used as default user when you can an SAP tool for
Oracle administration.
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

SYSTEM
SYSDBA
SYSOPER
SAP<SCHEMA-ID>
SIDADM

38. Name the standard Database users created in Oracle.
Note! More than one answer is correct. Please click on the buttons next to
the correct answers
A.
SIDADM
B.
ORASID
C.
SYS
D.
SAP<SCHEMA-ID>
E.
SYSTEM
39. The recommended method of changing the password of SAP<SCHEMA-ID> is
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

SQL> ALTER USER
SAP tool BRCONNECT
SQL > ALTER USER
SQLPLUS>CHANGE PASSWORD
SAP tool BRUSER

40. The Oracle tool to test the connection to the database with SID C11 ON
HOST twdf0505 is
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A.
TNSLISTENER
B.
lsnrctl start
C.
tnspingC11
D.
CONNECT
E.
BRCONNECT

41. Your daily backups are performed with automatic tape selection, no
volume for backup is specified. Which tapes will be accepted for backup
(assuming the tape lock period is expired in all cases.)
Note! More than one answer is correct. Please click on the buttons next to
the correct answers
A.
any labeled tape
B.
the tape labeled with the volume name you got from DB13, Goto à Tapes
needed.
C.
A tape labeled with volume name scratch
D.
Any unlabeled tape.
42. The BR*TOOLS profile init<DBSID>.sap can be edited by;
Click on the button next to the right answer.
A.
BRBACKUP
B.
BRARCHIVE
C.
BRTOOLS
D.
Operating system editor.
E.
None of the above.
43, To perform a complete database reset, you need one of the following
backups.
Note! More than one answer is correct. Please click on the buttons next to
the correct answers
A.
B.
C.
D.

complete offline backup
complete online backup
consistent online backup
backup of offline redo log files.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

1. When is data is written to the Oracle transaction logs (redo logs)?
Please click on the button next to the correct answer.
Sometimes before, sometimes after being written to the database files.
After being written to the database files.
At the same time as being written to the database files.
As specified by the parameter "dblg_after" in the ORACLE initialization file.
Before being written to the database files.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

2. During an offline backup, which customer files does sapdba save to ensure that the Oracle
database can be restored to an internally consistent state?
Please click on the button next to the correct answer.
Oracle executable files.
Oracle database transaction log files and offline redo log files.
Offline redo log files and the R/3 SYSLOG file.
Tablespace data files, database transaction log files, and the database control file.
Database transaction log files and R/3 transport structures.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

3. During an online database backup, which customer files must be saved to ensure that the
Oracle database can be restored to an internally consistent state?
Please click on the button next to the correct answer.
Tablespace data files, the database control file, and all database redo logs written during the
online backup.
Oracle online redo log files and the database control file.
Offline redo log files, the database control file, and the Oracle executables.
The Oracle executables, the database parameter file, and the tablespace data files.
The tablespace data files, the database control file, and the database parameter file.

B.
C.
D.
E.

4. What is the primary function of the directory $ORACLE_HOME/sapbackup?
Please click on the button next to the correct answer.
Storing database transaction logs (redo logs) temporarily before they are automatically
written to tape.
Providing a work area for R/3 Instance tasks.
Storing database backups which are written to disk.
Storing the offline redo log files.
Providing a work area for R/3 database utilities during database reorganizations.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

5. When an Oracle database is used by an R/3 System with SAP System ID C11, what is the
name of the file for brbackup and brarchive parameters?
Please click on the button next to the correct answer.
initC11.ini
initC11.sap
initC11.ora
sapdba.ini
initC11.dba

A.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

6. Which of the following statements is correct in regard to using the brbackup command to
backup database and non-database files?
Please click on the button next to the correct answer.
Brbackup is an improvement over all operating system level backup methods and is
recommended for regular backups.
Brbackup must be called from sapdba.
Non-SAP and non-Oracle subdirectories are backed-up through recursive calls.
Non-database files must be specified with their complete, absolute file names.
Brbackup's "all" option is used to backup the complete operating system, R/3 instance, and
the Oracle database.

7. What is the probable cause of the sapdba error indicated in this screen?
Please click on the button next to the correct answer.
An offline backup has been started but tablespaces are missing.
Users are still logged on to the R/3 instance.
The backup has aborted because there is no tape in the tape device.
The tape has not been initialized.
The backup has been terminated because brarchive is already running.

8. Which of the following statements are correct in regard to using a single run of BRBACKUP
to save both the database files and the offline redo log files?
Note! More than one answer is correct. Please click on the buttons next to the correct
answers.
BRARCHIVE is started immediately after the database backup is complete: no further
intervention by the database administrator is necessary.
This technique can only be used for offline database backups, not online backups.
The database backup and the backup of the offline redo log files must fit on one tape
because changing tapes is not supported.
You can backup the database using multiple tape devices in parallel.
The tapes used must have been initialized by BRBACKUP.

9. SAP recommends checking the database for corrupt data blocks at least once per backup
cycle.
How can this be done?
Note! More than one answer is correct. Please click on the buttons next to the correct
answers.
You can run the ABAP report RSORABLK at times of low system load.
You can export the complete database using the Oracle export utility.
You can run the command "sapdba -analyze PSAP%".
You can run the command "brbackup -t offline -m all -verify".
You can run the command "brrestore -w use_dbv" on a previously performed full database
backup.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

10. Which of the following strategies are supported by SAPDBA?
Note! More than one answer is correct. Please click on the buttons next to the correct
answers.
Standby database
Split mirror backup
Recovery of a lost table based on an export.
Two-level backup: first to disk, then to tape
Replication database

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

A.
B.
C.
D.

11. What is the primary purpose of the directory $ORACLE_HOME/sapreorg (Windows NT:
$ORACLE_HOME\sapreorg)?
Please click on the button next to the correct answer.
Storing the offline redo log files.
Providing a work area for R/3 dialog instance tasks.
Storing online database backups instead of writing them to tape.
Storing transaction log files.
Providing a work area for R/3 database utilities.

12. Which of the following statements is correct in regard to OPS$connect?
Please click on the button next to the correct answer.
OPS$connect authorization allows an operating system user to connect to the database
without being prompted for a password.
OPS$connect is an Oracle command enabling whoever executes it to administer the database
without using svrmgrl.
OPS$connect is used in Oracle Parallel Server installations to enable remote database
connections over a LAN.
OPS$connect authorization is required for all users connecting to the Oracle database.
OPS$connect enables the R/3 saposcol process to communicate and exchange data with the
Oracle database.

13. What happens during the startup of an Oracle database?
Note! More than one answer is correct. Please click on the buttons next to the correct
answers.
The SGA is created in shared memory according to the parameter settings in the
configuration file init<SID>.ora.
The Oracle background and shadow processes are created.
In the mount phase, all copies of the control file are opened.
If necessary, Oracle automatically performs an instance recovery.
As the last step, the online redo log files are cleared and the data files are opened.

14. What happens during the shutdown of an Oracle database?
Note! More than one answer is correct. Please click on the buttons next to the correct
answers.
When you shutdown the database with the NORMAL option, the database system disconnects
all users before shutting down the database.
When you shutdown the database with the NORMAL or IMMEDIATE option, the database
system writes a checkpoint before shutting down the database.
When you shutdown the database with the ABORT or IMMEDIATE option, open transactions are
rolled back before the database is shut down.
When you shut down the database with the ABORT option, the R/3 system is shut down, too.

E.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

Shutting down the database with the ABORT option always requires an instance recovery at
the next database startup.

15. Which of the following commands does SAP recommend running on a weekly basis to
update table statistics used by the Oracle cost-based optimizer?
Note! More than one answer is correct. Please click on the buttons next to the correct
answers.
sapdba -analyze PSAP%
analyze table <table name> estimate statistics sample 10 percent
sapdba -checkopt PSAP%
sapdba -analyze DBSTATCO
update statistics medium

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

16. Which of the following statements express part of the SAP-recommended strategy for
creating and updating the table statistics used by the cost-based optimizer?
Note! More than one answer is correct. Please click on the buttons next to the correct
answers.
No statistics are created for R/3 pool and cluster tables.
Statistics are created for all transparent tables that have no statistics.
The table DBSTATC can be used to trigger an exact computation of the statistics of specific
tables.
The update for table statistics refreshes all transparent tables.
The table DBSTATC can be used to detect which table statistics need to be refreshed.

17. Which of the following statements are correct in regard to index reorganization using
SAPDBA?
Note! More than one answer is correct. Please click on the buttons next to the correct
answers.
The reorganization can be done online using the "ALTER INDEX REBUILD" function without
danger to data security and consistency.
The reorganization can be done by calling the Oracle export/import utilities through the
SAPDBA reorganization menu.
The reorganization can be accelerated with the help of the Oracle PARALLEL QUERY
functionality.
SAPDBA prompts you to perform a backup before reorganizing indexes.
You can do a test import before the old index is dropped.

18. Which of the following statements are correct in regard to table reorganization using
SAPDBA?
Note! More than one answer is correct. Please click on the buttons next to the correct
answers.
The reorganization can be done using the 'CREATE TABLE AS SELECT' function.
SAPDBA offers using the Oracle SQL*Loader for the data import.
Reorganization of a table always includes the reorganization of all its indexes.
Reorganization of one large table can be performed by parallel processing using the tool
R/3chop and specifying multiple dump destinations for the data export.
After a reorganization with SAPDBA you should immediately update the table statistics
needed by the cost-based optimizer.

19. What is the name of the alert log file for an Oracle database used by an
R/3 System with SAP system ID "C11"?
Please click on the button next to the correct answer.
A.
ora_log_C11.log
B.
ora_log_C11.trc
C.
orasrv.log

D.
E.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.

alert_C11.trc
alert_C11.log

20. What happens if a table wants to allocate another extent but there is not enough
contiguous free space in the tablespace?
Please click on the button next to the correct answer.
The extent is allocated in another tablespace.
The extent is distributed across the free space that is available.
The Oracle error message ORA 1653 is sent to the file SYSLOG and to the ABAP short dump.
Oracle dynamically reorganizes the tablespace to make all available space contiguous.
The database switches into maintenance mode and sends a system message to the database
administrator.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

21. Based upon the archive status display shown, what may be concluded?
Please click on the button next to the correct answer.
The directory for the offline redo log files is almost out of space.
The R/3 central instance is not installed on the same computer as the database.
There are 206 database transaction logs and 19 offline redo log files.
The directory SAPARCH is approximately 20 MB in size.
There are no obvious problems.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

22. Which Oracle component dynamically maintains information about the status of the
database redo logs, the database mode, and the names and paths of database files, and is
essential during a database recovery?
Please click on the button next to the correct answer.
The Oracle parameter file, init<SID>.ora.
Each tablespace data file contains this data for the whole database.
The SGA definition file, sgadef<SID>.def.
The Oracle control file, cntrl<SID>.dbf.
The sapdba parameter file, init<SID>.dba.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

23. When the R/3 update task aborts with an Oracle error ORA1653 - failure to allocate an
extent for a table in a specific tablespace - what action needs to be taken?
Note! More than one answer is correct. Please click on the buttons next to the correct
answers.
The tablespace should be reorganized.
The tablespace size should be increased by adding a new data file.
The table should be reorganized.
The storage parameter MAXEXTENTS must be increased.
After the cause of the error has been removed, the R/3 update task must be reactivated.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

24. What action needs to be taken when a table tries to extend beyond the number of defined
MAXEXTENTS?
Please click on the button next to the correct answer.
You should run the command "sapdba -next".
The value of MAXEXTENTS must be increased manually by the database administrator.
If the table has already allocated 505 extents, the table must be reorganized.
With Oracle8 the value of MAXEXTENTS is automatically increased. No user action is required.
With Oracle8 no error occurs, because tables are allowed to have an unlimited number of
extents. No user action is required.

25. What is indicated by the Oracle database message "Checkpoint not complete" displayed in
this screen?

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

Note! More than one answer is correct. Please click on the buttons next to the correct
answers.
The database was corrupted because a checkpoint could not complete.
A log switch had to wait for a checkpoint to complete.
There was a temporary database standstill while waiting for a checkpoint to complete.
An archiver stuck situation occurred that prevented the ongoing checkpoint from completing.
The database system tried to reuse an online redo log that had not yet been copied to the
archive directory by the ARCH process.

26. Which of the following checks are useful for database performance monitoring?
Note! More than one answer is correct. Please click on the buttons next to the correct
answers.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

A.

B.
C.
D.
E.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

Checking that the CBO statistics are refreshed once a week according to the strategy
recommended by SAP.
Checking that the archive directory contains enough free space.
Checking the data buffer quality.
Checking the shared cursor cache for expensive SQL statements.
Checking for tables with more than 100 extents.

27. An instance error occurs when one or more Oracle background processes become
corrupted.
As the database administrator, what action should you take?
Please click on the button next to the correct answer.
Shutdown abort and startup open. The SMON process will use the current redo log files and
checkpoint information from the control files to execute an automatic instance recovery upon
database startup.
Shutdown the operating system and reinstall the Oracle software.
Call the Oracle hotline, as this is a serious error.
Shutdown the operating system and turn all hardware off. After the hardware cools off, start
everything up again and execute Orainst using the repair option.
Restore all missing files, apply the offline redo logs, update the control files, and execute the
startup open command.

28. The R/3 System Oracle database has four online redo logs, also known as database
transaction logs. Each online redo log has a mirrored copy. What is the effect of a log file
switch?
Please click on the button next to the correct answer.
The current online redo log is copied to its mirrored copy, then the next online redo log
becomes open for writing.
The database alternates between writing to the online and offline redo log files.
The database switches between writing to the original redo log files and the mirrored redo
log files.
The current online redo log is closed and the next online redo log becomes open for writing.
The ARCH process is triggered to begin backing up the recently closed redo log.
The current R/3 SYSLOG file is copied to the saparch directory and a new SYSLOG file is
created.

29. Which of the following statements is correct in regard to online Oracle database backups?
Please click on the button next to the correct answer.
A.
Users may only read data and may not enter data until after the backup is done.

B.
C.

The database must be running in archivelog mode.
The tablespace data files and control file comprise the complete online backup and are all
that is necessary for restoring the database to a consistent status.
D.
Database transaction logs (online redo logs) are not written during online backups.
E.
Online database backups are not supported by Oracle.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

30. In an Oracle database with system ID C11, if tablespace PSAPBTABD is extended by 200 MB
by adding another data file, which of the following statements is correct?
Please click on the button next to the correct answer.
To maintain database recoverability, all data files for PSAPBTABD and the database control
file should be backed up.
If a full database restore is performed, the new tablespace data file is automatically created
based on information in the file initC11.ora.
To register the existence of the new file in the Oracle internal system tables, the database
must be restarted.
To maintain database recoverability, the data files for PSAPBTABD, the control file, and the
redo logs must be backed up.
To create a clean copy of the complete database, an R3SETUP database copy should be run.

31. Which of the following statements are correct in regard to the options in the SAPDBA
restore/recovery menu?
Note! More than one answer is correct. Please click on the buttons next to the correct
answers.
Option "c - Reset database" does not allow database recovery after restoring the backup.
For option "c - Reset database", only offline backups can be used, not online backups.
For option "a- Partial restore and complete recovery", SAPDBA detects and restores only the
damaged data files.
After using the option "d - Restore one tablespace", only complete database recovery is
possible, no point-in-time recovery.
For option "b - Full restore and recovery", only full online or full offline backups can be used,
no partial backups.

32. When planning the distribution of the database transaction logs, mirrored transaction logs,
archived transaction logs, and tablespace data files over multiple logical device groups, what
is the highest priority?
Please click on the button next to the correct answer.
Better performance through more hardware.
More flexibility in case of hardware failure.
Easier database backups and quicker restores.
To make the system physically more modular for transport reasons.
Higher data security and easier administration.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

33. Which of the following oracle parameters should never be modified in the file
init<SID>.ora?
Note! More than one answer is correct. Please click on the buttons next to the correct
answers.
db_name
control_files
shared_pool_size
db_block_size
db_block_buffers

34. Which one of the following configurations has the least impact on data security and
performance?
Please click on the button next to the correct answer.
Operating system swap and Oracle tablespace data files installed on the same physical
disk(s).
Operating system swap and Oracle database transaction logs (redo logs) installed on the same
disk(s).
Operating system swap and SAP kernel (executable files) installed on the same physical
disk(s).
Operating system swap and the /usr/sap directory installed on the same physical disk(s).
Oracle offline redo log files accessed over a shared or Network File System directory
connection.

35. To enlarge the shared memory for the Oracle database instance, which of the following
Oracle parameters should be modified in the file init<SID>.ora?
Note! More than one answer is correct. Please click on the buttons next to the correct
answers.
db_block_buffers
log_archive_dest
shared_pool_size
rollback_segments
db_block_size

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

A.

B.
C.
D.
E.

36. Which of the following statements is correct in regard to the directory SAPARCH?
Please click on the button next to the correct answer.
A SAPARCH of approximately 300 MB is large enough to satisfy all R/3 customer requirements.
The size of SAPARCH is not critical; it does not matter, for example, if it is created relatively
small to save money on hardware.
SAPARCH must be at least as large as the largest database table.
SAPARCH must be at least as large as the largest tablespace.
SAPARCH should have several hundred MB for a demonstration or test system, and be
considerably larger (at least 1 GB) for a production system.

37. Based on SAP configuration guidelines for data security and performance, which of the
following statements is correct in regard to the configuration revealed by this screen?
(For Windows NT, the directory delimiters appear as " \ ".)
Please click on the button next to the correct answer.
This represents a secure configuration. Nothing could be done to improve the distribution of
components.
Mirror logs A and B represent a potential data security problem. The database is not capable
of being recovered.
The database redo logs on device 3 are in danger of accidentally being overwritten by the
operating system swap installed there. This represents a potential data security problem.
Disk I/O on device 4 may be unreasonably slow due to the mirror logs A and B being on the
same device as the database data disks.
The fact that SAPARCH is installed with the R/3 Transport structures on device 2 represents a
potential data security problem.

38. Based on SAP configuration guidelines for data security and performance, which of the
following statements is correct in regard to the configuration revealed by this screen?
(For Windows NT, the directory delimiters appear as " \ ".)
Please click on the button next to the correct answer.
This configuration represents a potential data security problem because having disks
configured for RAID 1 and disks configured for RAID 5 on one computer may lead to hardware
failure.
The database data files are installed in an non-recommended RAID 5 configuration,
potentially causing data security problems.
Installing the SAPARCH directory and the R/3 transport directory on the same device
represents a potential data security problem.
Installing the Oracle database transaction logs, origlogA and origlogB, on the same device
represents a critical data security problem.
This represents a secure configuration. The distribution of system components is reasonable
in regard to performance.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

39. Based on SAP configuration guidelines for data security and performance, which of the
following statements is correct in regard to the configuration revealed by this screen?
(For Windows NT, the directory delimiters appear as " \ ".)
Please click on the button next to the correct answer.
This configuration meets SAP data-security standards. The distribution of system components
is reasonable in regard to performance.
A significant performance improvement could be achieved by relocating origlogA and mirrlogB
together on one disk, and origlogB and mirrlogA together on another disk.
The installation of the directory SAPREORG on the same disk as mirrlogA and mirrlogB
represents a potential data security problem.
OriglogA and origlogB may increase in size exponentially, and should not be installed on the
same disk as the $ORACLE_HOME directory.
Installing the components sapdata1 to sapdata6 on disks of 4 GB is a waste of hardware
because these components never increase in size.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

40. Which of the following kinds of information are provided by the command "sapdba -check"?
Note! More than one answer is correct. Please click on the buttons next to the correct
answers.
Information about the last successful or failed backups.
Complete path names and file sizes for all data files.
Space-critical objects.
The tables and indexes with the most free space.
Values of all active database configuration parameters.
Here are some Transport questions:

1) Which of the following components indicate that R3 is a client / server system?
a. Multiple DB’s
b. Database server
c. 3 separate hardware servers (DB, applcn & presentation server)
d. Db service, app service & presentation service

2) Which of the following is not contained in R/3 DB?
a. The R/3 Repository
b. The R/3 kernel
c. Customer Data
d. Transaction data
e. Customizing Data
f. The ABAP dictionary
3) Which of the following is correct in regard to R/3 clients?
a. The R/3 client has it’s own customer data and programs which are not
accessible to other clients within the same R/3 system.
b. An R/3 client has all R/3 repository objects and client independent
customizing with all other clients in the R/3 system
c. An R/3 client shares customizing and Applcn data with other clients in the
same R/3 system
d. An R/3 client enables you to separate applcn data from customizing data
4) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to SAP Client Concept
a. All customizing settings are client independent
b. A client has unique set of applcn data
c. A client has it’s own repository objects

d. All customizing settings are client dependant
5) Which of the following strategies enables R/3 customers to avoid making
modifications to SAP Std objects?
a. Using Enhancement techs such as Program exits & menu exits
b. Modifying SAP delivered programs
c. Changing SAP std functionality using the IMG
d. Performing customizing to provide the required functionality
6) Which of the following statements are correct in regard to IMG?
a. The IMG consists of series of customizing activities for defining a Companies
Business process
b. The IMG is a online resource providing the necessary info and steps to help
you implementing the R/3 applcn Modules
c. IMG is client independent
d. All of the above
7) Which of the following strategies enables an Enterprise to meet its business needs by
changing or enhancing R/3 functionality
a. Maintaining application data using the Various R3 Business transactions in
the SAP Std
b. Using the ABAP workbench to create the read R/3 repository objects
c. Using customizing to modify R/3 programs after obtaining an access key from
OSS
d. Using customer Exits to enhance the functionality of existing SAP Objects
8) Which of the following statements are correct in regards to modifications
a. modification is a change to an SAP Std object
b. A modification must be registered using the SAP OSS (SSCR)
c. SAP recommends modification only if customer’s business meets cannot be
me by customizing enhancement techs or customer dev
d. All the above
9) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to the customizing
a. Customizing enables R/3 applcn process to be set to reflect a companies
business needs
b. Customizing can be performed only from within IMG
c. Customizing is necessary because R/3 delivered w/o Business process.
d. None of the above

10) Which of the following is correct in regard to R/3 repository
a. Customers can develop new repository objects using tools in the ABAP
workbench.
b. Customer developed repository objects reside in the R/3 repository alongside
std repository objects
c. Customers can create & assign new repository objects to a development class
d. All of the above
11) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to critical client roles as
recommended by SAP?
a. Customizing changes can be made in any client
b. All customizing & dev changes should be made in a single R/3 client
c. Repository object should be created and changed in R/3 Quality assurance
client (QAS)
d. Unit testing should take place in the customizing and dev client
12) Which of the following activities should not be performed within a system landscape
a. Customizing & dev changes are promoted to a QAS client before being
delivered to PRD
b. The R/3 system is upgraded to a new R/3 release
c. Dev changes are mad directly in the PRD client
d. Changes are assigned to a specific role
13) Which of the following benefits does the 3-system landscape recommended by SAP have?
a. Customizing and dev, testing, and prod activities take place in separate DB
environments and do not affect one another
b. Changes are tested in the QAS system and imported in the PRD system only
after verification
c. Client independent changes can be made in the DEV system w/o immediately
affecting the PRD client
d. All of the above
14) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to multiple R/3 clients?
a. All clients in the same R/3 system share the same R/3 repository and client independent
customizing settings
b. No more than one client in the same R/3 system should allow changes to
client independent customizing changes.
c. If a client allows for changes to client dependent customizing, the client
should also allow for changes to Client independent customizing objects
d. All of the above.

15) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to setup of 3-system landscape
a. There is only R/3 DB for the system landscape
b. One client should allow for the automatic recording of client dependent
customizing and client independent changes.
c. All R/3 systems have the same System ID (SID)
d. All clients must have unique client numbers
16) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to the CUST client
a. It should allow changes to client independent customizing, but not repository objects
b. It should automatically record all changes to customizing settings
c. It should not allow changes to client dependent and client independent
customizing settings
d. It should allow for all changes, but not require recording of changes to change request.
17) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to the 2-system landscape
a. It is not optimal because 3 is limited opportunity to test the transport of
changes from the DEV system to the PRD system
b. It allows for changes to Customizing in the PRD system
c. It is recommended by SAP because Customizing and DEV do not impact
QAS testing.
d. All of the above
18) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to Phase implementation.
a. All CUST changes made in PRD support system must also be made in the
DEV system
b. The system landscape requires 5 R/3 systems
c. Changes in the PRD support system do not have to be made in the DEV env
d. The system landscape needs an env that supports a PRD system with any reqd changes.
19) Which of the following statements is not valid in regard to global system landscape
a. A global template can be used for the roll out of corporate CUST settings and
DEV efforts
b. Management of different repository objects can be managed using name
spaces, and name ranges for the repository objects
c. Merging and CUST settings delivered by the corporate office with local
CUST efforts can easily be done using change requests
d. SAP provides different tools to aid the roll-out of a global template.
20) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to CUST and DEV changes?
a. all changes are recorded to task in CUST change request

b. the changes should be recorded to tasks in change requests for transport to other clients
and systems
c. the changes must be manually performed in every R/3 system
d. the changes can easily be made simultaneously in multiple clients.
21) Which of the following statements in regard to change requests is false?
a. The customizing organizer and the workbench organizer are tools used to view, create and
manager change request
b. A change request is a collection of tasks where developers and people performing
customizing record the changed they make.
c. All changes made as a result of IMG activities are recorded to customizing
change requests.
d. SAP recommends setting your R/3 system so that customizing changes made in the
customizing and development client are automatically recorded to change requests.
22) For which of the following activities is the TMS (tcode STMS) not designed?
a. Releasing change requests
b. Viewing import queues
c. Viewing log files generated by both the export process and the import process
d. Initiating the import process
23) Which of the following statements is correct after you have successfully imported change
request into the quality assurance system?
a. The change requests must be released again to be exported to the production system.
b. The data files containing the changed objects are deleted from the transport directory
c. The change requests need to be manually added to the import queue of the production
system
d. The change requests are automatically added to the import queue of the
production system.
24) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to the change requests in an import
queue?
a. They are sequenced according to their change request number.’
b. They are sequenced in the order in which they were exported from the
development system
c. They are sequenced according to the name of the user who released the requests
d. They are not sequenced by default, but arranged in a variety of ways using the TMS
25) Which of the following techniques can be used to transfer application data between two
PRD systems?

a. Recording transaction data to change requests
b. Using ALE to transfer application data
c. Using the client copy tool
d. All the above
26) Which of the following types of data transfer are possible within appropriate use of
interface technologies?
a. Transferring legacy data to an R/3 system
b. Transferring data between R/3 clients
c. Transferring data to non-SAP systems
d. Transporting change requests to multiple R/3 systems
27) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to user master data?
a. User master data can be transported in a change request
b. User master data is unique to each R/3 system, but is shared across clients in the same R/3
system.
c. A specific client copy option enables you to distribute user master data together with
authorization profile data
d. User master data included all user logon information, including the definition of
authorizations and profiles
28) Which of the following clients should u copy to create new clients and ensure that all data
from post installation processing is also copied?
a. a. Client 001
b. b. Client 001
c. c. Client 066
29) Which of the following is not a SAP recommended strategy for setting up a system
landscape
a. Using a client copy from the DEV system to set up your QAS and
PRD system when the change request strategy is not an option
b. Creating the PRD system as a combination of a client copy from the
QAS system and change request from the DEV system
c. Using the same setup strategy to establish both the QAS and PRD
systems
d. Setting up the QAS and PRD system by importing Change requests
prompted from the DEV system
30) Which of the following are correct in regard to setup of TMS?
a. The TMS should be setup when the DEV system is installed

b. The TMS should include all R/3 systems in the system landscape
even if the R/3 systems do not physically exist
c. The TMS is critical in establishing the Transport between the DEV &
QAS system
d. The TMS should be setup before the Change request is created in the
CUST and DEV client
31) Which of the following is correct in regard to system copy strategy
a. SAP recommends the system copy strategy because all CUST &
DEV objects are transferred
b. SAP does not recommend the system copy strategy because there is
no easy to eliminate the unwanted APPLCN data
c. A system copy is the easiest set of strategy recommended by SAP
d. A system copy eliminates the need for change requests for the entire
R/3 implementation
32) Which of the following activities is not necessary for exporting a change request
a. Documenting every task in the request
b. Releasing every task in the change request
c. Verification of the contents of the change request by the system
administrator
d. Unit testing the change request.
33) Which of the following is correct in regard to the task used in the change request that
record CUST & DEV changes
a. Task belongs to change request
b. Task can be used by several R/3 users
c. Task are direct responsibility of the Project leader
d. Task records only client specific changes
34) Which of the following indicates that the change request has been signed off after QAS
testing.
a. The change request has been released after unit testing.

.
b. The change request has been successfully imported into the QAS
system
c. The change request is added into the import queue of all other R/3
systems in the system landscape

d. The project leader communicates the approval of the change request
35) Which of the following is NOT an SAP recommendation
a. Imports into the QAS & PRD system should occur in the same
sequence.
b. Even if the import process is automatically scripted a technical
consultant or system admin should revise the result of the import
c. The project leader should manually add a change request to import
queue of the QAS system
d. Change request are imported in the same sequence that they were
exported from the DEV system
36) Which of the following is SAP’s recommendation on how to rush an emergency correction
into the PRD system
a. Make the changes directly in the PRD system
b. Transport the changes from the DEV system to QAS system & PRD
system using preliminary import
c. Make the change and use a client copy with change request to
distribute the changes into PRD
d. Make the change in the QAS system and transport using preliminary
import
37) Which of the following transport activities is not typically the responsibility of the system
admin
a. Importing change request into all clients within R/3 system
b. Verifying the success of import process
c. Releasing the change request
d. Assisting in solving either export or import errors
38) Which of the following does SAP provide a customer support?
a. R/3 release upgrade to provide new functionality
b. Support packs to correct identified problems in a specific R/3 release
c. R/3 notes to announce errors & corrections for reported problems
d. All of the above
39) The R/3 system ID (SID)
a. Must be unique for each system sharing the same transport directory
b. Must be unique for each system in the system landscape
c. Can start with a number
d. Can consist of any 3 char combination

40) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to the TRANS dir
a. There can be only one TRANS dir in a system landscape
b. All R/3 systems within Transport group share a common TRANS dir
c. In a system landscape using heterogeneous platforms it is not
possible to have a common TRANS dir
d. Only the PRD system can contain the TRANS dir
41) The Transport control program TP
a. Is stored in subdirectory bin of TRANS dir
b. Uses program R3TRANS to access the DB when transporting
changes
c. Cannot be used directly on the OS level
d. Depends on the settings of the transport profile
42) The transport profile
a. Is stored in subdirectory bin of TRANS dir
b. Contains comments and parameter settings that configure the transport control program TP
c. Is managed from within TMS as of release 4.5, but is modified with OS text editors in earlier
release
d. Contains only settings that are valid for all R/3 systems in the system landscape
43) The initialization procedure of the CTO
a. Is especially required after a system copy
b. Establishes the initial value for change request Ids
c. Is not mandatory for the purpose of enabling transports
d. Is performed automatically during R/3 installation by program R3setup
44) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to the settings governing changes to
repository objects
a. Only the customer name range should be modifiable in production systems.
b. Developments are possible in an R/3 system only if you have applied for a
development namespace from SAP
c. If the global change option is set to not modifiable, it nevertheless possible to make changes
in certain name spaces or clients that has their change option set to modifiable.
d. The global change option should always be set to not modifiable for the quality assurance
system and the production system.
45) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to the R/3 systems belonging to a
transport domain?

A. They all share the same transport directory
B. They are managed centrally using TMS
C. They belong to the same transport group
D. They must run on the same operating system and database platform
46) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to the domain controller?
A. It must be the production system
B. It occurs once in a transport domain
C. It occurs in each transport group
D. It can only be the R/3 system that was originally designated as the transport domain
controller
E. It should never be the production system due to the high system load that the domain
controller causes
47) Which of the following statements are correct in regard to the TMS?
A. It needs to be initialized only on the transport domain controller
B. It needs to be initialized only on the transport domain controller and the backup domain
controller
C. It must be initialized on every R/3 system
D. It must be set up before you can set up transport routes
48) Which of the following statements are correct in regard to the RFC destinations for TMS
connections?
A. They are generated automatically when a transport route is created
B. They are generated between the domain controller and each R/3 system in the transport
domain
C. They must be established manually before you can use the TMS
D. They are generated during the TMS initialization process
E. They are only needed for importing change requests
49) How is the actual system landscape, including R/3 system roles and relationships, defined
using the TMS?
A. By including all R/3 system in the transport domain
B. By configuring transport routes
C. By assigning a role to each R/3 system during the TMS initialization process
D. By designating real, virtual, and external R/3 systems
50) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to a consolidation route?
A. It is defined by an integration system and a consolidation system, and is
associated with a transport layer
B. It is created in the TMS by defining only an integration system and a

consolidation system
C. It is not necessarily required in a two-system landscape
D. It can be defined only once in a transport group
51) Which of the following statements re correct in regard to client-specific transport routes?
A. They are possible as of R/3 Release 4.0
B. They are possible only as of R/3 Release 4.5, and only if extended transport
control is activated
C. They are only allowed for target groups
D. They may not be used in conjunction with client-independent transport routes
52) After you create a new client entry in table T000, which of the following activities enables
you to provide the client with data?
A. A remote client copy to populate the client with data from a client in another R/3
system
B. A client transport to import data from a client in another R/3 system
C. A local client copy to import data from a client within the same R/3 system
D. All of the above
53) Which of the following cannot be used to restrict a client from certain activities?
A. The client role
B. The client-dependent change option
C. The client ID-number
D. A client restriction
E. The client-independent change option
54) Which of the following tasks can be performed using the client copy tools?
A. Merging application data from one client into another client
B. Copying only application data from one client to another client
C. Copying only Customizing data from one client to another client
D. All of the above
55) Which of the following tasks can be performed using the client copy profiles?
A. Scheduling a client copy to occur at a time when system use is low
B. Selecting the subset of application data that will be copied when a client copy is executed
C. Providing required user authorization for the use of client tools
D. Determining the data that will be copied when a client copy is executed
56) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to table logging?

A. Table logging should be used instead of change requests whenever possible
B. Table logging provides an audit history of who made what changes and when
C. Table logging does not negatively impact system resources
D. All of the above
57) Which of the following statements is false in regard to development classes?
A. Development classes facilitate project management by grouping similar
Repository objects
B. All Repository objects are assigned to a development class
C. A development class determines the transport route that a changed Repository object will
follow
D. A local object does not need a development class
58) Which of the following kinds of changes are transported using Workbench change requests?
A. Client-independent changes
B. Modifications to SAP-delivered objects
C. Changes made using the ABAP Editor and ABAP Dictionary
D. Repairs to R/3 Repository objects that originated in another R/3 System
E. All of the above
59) Which of the following data is not contained in the object list of a task?
A. The actual change made to the objects listed in the task
B. The list of changed objects recorded to the task
C. Whether the objects recorded to the task are locked
D. The complete Object Directory entry for the object
60) Which of the following statements are correct regarding repairs and
modifications?
A. Repairs are changes to SAP-delivered objects; modifications are changes to any object that
originated on an R/3 System other than the current R/3 System
B. A repair flag protects an R/3 Repository object against being overwritten by an import
C. All repairs are saved to Workbench change requests
D. A modification is a change to an SAP-delivered object
E. All of the above
61) Which of the following requirements must be met before you can change both
clientdependent and client-independent Customizing settings in a client?
A. The client settings must allow for changes to client-independent Customizing objects
B. The client role must be Production
C. The system change option must be set to Modifiable

D. The client settings must allow for changes to client-dependent Customizing
62) Which of the following statements are correct when project leaders and project team
members receive only the recommended authorizations?
A. Only developers can create change requests
B. Only project leaders can create change requests, and are therefore responsible for assigning
project team members to change requests
C. Project team members can create and release change requests
D. Project leaders can release change requests
63) Which of the following statements are correct with regard to Project IMGs?
A. The Project IMG provides access to the Customizing activities defined for a
particular project
B. Customizing is performed in the project IMG tree structure
C. The Project IMG enables you to display project status information and document
Customizing activities
D. All of the above
64) Which of the following activities are performed using the Customizing Organizer?
A. Viewing all Customizing change requests related to a particular user
B. Viewing all Workbench change requests related to a particular user
C. Viewing all change requests related to a particular user
D. Managing change requests you own or reviewing change requests in which you have assigned
tasks
65) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to Customizing?
A. All Customizing activities in the IMG activities can be transported
B. All changes resulting from IMG activities can be transported
C. All Customizing changes are automatically recorded to a change request if the client change
option is set to Automatic recording of changes
D. A Customizing activity may involve the creation of client-independent objects and therefore
requires Workbench change request
66) Which of the following activities are performed using client comparison tools?
A. Comparing the customizing settings of two R/3 clients in the same R/3 System or in a
different R/3 System
B. Adjusting the Customizing differences between two different R/3 clients
C. Transporting Customizing settings into the production client
D. Comparing the objects listed in the object list of a change request with an R/3 client

67) Which of the following is a prerequisite for copying client-dependent changes to a unit test
client using a client copy according to a transport request (Transaction SCC1)?
A. The change request has been released
B. The tasks have been released, but the change request has not
C. The tasks have been released after successful unit testing by the owner of the task
D. The change request has not been released
68) Which of the following are the results of releasing a task?
A. A data file is created in the transport directory and contains the objects recorded
in the change request
B. The object list and documentation for the task are copied to the change request
C. All objects recorded in the task are locked
D. You can no longer save changes to that task
69) Which of the following are result of releasing and exporting a change request?
A. A data file is created in the transport directory to contain copies of the objects recorded in
the change request
B. Versions are created in the version database for all R/3 Repository objects in the object list
of the change request
C. All repairs recorded in the change request are confirmed
D. You can no longer save changes to that change request
70) When you release a Customizing change request, you have the option to do which of the
following?
A. Release the change request to another Customizing change request
B. Schedule the release of the change request for a late time
C. Release the change request to a transportable change request
D. Initiate immediate release and export
71) Which of the following is a prerequisite for releasing a transportable change request?
A. There are no syntax errors in the ABAP programs recorded to the change request
B. You must own the tasks in the change request
C. All Repository objects in the change request are locked by the change request
D. The change request has documentation
72) The export process initiates which of the following activities?
A. The creation of files in the transport directory
B. The automatic import of change requests into the target system—for example, the quality
assurance system
C. The addition of the exported change request to the import buffer of the target system

D. The deletion of the change request within the R/3 System
73) Which of the following activities result in a version history for all Repository objects?
A. A Repository object is recorded to a change request
B. Change requests are imported into an R/3 System, and the transport
parametervers_at_imp is activated
C. A task containing a Repository object is released
D. A change request containing a Repository object is released
74) Which of the following statements are correct in regard to import queues?
A. Import queues are the TMS representation of the import buffer on the operating system
level
B. You have to manipulate import queues to transport change requests
C. Import queues should be closed before starting an import using TMS
D. You can import only an entire import queue
75) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to preliminary imports?
A. SAP recommends using preliminary imports rather than imports of entire queues.
B. Preliminary imports should be performed only in exceptional cases
C. Change requests imported as preliminary imports remain in the import queue
D. Change requests are deleted from the import queue after preliminary imports. This
prevents them from being imported gain with the next import of the entire import queue
76) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to imports into an R/3 System?
A. Imports can be performed only by using the start import functionality in the TMS
B. Imports can be performed only by using tp commands on the operating system level to
prepare the import queue and then using the start import functionality inthe TMS
C. Imports can be performed only by using tp commands at the operating system level
D. Imports can be performed by using either a tp command on the operating system level or
the TMS import functionality
77) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to transports between different
transport groups?
A. They are not possible
B. They can be performed only by using tp on the operating system level with special options
C. They can be performed using the TMS with special options provided by the
expert mode
D. They require you to adjust the corresponding import queues

78) Which of the following statements are correct in regard to transports between different
transport domains?
A. They are not possible
B. They require you to create a virtual system and a virtual transport directory
C. They require you to configure identical transport groups within the different transport
domains
D. They require you to create external systems and an external transport directory
E. They require you to adjust the corresponding import queues.
79) Which of the following statements re correct in regard to the transport control program tp?
A. To perform imports, tp must always be used directly on the operating system level
B. SAP recommends that you use the TMS instead of tp to perform imports
C. tp is responsible for exporting and importing objects from and to R/3 Systems
D. tp does not observe the sequence of change requests in the import queue when performing
imports
80) Which of the following statements are correct in regard to import queues and import
buffers?
A. Import queues are TMS representations in R/3 of the import buffer files on the operating
system level
B. Import queues and import buffers are completely independent of each other
C. Import buffers have to be manipulated before imports can be performed on the operating
system level
D. Manipulating import buffers may cause serious inconsistencies and should be performed only
in exceptional cases.
81) Which of the following statements are correct in regard to the import options formerly
known as unconditional modes?
A. Import options cannot be used when imports are performed on the operating system level
using tp.
B. Import options are used to cause specific rules of the Change and Transport System (CTS) to
be ignored
C. Import options must be used when importing into multiple clients using tp.
D. Import options can be selected in the TMS using the expert mode
82) Which of the following statements are correct in regard to the sequence of processing
steps tp follows when performing imports?
A. tp collectively processes each import step for all change requests in an import queue before
proceeding with the next import step

B. tp processes all import steps for a single request before proceeding to the next change
request
C. The processing sequence followed by tp ensures that when a change request with a faulty
object is followed in the import queue by a change request with the corrected object, the
faulty object will not affect the runtime environment of the target system
D. tp imports and activates ABAP Dictionary structures prior to the main import phase to
ensure that the current structures are able to receive new data during the main import phase.
83) Which of the following statements are correct in regard to troubleshooting imports?
A. In R/3, you cannot display log files that do not depend on a specific request. For example,
you cannot display log files related to generic import steps, such as structure conversion.
B. SAP recommends that you check the SLOG file and the ALOG file before
checking the single step log files.
C. By default, all return codes greater than eight cause tp to abort a running import
D. tp is the only transport tool that uses return codes.
84) Which of the following statements are correct in regard to buffer synchronization?
A. Transport activities do not affect buffer synchronization
B. Imports affect buffer synchronization even in central R/3 systems
C. R3trans can invalidate buffer content
D. Importing data into a production system can significantly impact performance, because
some buffer content may be invalidated and reloaded. This causes high system load
E. Importing programs and ABAP Dictionary data cannot cause inconsistencies in the target
system, even if the programs or data affect running programs and their environment
85) Which of the following statements are correct in regard to the interaction between
transport tools?
A. During exports, tp calls R3trans to access the database of the source system and
extract the objects to be transported
B. tp triggers the transport daemon RDDIMPDP in R/3 using the operating system toolsapevt
C. Using the tables TRBAT and TRJOB, tp communicates with ABAP programs
involved in the transport process
D. tp communicates with only RDDIMPDP
86) Which of the following statements are correct in regard to the R/3 Release strategy?
A. Functional Releases are automatically shipped to all customers
B. Correction Releases provide only corrections and no new functionality with
respect to the previous R/3 Functional Release
C. Functional Releases receive only limited OCS maintenance; that is, only very urgent
corrections are available as Support Packages
D. R/3 Release upgrades are possible only for Correction Releases

87) Which of the following statements are correct in regard to Support Packages?
A. Support Packages change the SAP standard of your R/3 System in advance of the next R/3
Release upgrade
B. You can apply all types of Support Packages to all R/3 installations, regardless of the
components used in the installation
C. Support Packages are available only to customers who are participants in the First Customer
Shipment (FCS) program
D. Different types of Support Packages may be required for R/3 Installations with different
components
88) Which of the following statements are correct in regard to the SAP Patch Manager?
A. The SAP Patch Manager ensures that Support Packages are applied in the correct sequence
B. The SAP Patch Manager does not check whether the type of Support Package you wish to
apply is appropriate for your R/3 installation. It is up to you to decide whether, for example,
you require a Conflict Resolution Transport.
C. The SAP Patch Manager does not offer you the chance to protect SAP objects that you have
modified. These objects are automatically overwritten.
D. The SAP Patch Manager automatically prompts you to call the modification
adjustment Transactions SPDD or SPAU if necessary
89) Which of the following statements are correct in regard to R/3 Release upgrades?
A. Objects in the customer namespace are not overwritten
B. A Repository switch is the replacement of your current R/3 Repository by the R/3 Repository
in the new R/3 Release
C. All customer modifications to ABAP Dictionary object are lost
D. Customer modifications to SAP objects that you want to preserve must be
transferred to the new Release through the modification adjustment process
90) Which of the following statements are correct in regard to the modification adjustment
process?
A. Transaction SPAU is used for most ABAP Dictionary objects
B. Transaction SPDD is used for most ABAP Dictionary objects
C. Not using Transaction SPDD where applicable may cause data loss
D. During modification adjustment, you must choose to return to the SAP standard
1.

The program SAPSTART reads the:

a.

User Profile.

b.

Instance Profile

c.

Start Profile

d.

Default Profile.

e.

All of the above

2.

Which of the following is a true statement?

a.

saposcol is started directly from the startsap script.

b.

Sapstart creates the dispatcher, collector, and the sender.

c.

The UNIX init process has the process ID 1.

d.

The dispatcher creates child processes including the gateway reader.

e.

All of the above.

3.

Which of the following write to the startdb.log?

a.

The Oracle start utility.

b.

sapdba.

c.

The Oracle alert script called by startsap.

d.

The script startdb called by startsap.

e.

All of the above.

4.

The standard error files of SAPSTART are written to :

a.

dev_disp.

b.

dev_ms.

c.

dev_w0.

d.

sapstart.log.

e.

None of the above.

5.

Which of the following is read first by the dispatcher during startup of an R/3 instance?

a.

The default profile.

b.

The instance profile.

c.

The start profile.

d.

The kernel instance parameters.

e.

The start parameters stored on database tables.

6.

Which of the following statements are true?:

a.

There must be 2 dialog workprocesses defined on each R/3 instance.

b.

The background scheduler uses a dialog workprocess.

c.

A minimum of 2 background workprocesses are required for the transport system.

d.

The combination of Job# and Job name make a job unique in the sytem.

e.

All of the above.

7.

The background scheduler:

a.

checks the job-scheduling table.

b.

checks jobs scheduled on the event-based job table.

c.

is only active on R/3 instances that have background workprocesses.

d.

e.

8.

when activated, passes control to the dispatcher which assigns a
BTC wp.
All of the above.

Which of the following are true statements?

a.

If a target server is designated on a background job, there will be no automatic workload
balancing for that job.

b.

Jobs that have been selected for execution but cannot run because a BTC workprocess is
not available, may be selected for execution by another server when that server’s background
scheduler starts.

c.

For event-based jobs, the message server checks its table of servers to determine where the
available BTC work processes are and then selects an appropiate server to service the request.

d.

If immediate or event-based jobs are cannot be executed due to lack of resources, they are
placed in the job scheduling table and processed as date/time scheduled jobs.

e.

None of the above.

9.
a.

Operation modes:
are used to reserve background workprocesses for class C jobs.

b.
c.

cannot be activated manually.
are used to change the distribution of dialog and background work processes without having
to start and stop the R/3 instance.

d.

stop jobs that are running when the switch occurs.

e.

All of the above.

10.

To trigger an event on an external system, the following operating system executable is
needed:

a.

sapxpg

b.

sapxpg and sapevt

c.

sapevt

d.

sapxpg and RFC

e.

SAPCPIC

11.

To prevent automatic unlocking of user records at midnight, set the following instance profile
parameter to 0:

a.

login/fails_to_user_lockout.

b.

login/failed_user_auto_unlock.

c.

login/failed_user_lock_reset .

d.

login/automatic_reset.

e.

None of the above.

12.

S_tcode:

a.

is an Object class.

b.

is an SAP authorization.

c.

is an SAP profile.

d.

is an SAP authorzation object.

e.

is checked at transaction start.

13.

The R/3 spool system stores the following information for spool requests in the R/3
database:

a.

Origin of the request.

b.

The Logical printer.

c.

The IP address of the network printer that printed the request.

d.

Author of the print request.

e.

Date the request was created.

14.

TemSe:

a.

can only be stored in the RDBMS.

b.

stores spool request data.

c.

stores the print ready output stream before it is sent to the OS spooler.

d.

is automatically reorganized by an event-based background job.

e.

None of the above.

15.

Which of the following directories holds the local system log?

a.

/usr/sap/<SID>/<instance name>/work

b.

/usr/sap/<SID>/<instance name>/data

c.

/usr/sap/<SID>/<instance name>/log/SLOG<instance number>

d.

/usr/sap/<SID>/SYS/log/SLOG<instance number>

e.

None of the above.

16.

Which of the following is a true statement ?

a.

the saposcol writes data in the local instance STAT file.

b.

the sapocol must be running in order to start an R/3 instance.

c.

the saposcol is an ABAP program that must be run hourly.

d.
e.

17.

the saposcol and collector_for_perforrmance_monitor read entries in table TCOLL to
determine what collector programs must be run each day.
All of the above.

Which of the following are true statements?

a.

A logon group is a group of R/3 instances.

b.

Logon groups enable the distribution of workload on R/3 instances more efficiently.

c.

If properly configured, logon groups contribute to better overall system performance.

d.

A user will automatically be routed to the instance with the best performance if the user
logs on to a logon group.

e.

All of the above.

18.

Which of the following transaction codes can be used to update instance profile parameters?:

a.

TU02

b.

RZ11

c.

SA38

d.

RZ10.

e.

All of the above.

19.

Which of the following programs delete old spool requests?:

a.

RSPO1043

b.

RSUSR003

c.

RSPARAM.

d.

RSPO1041

e.

RSCOLL00

Software Logistics
Mark each statement as true or false. If the statement is false, correct it or explain why.
1.

Each R/3 client is stored in separate tables from other clients.

2.

Two different R/3 systems must utilize two different databases, but can reside on the same
host.

3.

The term “customizing” generally refers to the configuration of entries in a series of tables
that affect how the R/3 applications (such as FI, SD, MM) function.

4.

Customizing activities are generally performed through the Implementation Guide, or “IMG”.

5.

The IMG is considered part of the ABAP Development Workbench.

6.

The change management roles of Project Team Leader or Project Team Member are
enforceable through standard authorizations in R/3.

7.

Change Requests do not actually store changes, they only record pointers to changed objects.

8.

SAP-owned objects are never considered originals in a customer’s R/3 system.

9.

Data is exported from the database whenever a Task is released to a Change Request.

10. All users making customizing changes through the IMG must register through OSS.

11. If registration of an object is required, it is also required in the Quality Assurance and
Production systems before the object is imported using tp.

12. Once a new client number has been defined in table T000, it is possible to log into that client
using SAP*/PASS without performing any kind of client copy action.

13. A client transport involves the creation of one or more Change Request-type lists.

14. A client transport must always involve the transport of client-independent customizing.

15. The client copy is a “pull” process; that is, you copy data from another client intothe client
that the copy is initiated from.

16. It is possible to copy application data without customizing data when performing a client copy.

17. The term “application data” refers to both master file data and transaction data.

18. Client independent customizing tables have a Delivery Class ‘C’.

19. The DOMAIN.pfl file is automatically created by the TMS system when a new Transport domain
is created.

20. The RFC connection TMSADM allows for the update of information from one system to another
in a TMS domain.

Select all that apply:
1.

Customizing changes are automatically recorded in a change request ________.
a. always.
b. only if the customizing change has an associated development class .
c. only if the user has the Project Team Leader authorization.
d. only if indicated by the client change option settings in table T000.

2.

Registration of an object through SSCR is required __________.
a. each time a given Repository object is modified.
b. each time a given customer-owned object is created.
c. only the first time a given SAP-owned object is modified.
d. only the first time a given SAP-owned object is transported.

3.

If the client change option is Automatic recording of changes and a Project Team Member
without the authorization to create change requests wants to save a customizing change but
does not have an open (modifiable) Task in a Customizing Change Request, what happens?
a. A Change Request is automatically created.
b. A Task is created in another team member’s Change Request.
c. The user must exit the customizing transaction without saving the change.
d. The above scenario could never occur.

4.

In SAP’s recommended project roles, the role of Project Team Leader _________.
a. does not need to be assigned to someone who is actually a project manager.
b. is the role that most, if not all, users should receive.
c. has the ability to create and release Change Requests.
d. has the ability to create, but not release, Change Requests.

5.

Under what conditions may the number range values be reset to initial values in the target
client during a client copy? (Select only one.)
a. The number range values are always reset.
b. Only if the client copy involves customizing data without application data.
c. Only if the client copy involves customizing and application data.
d. The number range values may never reset.

6.

The Import process of moving Change Requests into another system, whether from STMS or
from the OS
a.
b.
c.
d.

7.

requires proper authorization for the action on the target system.
defines and executes a background job in R/3 specifically to perform the desired actions.
requires that the TRBAT and TRJOB tables be empty on the target system.
executes R3TRANS .

Import logs can be viewed within R/3 from:
a. the Development system only.
b. the Development and QA systems only.
c. any system in the Transport Domain .
d. Import logs cannot be viewed from within R/3; you must go to the operating system.

8.

What is the purpose of the Data Dictionary adjustment tool used during an upgrade?
a. allow customer-added fields to be re-added to the new table definition.
b. prevent loss of data.
c. convert customer business application data before the upgrade to allow for adjustments
needed for legal requirements.
d. there are no tools to adjust the Data Dictionary during an upgrade.

9.

Although you will typically perform a full backup after completion of an upgrade, which
upgrade strategies require an offline backup?
a. A_on
b. A_off
c. A_switch

10. There is a debate about whether a given table contains customizing data orapplication data.
How can you obtain the answer? (Select only one.)
a. Find out which development class the table belongs to.
b. Examine the table’s delivery class in SE11.
c. All customizing tables are cluster tables.
d. It is not possible to tell conclusively.
11. When should the SAPGUI version be upgraded? (Select only one.)
a. After completion of the R/3 system upgrade.
b. Before start of the R/3 system upgrade.
c. The R/3 system upgrade automatically upgrades the SAPGUI for you.
d. Only after all systems in the TMS domain have been upgraded.
12. What objects will be identified for adjustment in the upgrade adjustment tools?
a. All customer-owned objects.
b. All SAP-owned objects.
c. Only customer objects that have been modified since the last upgrade.
d. Only SAP-owned objects that have been modified since the last upgrade.

a.
b.
c.
d.

a.
b.
c.
d.

13. With respect to client/server technology, the R/3 System requires
multiple clients and servers.
a database server only.
three separate servers providing database, application and presentation services.
a database layer, an application layer, and a presentation layer.
14. The R/3 database houses which of the following:
the R/3 Repository
transaction data
customizing data
all of the above

15. Which statement best describes an R/3 client?
a. The R/3 client is an organizational independent unit in an R/3 System that has its own set of
customer data and programs not accessible to other clients with the same R/3 System.
b. An R/3 client has its own set of application, customizing and user data. It shares all Repository
objects and client-independent customizing with all other clients in the same R/3 System.
c. R/3 clients provide a method by which you can separate application data from customizing
data.
d. An R/3 client contains system specific data and therefore can never be transported to another
system.

a.
b.
c.
d.

16. Which of the following statements concerning SAP’s client
concept are correct?
All customizing settings are client-independent.
A client has a unique set of user data.
A client has its own Repository objects.
All Customizing changes must be transported in transportable change requests.

a.
b.
c.
d.

17. Change requests in an import queue are
sequenced according to their change request number.
sequenced in the order in which they were exported from the development system.
ordered according the user who released the requests.
not sequenced by default but can be ordered by user or objects based on TMS settings.

a.
b.
c.
d.

18. After change requests are successfully imported into the quality assurance system,
the change request must be released and exported to the production system.
the data files containing the extracted changes are deleted from the common transport
directory.
the change requests need to be manually added to the import queue of the production
system.
the change requests are automatically added to the import queue of the production system.
19. In TMS there are 2 types of transport routes:
a. CUST and SYST.
b. Workbench and Customizing.
c. Consolidation and Delivery.
d. Local and Transportable.

20. Which of the following are found in the usr/sap/trans/bin directory?

a.
b.
c.
d.

DOMAIN.CFG
ALOG.
cofiles.
SLOG.

The file saplogon.ini:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

2.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

3.
a.
b.
c.
d.

Is physically stored on the application server of the R/3 system.
Contains a list of message servers for R/3 systems.
is maintained and sorted each time a new entry for a an R/3 system is created or changed using
the EDIT button on the saplogon menu.
Is installed when the dispatcher creates a dialog workprocess
Is installed on frontend servers that are using Sapgui for Windows.

The file sapmsg.ini:
Is physically stored on the application server of the R/3 system.
Contains a list of message servers for R/3 systems.
Is read whenever a logon group is selected from within SAPLOGON.
Is maintained implicitly when editing in SAPLOGON.
Is only installed on frontend servers that are using Sapgui for HTML.

The file saproute.ini:
Is physically stored on the application server of the R/3 system.
Contains the SAPROUTTAB.
Contains a list of saprouters that can be selected in SAPLOGON.
Is maintained implicitly when editing in SAPLOGON.

e.

4.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

5.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

6.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

7.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

8.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Is only installed on frontend servers that are using Sapgui for HTML.

The logon group that a user logs onto is:
Determined by the transaction SMLG.
Not determined on the R/3 system.
Specified in the user’s master record and can be maintained in Transaction code SU01.
Created when the user’s master record is activated.
Determined at the frontend.

Which of the following statements are true regarding SAPROUTER?
SAProuter reads a table that will allow or deny connections from other systems.
SAProuter is a program.
SAProuter acts as an application level gateway (proxy).
SAProuter must be implemented on the Central Instance.
SAProuter is loaded automatically on the frontend server when the user calls SAPGUI.

Which of the following statements are true regarding SAPROUTTAB?
SAProuttab is a route permission table.
A SAProuttab must be defined for each SAProuter.
SAProuttab may never be changed once it is loaded.
SAProuttab contains a list of host names / IP addresses for a source and destination host.
If no SAProuttab is found, SAProuter terminates with an error message.

Which of the following profile parameters are needed to use the Security Audit Log?
rsau/enable.
rsau/local/file.
rdisp/security_log.
rsau/max_diskspace/local.
rsau/selection_slots.

The Security Audit Log produces a report on the activities that have been recorded in
the audit file. The following information is included on the report:
user.
time.
client.
tcode.
ABAP short dumps.

9.

The ITS Administration instance is used for :

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

managing ITS instances
monitoring database performance
configuring file and network security
maintaining R/3 instance profile parameters
viewing log and trace files

10.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

The Workplace server provides the following functions:
CUA – Central User Administration
monitoring database performance
RFC management – the WPS maintains an RFC connection to all mySAP.com components or
applications that can be accessed in relation to a users role.
URL generation
ITS address management

11.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Which of the following are true regarding Logical systems?
A logical system name must be identical to the database name.
Each component in the system must be registered as a logical system on the WPS.
All logical systems must be defined in every SAP participating system.
Logical system names must be unique in the system.
Logical system names are only used for Workplace functions.

12.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

13.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

14.
a.
b.

File security determines who is allowed to access ITS files.
What are the levels of file security supported by ITS ?
Everyone
ITSADMIN+ITSUSER
GROUP
<SID>ADMIN
ITSADMIN

The Workplace server should be the most available server in your landscape
because:
it holds all the clients in your system
it is always the domain controller
it is used for logon to all other systems
it is always used for customizing development work
all TMS domains must be created from the Workplace Server

With Cental User Administration
Parts of a user master record can be maintained locally.
RFC connections must exist from the local system to the central system.

c.
d.
e.

15.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

16.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

17.

There is maximum of 100 user logons permitted.
One client must be assigned to only one logical system.
RFC connections must exist from the central system to the local system.

With Central User Administration the following data can be distributed:
User master data such as address, defaults, and parameters IDs
Authorization object definitions
Activity groups
Initial password
Logon data

With Central User Administration
It is possible to handle locks globally.
Locks cannot be handled globally.
It is possible to handle locks locally.
Locks cannot be handled locally.
User records can never become locked.

ITS Administration is a controlling and monitoring tool that supports:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

managing ITS instances
monitoring database performance
configuring file and network security
maintaining R/3 instance profile parameters
viewing log and trace files

18.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

The Ready to Run solution includes the:
operating system installation
database installation
Business Warehouse installation
Business Connector installation
SAP R/3 system installation

19.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

The mySAP.com Workplace features:
Single Sign-on capabilty
Enterprise portal
An ITS server running on each SAP component system including R/3, BW and APO
Standard Internet Browser Interface
EnjoySAP design

20.
a.
b.
c.
d.

The scalable mySAP.com Workplace Middleware provides:
A Ready to Run Business Connector component
The execution of Mini-apps
A drag and relate server to handle drag and relate requests
The ITS

e.

SAPGUI for Windows

21.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Which of the following statements are true regarding Mini-apps?
The role of the user determines which mini-apps are pushed to the screen.
Users can modify mini-apps to suit their needs.
Mini-apps can integrate information from third-party software products.
Mini-apps are in the launchpad area of the mySAP.com Workplace
Mini-apps are assigned using a URL definition.

22.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Which of the following are single sign-on methods?
Digital certificate
Cookie in Workplace
SAPGUI for HTML
SAPROUTTER
MYSAPSSO

23.
a.

Which of the following are true regarding transports in the Workplace environment?
The Workplace server should never be used as the central transport domain
controller.
In the Workplace environment, only one transport directory is permitted.
Single roles are created on the Development system and then transported to the
Quality Assurance system and the Production system using the SAP Transport
system, TMS.
Single roles are client dependent objects.
MIME files and HTML templates cannot be transported using the SAP Transport
system and must be created on each system separately.

b.
c.

d.
e.

Select only one answer for the following:

24.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

The Workplace middleware is started and stopped from:
the database
the ITS
The webserver
SAPGUI for HTML
The central instance

25.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

The communication between the WGATE and AGATE is enabled by:
WebRFC
Dcomm Connector
TCP/IP
HTTP
HTML

26.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

In CUA, ALE uses _____ to distribute data.
WebRFC
Dcomm Connector
Drag and Relate
IDOCs
EDI

27.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Every logical system in the Workplace environment must have a separate ________.
virtual ITS installation.
virtual R/3 Installation.
database server.
Central instance
virtual WebServer

28.

All the components of a Web transaction required outside the SAP system, such as
HTML Business templates and MIME objects, can be maintained with ___________.
SAPGUI for JAVA
The SAP @ WEB studio
The BABI Interface for HTML
The Dcomm Connector
The WebRFC BAPI interface

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
1.

Which of the following are Oracle start-up phases:
a. Nomount
b. Mount
c. Open
d. Abort
e. Immediate

2.

3.

Which of the following are Oracle shut-down phases:
a. Shutdown open
b. Shutdown abort
c. Shutdown immediate
d. Shutdown normal
e. Shutdown mount
Oracle database data is stored in
a. 80 k blocks
b. 16 k blocks
c. 8 k blocks
d. 10 k blocks
e. 2 k blocks

4.

The Oracle database parameter file is:
a. Init<SID>.sap
b. Init<SID>.dba
c. Init<SID>.ora
d. ORA<SID>.ora
e. SYS<SID>.ora

5.

There is an ORACLE shadow process for:
a. Each R/3 dispatcher only
b. Each R/3 enqueue process only
c. Each R/3 workprocess
d. Each R/3 message server only
e. None of the above. Oracle does not use shadow processes.

6.

Each R/3 workprocess:
a. Connects to the database as one database user, SAPR3
b. Handles database requests for the different R/3 system users
c. Can reconnect to the database
d. Connects to the database as one database user, R3USER

7.

SAPDBA :
a.
Is an R/3 database maintenance tool
b.
Is an Oracle process
d. Is an R/3 tablespace
e. Requires that R/3 be up and active in order to function.

8. Which of the following are true?
a. An R/3 system <SID> has one database
b. An R/3 system must have more than one R/3 instance.

c. R/3 workprocesses may connect to the database over the network using the OPS$
mechanism
d. OPS$<SID>adm is a valid UNIX user.
e. User <SID>adm permits full privileges.

9.

SAPDBA -check, creates a log in the following directory:
a. \oracle\<SID>\saparch
b. \oracle\<SID>\sapcheck
c. \oracle\<SID>\bin
d. \oracle\<SID>\sapbackup

10. Which of the following are Oracle processes?
a. LGWR
b. DMON
c. PMON
d. SAPDBA
11. Three OS files used in NET8 are:
a. Listner.ora
b. Netsql.ora
c. SQLnet.ora
d. Ora.Lst
e. Tnsnames.ora
12. The Oracle SGA contains the following :
a. The SQL Request area which holds parsed SQL statements.
b. The Database buffer cache
c. The oracle control files
d. The REDO log buffer
e. The REDO log files
13. Backup tapes may be initialized:
a. Using the SAPDBA tool
b. Using the command BRBACKUP – t v <tape name>
c. Using the command BRBACKUP -i -v <tape name>
d. Using the command SAPDBA - check
e. None of the above, tapes must be initialized outside of R/3.
14. The tape label contains:
a. The database name
b. The timestamp of the last backup recorded on the tape
c. The number of backups performed with the tape
d. The tape name
15. The OS file which contains the BRBACKUP/BRARCHIVE configurations is

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

init<SID>.dba
init<SID>.ora
init<SID>.sap
ORA<SID>.sap
None of the above

16. The OneRun Strategya. Allows backuping up of all the database on one tape with the exception of any
archived files.
b. Permits the reusing of one tape for the entire backup cycle.
c. Can backup the database and offline redo logs with the same tape.
d. Ensures less tapes are required and less administrative tasks need to be performed
e. May do BRBACKUP and BRARCHIVE in only one backup run.
17. The Oracle block size is determined
a. By a parameter setting in init<SID>.dba
b. By an R/3 instance profile parameter
c. By a parameter setting in init<SID>.ora
d. By a parameter setting in the DEFAULT.PFL
e. None of the above

18. While running an offline backup, the following R/3 instance parameters may
preserve the R/3 buffers:
a. rdisp/reco_trials and rdisp/reco_sleep_time.
b. rsdb/reco_trials and rsdb/reco_sleep_time
c. rsdb/reco_buffers and rdisp/reco_backup
d. None of the above, the R/3 buffers can never be preserved running an offline
backup.

19.
a.
b.
c.

Which of the following are true regarding RMAN?
Only Incremental backups are possible with RMAN.
RMAN backups cannot be started using the DBA calendar.
The init<SID>.sap parameter setting backup_mode = FULL is the parameter
needed create a full RMAN database backup which will be cataloged as level 0.
d. The init<SID>.sap parameter setting backup_mode = INCR is the parameter
needed create a incremental RMAN database backup which will be cataloged as level
0.
e. Database backups created with the init<SID>.sap parameter setting backup_mode
= ALL can be used as a base level backup for subsequent incremental backups

a.
b.
c.

20. Which of the following are true regarding tablespace administration?
The database must not be active when tablespaces are extended.
Tablespaces cannot be extended.
Tablespaces can be extended by adding a datafile.

d.
e.

Tablespaces can be extended by increasing the size of a datafile.
Only completely fragmented tablespaces should be extended.

1.

Response Time:

a.

Starts when a user request enters the dispatcher queue.

b.

Includes the marginal network time from the user to the dispatcher queue.

c.

Includes Roll-in and Roll-out time.

d.

Includes the network time from the R/3 instance to the database.

e.

Does not include CPU time.

2.

Wait Time:

a.

Starts when user request is stored in the dispatcher queue.

b.

Ends when the request starts to be processed.

c.

Is the time the request sits in the dispatcher queue.

d.

Is measured in microseconds.

e.

Cannot be measured.

3.

Load Time:

a.

Is the amount of time occupying the work process.

b.

Is equal to Response Time – Wait Time.

c.

Is the time needed to load and generate objects like ABAP source code.

d.

Is equal to Response Time – (Database Request Time + Wait time).

e.

Is equal to database request time + wait time.

4.

Database Request Time:

a.

Is equal to Response Time – (Load Time + Wait time).

b.

Starts when a database request passes through the database interface.

c.

Ends when the database interface has delivered the result.

d.

Is the amount of time occupying the workprocesses.

e.

Includes wait time.

5.

A LOAD REPORT is displayed on SM50 when:

a.

A request is sent to the dispatcher.

b.

ABAP source code is read from the database and generated (to the PXA).

c.

A request passes through the database interface.

d.

A request is locked by a dialog workprocess.

e.

ABAP programs create short dumps.

6.

The following information is available from the Process Overview – SM50:
a.

The Operating System Process ID for each workprocess.

b.

The type of workprocess, including DIA, UPD, BTC, ENQ, MSG, SPO.

c.

The Semaphore resource being used.

d.

Top 40 CPU processes.

e.

Average response time.

7. Which of the following may indicate performance problems in terms of Average Response
time?

a.

Average CPU time:
time

less than 40% of average response

b.

Average wait time:

less than 10% of average response time

c.

Average load time:

greater than 40% of average response time

d.
e.

Average DB request time: less than 40% of average response time
Average roll-in time.
response time

8. Significantly high wait time may be an indication that:
a.

The enqueue workprocess is idle.

b.

There is a backlog of LOAD REPORTS.

greater than 20% of average

c.

There are too many idle dialog workprocesses.

d.

There are too many workprocesses for the Dispatcher to service on one R/3 Instance.

e.

More work processes are needed to service all the request in the request queue.

9. The following information is available from the Workload Monitor – ST03:
a.

Average Response Time for dialog workprocesss

b.

Load Averages

c.

Average Wait Time

d.

Database Request Time Average

e.

Average Response Time for Update workprocesses .

10.

The following information is available from the Database Monitor – ST04:

a.

Data Buffer Size.

b.

Data Buffer Quality.

c.

Recursive Calls

d.

Database Request Time Average

e.

Parsed SQL requests held in the database cache.

11.

The Transaction Profile can be found in:

a.

The Process Overview

b.

The Database Monitor

c.

The Workload Monitor

d.

The Operating System Monitor

e.

ST03.

12.

The Program Buffer can have a negative impact on dialog performance if:

a.

The Program Executable Area is completely fragmented.

b.

Gaps equal Freespace

c.

Every new object loaded into the buffer displaces an object that is already in the buffer.

d.

The number of object swaps continues to increase.

e.

The abap/buffersize is not configured the same on each R/3 instance in the system.

13.

Which of the following is true regarding the Table Buffers?

a.

The three table buffers are Full, Generic and Single Record.

b.

All read for updates bypass table buffers.

c.

R/3 Table buffering is more efficient than reading from the database, because more than one
table index can be used.

d.

All R/3 table buffer accesses can be analyzed using an SQL trace.

e.

Invalidations are data entry errors.

14.

Which of the following are good candidates for table buffering?

a.

Any table that is less than 1 MB.

b.

Application tables because they are frequently accessed.

c.

Many Customizing tables since they are typically small, static tables.

d.

Any customer developed table that uses more than one index.

e.

Any transparent table.

15.

Which of the following use local memory ?

a.

Roll-first.

b.

Roll-area.

c.

Heap-nondia.

d.

Total heap.

e.

Roll-Buffer.

16.

Which of the following use shared memory ?

a.

Heap-dia.

b.

Page-buffer.

c.

Extended memory.

d.

Roll-buffer.

e.

Roll area.

17.

Which of the following are true statements ?

a.

Roll-first is a portion of the total Roll Area.

b.

The amount of extended memory that one dialog workprocess can use is limited by the user
quota (ztta/roll-extension), which can never be equal to or greater than the total amount of
extended memory.

c.

Virtual Memory is comprised of both physical memory and OS swap.

d.

A dialog workprocess is dedicated to one transaction when it goes to PRIV mode.

e.

When a transaction exceeds Total Heap area, an ABAP short dump will occur.

18.

Which of the following are true regarding abap/heaplimit?:

a.

An ABAP dump will always occur when a dialog work process reaches the abap/heaplimit.

b.

When a dialog workprocess reaches abap/heaplimit, it is flagged and the workprocess is killed
(a new PID is created) after the transaction has completed.

c.

The abap/heaplimit is the total amount of HEAP memory that a dialog workprocess can use.

d.

Abap/heaplimit is a portion of the total abap/buffersize.

e.

Abap/buffersize determines the size of the abap/heaplimit.

19.

Which of the following are true?:

a.

In non-dialog processing, extended memory cannot be used until all of the Roll-first is used.

b.

In non-dialog processing, HEAP-NonDia is used before extended memory is used.

c.

In non-dialog processing, the Roll Buffer and the Page Buffer are used to hold temporary ABAP
tables.

d.

The biggest difference between dialog and non-dialog memory management is that non-dialog
workprocesses do not use Roll-area.

e.

Background workprocesses and dialog workprocesses compete for space in the Roll buffer
during peak activity on the system.

20.

Important statistics displayed in the Database Monitor (ST04) include:

a.

Logical reads

b.

Physical reads

c.

Data buffer size and quality

d.

Shared pool size and quality

e.

Invalidations in the R/3 table buffers

21.

Which of the following are true statements?

a.

Expensive SQL statements may reduce the performance of the entire R/3 system.

b.

Indexes improve data access for tables, including those that are loaded in R/3 generic table
buffers.

c.

Physical reads are blocks that are read from the database buffer.

d.

An SQL statement is efficient if many blocks are read to find the required records.

e.

Logical reads are blocks that are read from the database buffer.

22.

Which of the following are good rules for creating secondary indexes?:

a.

Use few fields in the index (less than 5).

b.

Use only non-selective fields.

c.

Position the most selective fields at the end of the index.

d.

Position the most selective fileds at the beginning of the index.

e.

Use as many fields as possible to narrow down the search.

23.

The SQL Request area in ST04 contains:

a.

The number of SQL statements that have accessed R/3 table buffers.

b.

Parsed SQL statements that have passed through the database interface.

c.

Only the SELECT statements generated by Oracle processes.

d.

All database exclusive locks.

e.

Only the SELECT statements in the REDO log buffer.

24.

The following will set a database lock:

a.

SELECT FOR UPDATE.

b.

Any ABAP program that executes a native SQL command.

c.

Only the DELETE statements processed by Oracle.

d.

Only SQL statements that access R/3 Basis system tables such as DDNTT.

e.

All table scans

25.

Transactions ST10 and DB05 can be used to :

a.

determine detailed workload statistics (STAT)

b.

detect incorrectly buffered tables in the R/3 table buffers

c.

determine the relevant users on the system

d.

identify dispatcher bottlenecks

e.

identify CPU bottlenecks

26.

ALE:

a.

is basically an interface service which provides high level function modules for exchanging data
between two or more systems.

b.

has its own data storage tables.

c.

requires an EDI subsystem

d.

can only support R/3 systems.

e.

can be used to link R/3 Systems that are independent of each other.

27.

IDOC’s can be created:

a.

only via transaction SPRO.

b.

by change pointers.

c.

by message entry for deferred processing.

d.

directly.

e.

only via transaction BALE.

28.

TRFC’s:

a.

are a part of SAP’s functionality.

b.

are used by ALE for communication between sender and receiver.

c.

require FTP.

d.

are called transactional since a number of function modules are allowed to be bundled into a
single LUW.

e.

are only used by ALE for customizing integrity checks.

29.

Which of the following are IDOC processing options? :

a.

Dispatch Control.

b.

FTP.

c.

Processing mode.

d.

Unit transfer type.

e.

LUW.

30 .

An IDOC :

a.

is a transparent table.

b.

may used by ALE only if an EDI subsystem exists on the network.

c.

may only contain master data.

d.

is always created on the receiving partner system using an external program.

e.

stands for intermediate document.

31 .

The sender and receiver of the IDOC are defined in the:

a.

IDOC data records

b.

IDOC control record

c.

LUW

d.

IDOC status record

e.

subitem

32. From SAP’s perspective, a LOGICAL SYSTEM corresponds to a:
a.

a database.

b.

a client.

c.

a company.

d.

a remote system.

e.

a remote database.

33. ALE customizing is done using:
a.

the BABI generator

b.

transaction SALE

c.

RSNAST00

d.

an external warehouse management (WM) system

e.

SAP’s Business Framework

34.

Which of the following are true?

a.

For performance reasons the TRFC queue should never be reorganized.

b.

The TRFC queue consists of tables on both the sender and receiver of the communication.

c.

The TRFC queue cannot be monitored in R/3 since it is an external process.

d.

TRFC refers to transactional RFC’s.

e.

IDOC transfers between R/3 systems using TRFC’s do not require a logon and password.

1)Which of the following components indicate that R3 is a client / server
system?
a. Multiple DB’s
b. Database server
c. 3 separate hardware servers (DB, applcn & presentation server)
d. Db service, app service & presentation service
2) Which of the following is not contained in R/3 DB?
a. The R/3 Repository
b. The R/3 kernel
c. Customer Data
d. Transaction data
e. Customizing Data
f. The ABAP dictionary
3) Which of the following is correct in regard to R/3 clients?9/15/2003
a. The R/3 client has it’s own customer data and programs which are not
accessible to other clients within the same R/3 system.
b. An R/3 client has all R/3 repository objects and client independent
customizing with all other clients in the R/3 system
c. An R/3 client shares customizing and Applcn data with other clients in
the
same R/3 system
d. An R/3 client enables you to separate applcn data from customizing
data
4) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to SAP Client
Concept
a. All customizing settings are client independent
b. A client has unique set of applcn data
c. A client has it’s own repository objects
d. All customizing settings are client dependant
5) Which of the following strategies enables R/3 customers to avoid
making
modifications to SAP Std objects?
a. Using Enhancement techs such as Program exits & menu exits
b. Modifying SAP delivered programs
c. Changing SAP std functionality using the IMG
d. Performing customizing to provide the required functionality

6) Which of the following statements are correct in regard to IMG?
a. The IMG consists of series of customizing activities for defining a
Companies
Business process
b. The IMG is a online resource providing the necessary info and steps to
help
you implementing the R/3 applcn Modules
c. IMG is client independent
d. All of the above
7) Which of the following strategies enables an Enterprise to meet its
business needs by
changing or enhancing R/3 functionality
a. Maintaining application data using the Various R3 Business transactions
in
the SAP Std
b. Using the ABAP workbench to create the read R/3 repository objects
c. Using customizing to modify R/3 programs after obtaining an access key
from
OSS
d. Using customer Exits to enhance the functionality of existing SAP
Objects
8) Which of the following statements are correct in regards to
modifications
a modification is a change to an SAP Std object
b. A modification must be registered using the SAP OSS (SSCR)
c. SAP recommends modification only if customer’s business meets cannot
be
me by customizing enhancement techs or customer dev
d. All the above
9) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to the
customizing
a. Customizing enables R/3 applcn process to be set to reflect a
companies
business needs
b. Customizing can be performed only from within IMG
c. Customizing is necessary because R/3 delivered w/o Business process.
d. None of the above

10) Which of the following is correct in regard to R/3 repository
a. Customers can develop new repository objects using tools in the ABAP
workbench.
b. Customer developed repository objects reside in the R/3 repository
alongside
std repository objects
c. Customers can create & assign new repository objects to a
development class
d. All of the above
11) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to critical client
roles as
recommended by SAP?
a. Customizing changes can be made in any client
b. All customizing & dev changes should be made in a single R/3 client
c. Repository object should be created and changed in R/3 Quality
assurance
client (QAS)
d. Unit testing should take place in the customizing and dev client
12) Which of the following activities should not be performed within a
system landscape
a. Customizing & dev changes are promoted to a QAS client before being
delivered to PRD
b. The R/3 system is upgraded to a new R/3 release
c. Dev changes are mad directly in the PRD client
d. Changes are assigned to a specific role
13) Which of the following benefits does the 3-system landscape
recommended by SAP
have?
a. Customizing and dev, testing, and prod activities take place in separate
DB
environments and do not affect one another
b. Changes are tested in the QAS system and imported in the PRD system
only
after verification
c. Client independent changes can be made in the DEV system w/o
immediately
affecting the PRD client

d. All of the above
14) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to multiple R/3
clients?
a. All clients in the same R/3 system share the same R/3 repository and
client
independent customizing settings
b. No more than one client in the same R/3 system should allow changes
to
client independent customizing changes.
c. If a client allows for changes to client dependent customizing, the client
should also allow for changes to Client independent customizing objects
d. All of the above.
15) Which of the following statements is correct in regard to setup of 3system landscape
a. There is only R/3 DB for the system landscape
b. One client should allow for the automatic recording of client dependent
customizing and client independent changes.
c. All R/3 systems have the same System ID (SID)
d. All clients must have unique client numbers
Answers:
1. D
2. B
3. B
4. B
5. A, D
6. D
7. B, D
8. D
9. A
10. D
11. B
12. C
13. D
14. D
15. B

Sponsor Documents

Or use your account on DocShare.tips

Hide

Forgot your password?

Or register your new account on DocShare.tips

Hide

Lost your password? Please enter your email address. You will receive a link to create a new password.

Back to log-in

Close